project manual for: university of...

PROJECT MANUAL FOR:

UNIVERSITY OF MISSOURI Medical Science - Sprinkler System

CP160181

SOA PROJECT NUMBER: 15089.00

Issue for Bid Documents

June 26, 2017

ARCHITECT Simon Oswald Architecture

2801 Woodard Drive, Suite 103 Columbia, MO 65202

573-443-1407

MEP ENGINEER Ross & Baruzzini

6 South Old Orchard St Louis, MO 63119

314-918-8383

(This sheet intentionally blank)

PROJECT MANUAL FOR: MEDICAL SCIENCE – SPRINKLER SYSTEM PROJECT NUMBER: CP160181 AT UNIVERSITY OF MISSOURI - COLUMBIA COLUMBIA, MISSOURI FOR: THE CURATORS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF MISSOURI PREPARED BY: Simon Oswald Associates, Inc. DBA Simon Oswald Architecture/SOA Brad Stegemann AIA, LEED AP 2801 Woodard Drive, Suite 103 Columbia, MO 65202 p. 573-443-1407 DATE: June 26, 2017

MU Project #CP160181

PROJECT MANUAL FOR: MEDICAL SCIENCE – SPRINKLER SYSTEM PROJECT NUMBER: CP160181

TABLE OF CONTENTS TITLE PAGE DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Advertisement for Bids 1.A Bid for Lump Sum Contract ....................................................................................... 1.A/1-4

1.B Bidder's Statement of Qualifications ....................................................................... BSQ/1-2

1.B.1 Supplier Diversity Compliance Evaluation Form ........................................................ SD/1-2

1.B.2 Application for Waiver ................................................................................................ SD/3-4

1.B.3 Affidavit for Affirmative Action .................................................................................... SD/5-6

1.B.4 Certifying Supplier Diversity Agencies .......................................................................... SD/7

1.B.5 Newspapers for Outreach to Diverse Suppliers ............................................................ SD/8

1.B.6 Affidavit of Supplier Diversity Participation ................................................................... SD/9

1.C Information for Bidders .............................................................................................. IFB/1-5

1.D General Conditions ................................................................................................. GC/1-43

1.E Special Conditions ................................................................................................... SC/1-10

1.E.1 Scheduling Specification ............................................................................................ SS/1-4

1.E.2 Shop Drawing and Submittal Log ......................................................................... SDSL/1-5

1.E.3 Operating Instructions and Service Manual Log .................................................. OMML/1-2

1.E.4 Closeout Log ....................................................................................................... CLOSL/1-2

1.E.5 Commissioning Plan .............................................................................................. COM/1-8

1.E.6 Sustainability Report ................................................................................................... SUS/1

1.F Index of Drawings ................................................................................................ INDEX/1-2

1.G Prevailing Wage Rates ........................................................................................... PW/1-14

DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 4119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION ........................................................................ 7

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE

03 3053 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ........................................................... 4


DIVISION 4 MASONRY (NOT USED)

DIVISION 5 METALS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 6 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES (NOT USED)

DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 8413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING ...................................................................................... 6

07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS ............................................................................................................. 7

DIVISION 8 OPENINGS

08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES......................................................................... 4

08 3113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES ...................................................................................... 2

08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE ........................................................................................................... 7

DIVISION 9 FINISHES

09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING ........................................................................... 5

09 2300 GYPSUM PLASTERING .................................................................................................... 6

09 2613 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING .................................................................................... 5

09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD .............................................................................................................. 9

09 5113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS ..................................................................................... 6

09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING ........................................................................................................ 6

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES (NOT USED)

DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)

DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)

DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS ............................................................................................. 7

21 0548.13 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT .......... 3

21 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ...................... 4

21 1200 FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES ............................................................................... 11

21 1313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS ................................................................................. 16

21 3113 ELECTRICAL-DRIVE CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS ........................................................ 6


21 3400 PRESSURE MAINTENANCE PUMPS ............................................................................... 3

21 3900 CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE-PUMP DRIVERS .................................................................. 8

DIVISION 22 PLUMBING (NOT USED)

DIVISION 23 HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

23 0500 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIAL AND METHODS ........................................................ 10

23 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ............................................................................................. 9

23 0700 MECHANICAL INSULATION ............................................................................................ 11

23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING ............................................................................................................ 6

23 2123 HYDRONIC PUMPS ........................................................................................................... 3

DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL

26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ........................................................... 13

26 0519 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES .......................................................................................... 6

26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING ........................................................................................... 6

26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ............................................................................................. 5

26 0533 RACEWAYS ........................................................................................................................ 8

26 0534 BOXES CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES .......................................................................... 5

26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ............................................................. 9

26 0573 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES .............................................................................................. 9

26 0600 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION .............................................................................................. 4

23 2413 SWITCHBOARDS ............................................................................................................... 6

23 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES .................................................................................................... 3

DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 3111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM ......................................................... 10

DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK (NOT USED) DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (NOT USED) DIVISION 33 UTILITIES (NOT USED) APPENDIX A – “INTERIOR FINISH KEY” .................................................................................................... 1

END OF SECTION

CAMPUS FACILITIES

General Services Bldg. Columbia, Missouri 65211

Telephone: (573) 882-3091 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Sealed bids for: MEDICAL SCIENCE – SPRINKLER SYSTEM UNIVERSITY OF MISSOURI COLUMBIA, MISSOURI PROJECT NUMBER: CP160181 CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE $610,000 - 675,000 will be received by the Curators of the University of Missouri, Owner, at Campus Facilities, Planning, Design & Construction, Room L100 (Front Reception Desk), General Services Building, University of Missouri, Columbia, Missouri 65211, until 1:30 p.m., C.T., July 25, 2017 and then immediately opened and publicly read aloud. Drawings, specifications, and other related contract information may be obtained at http://operations-webapps.missouri.edu/pdc/adsite/ad.html. Electronic bid sets are available at no cost and may be printed as desired by the plan holders. No paper copies will be issued. If paper copies are desired, it is the responsibility of the user to print the files or have them printed. Questions regarding the scope of work should be directed to Brad Stegemann with Simon Oswald Architecture at 573-443-1407 or [email protected]. Questions regarding commercial conditions should be directed to Jude Wawrzyniak at (573) 882-9340 or [email protected] A prebid meeting will be held at 10:00 a.m., C.T., July 12, 2017 in the General Services Bldg., Rm 194A, University of Missouri, Columbia, Missouri, followed by a walk-through at the site. All interested bidders are invited to attend this meeting. A walk-through of the project may be scheduled by contacting the Prebid Inspection Guide at (573) 882-2228. Information regarding bid results will be available the day following the bid opening by calling (573) 882-1133 A Diversity Participation goal of 10% MBE / 3% SDVE / 10% Combined WBE, DBE and Veteran Owned Business has been established for this contract. The Owner reserves the right to waive informalities in bids and to reject any and all bids. Individuals with special needs as addressed by the Americans with Disabilities Act may contact (573) 882-1133. Advertisement Date: June 26, 2017 Gary L. Ward Vice Chancellor for Operations and Chief Operating Officer University of Missouri

http://operations-webapps.missouri.edu/pdc/adsite/ad.html

MU Project #CP160181 1.A - 1

SECTION 1.A BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACT BID OF (hereinafter called "Bidder") a corporation* organized and existing under laws of the State of , a partnership* consisting of , an individual* trading as , a joint venture* consisting of . *Insert Corporation(s), partnership or individual, as applicable. TO: Curators of the University of Missouri c/o Associate Vice Chancellor – Facilities

Room L100, General Services Building Columbia, MO 65211

1. Bidder, in compliance with invitation for bids for construction work in accordance with Drawings and

Specifications prepared by SIMON OSWALD ASSOCIATES, INC., entitled MEDICAL SCIENCE – SPRINKLER SYSTEM, project number CP160181, dated June 26, 2017 having examined Contract Documents and site of proposed work, and being familiar with all conditions pertaining to construction of proposed project, including availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials and supplies to construct project in accordance with Contract Documents, within time set forth herein at prices stated below. Prices shall cover all expenses, including taxes not covered by the University of Missouri’s tax exemption status, incurred in performing work required under Contract documents, of which this Bid is a part.

Bidder acknowledges receipt of following addenda:

Addendum No. Dated Addendum No. Dated Addendum No. Dated Addendum No. Dated

2. In following Bid(s), amount(s) shall be written in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy between words and figures, words shall govern.

3. BID PRICING a. Base Bid:

The Bidder agrees to furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required to modify an existing mechanical room to create a dedicated fire suppression system pump room with new pump and integration of a standpipe system to serve all seven floors of the Medical Science Building in preparation for future projects that will add and/or modify sprinkler systems throughout the building; all as indicated on the Drawings and described in these Specifications for sum of:

DOLLARS ($ ).


4. PROJECT COMPLETION

a. Contract Period - Contract period begins on the day the Contractor receives unsigned Contract, Performance Bond, Payment Bond, and "Instructions for Execution of Contract, Bonds, and Insurance Certificates." Bidder agrees to complete project within Two-Hundred Ten (210) calendar days from receipt of aforementioned documents. Fifteen (15) calendar days have been allocated in construction schedule for receiving aforementioned documents from Bidder.

b. Commencement - Contractor agrees to commence work on this project after the "Notice to

Proceed" is issued by the Owner. "Notice to Proceed" will be issued within seven (7) calendar days after Owner receives properly prepared and executed Contract documents listed in paragraph 4.a. above.

c. Special Scheduling Requirements – Refer to Special Conditions for specific scheduling requirements for this project.

5. SUBCONTRACTOR LIST:

Bidder hereby certifies that the following subcontractors will be used in performance of Work:

NOTE: Failure to list subcontractors for each category of work identified on this form or listing more than one subcontractor for any category of work without designating the portion of work performed by each shall be grounds for rejection of bid. List name, city, and state of designated subcontractor, for each category of work listed in Bid For Lump Sum Contract. If work within a category will be performed by more than one subcontractor, Bidder shall provide name, city, and state of each subcontractor and specify exact portion of work to be performed by each. If acceptance/non-acceptance of Alternates will affect designation of a subcontractor, Bidder shall provide information, for each affected category, with this bid form. If Bidder intends to perform any designated subcontract work by using Bidder's own employees, then Bidder shall list their own name, city, and state. The bidder may petition the Owner to change a listed subcontractor only within 48 hours of the bid opening. See Information For Bidders Section 16 List of Subcontractors for requirements.

Work to be performed Subcontractor Name, City, State Fire Protection 6. SUPPLIER DIVERSITY PARTICIPATION GOALS

a. The Contractor shall have as a goal, subcontracting with Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) of ten percent (10%), with Service Disabled Veteran Owned Business (SDVE) of three percent (3%); and with Women Business Enterprise (WBE), Disadvantage Business Enterprise (DBE), and/or Veteran Owned Business of ten percent (10%) of awarded contract price for work to be performed.

b. Requests for waiver of this goal shall be submitted on the attached Application For Waiver

form. A determination by the Director of Facilities Planning & Development, UM, that a good faith effort has not been made by Contractor to achieve above stated goal may result in rejection of bid.


c. The Undersigned proposes to perform work with following Supplier Diversity participation

level: MBE PERCENTAGE PARTICIPATION: _____________________ percent ( %) SDVE PERCENTAGE PARTICIPATION: _____________________ percent ( %)

WBE, DBE, and/or VETERAN PERCENTAGE PARTICIPATION: _______ percent ( %)

d. A Supplier Diversity Compliance Evaluation form shall be submitted with this bid for each

diverse subcontractor to be used on this project.

7. BIDDER'S ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

a. Bidder declares that he has had an opportunity to examine the site of the work and he has examined Contract Documents therefore; that he has carefully prepared his bid upon the basis thereof; that he has carefully examined and checked bid, materials, equipment and labor required thereunder, cost thereof, and his figures therefore. Bidder hereby states that amount, or amounts, set forth in bid is, or are, correct and that no mistake or error has occurred in bid or in Bidder's computations upon which this bid is based. Bidder agrees that he will make no claim for reformation, modifications, revisions or correction of bid after sched-uled closing time for receipt of bids.

b. Bidder agrees that bid shall not be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days after scheduled

closing time for receipt of bids.

c. Bidder understands that Owner reserves right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informalities in bidding.

d. Accompanying the bid is a bid bond, or a certified check, or an irrevocable letter of credit, or

a cashier's check payable without condition to "The Curators of the University of Missouri" which is an amount at least equal to five percent (5%) of amount of largest possible total bid herein submitted, including consideration of Alternates.

e. Accompanying the bid is a Bidder's Statement of Qualifications. Failure of Bidder to submit

the Bidder's Statement of Qualifications with the bid may cause the bid to be rejected. Owner does not maintain Bidder's Statements of Qualifications on file.

f. It is understood and agreed that bid security of two (2) lowest and responsive Bidders will be

retained until Contract has been executed and an acceptable Performance Bond and Payment Bond has been furnished. It is understood and agreed that if the bid is accepted and the undersigned fails to execute the Contract and furnish acceptable Performance/Payment Bond as required by Contract Documents, accompanying bid security will be realized upon or retained by Owner. Otherwise, the bid security will be returned to the undersigned.

8. BIDDER'S CERTIFICATE

Bidder hereby certifies:

a. His bid is genuine and is not made in interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, firm or corporation, and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association or corporation.


b. He has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid.

c. He has not solicited or induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain from bidding.

d. He has not sought by collusion or otherwise to obtain for himself any advantage over any

other Bidder or over Owner.

e. He will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex or national origin in connection with performance of work.

f. By virtue of policy of the Board of Curators, and by virtue of statutory authority, a preference

will be given to materials, products, supplies, provisions and all other articles produced, manufactured, mined or grown within the State of Missouri. By virtue of policy of the Board of Curators, preference will also be given to all Missouri firms, corporations, or individuals, all as more fully set forth in "Information For Bidders."

9. BIDDER'S SIGNATURE

Note: All signatures shall be original; not copies, photocopies, stamped, etc.

Authorized Signature Date

Printed Name Title

Company Name Mailing Address City, State, Zip Phone No. Federal Employer ID No.

Fax No. E-Mail Address

Circle one: Individual Partnership Corporation Joint Venture If a corporation, incorporated under the laws of the State of__________ Licensed to do business in the State of Missouri? ____yes _____no

(Each Bidder shall complete bid form by manually signing on the proper signature line above and supplying required information called for in connection with the signature. Information is necessary for proper preparation of the Contract, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Each Bidder shall supply information called for in accompanying "Bidder's Statement of Qualifications.")

END OF SECTION

UNIVERSITY OF MISSOURI BIDDER'S STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS Submit with Bid for Lump Sum Contract in separate envelope appropriately labeled. Attach additional sheet if necessary. 1. Company Name Phone# Fax #: Address 2. Number of years in business . If not under present firm name, list previous firm names and types of organization. 3. List contracts on hand (complete the following schedule, include telephone number).

Project & Address Owner/Owner's Representative

Phone Number

Architect Amount of your Contract

Percent Completed

4. General character of work performed by your company personnel. 5. List important projects completed in the last five (5) years on a type similar to the work now bid for,

including approximate cost and telephone number. Project & Address Owner/Owner's

Representative Phone Number

Architect Amount of your Contract

Percent Completed

6. Other experience qualifying you for the work now bid. 7. No default has been made in any contract complete or incomplete except as noted below: (a) Number of contracts on which default was made (b) Description of defaulted contracts and reason therefor 8. (a) Have you or your company participated in any contract subject to an equal opportunity clause similar

to that described in the General Conditions? Yes No (b) Have you filed all required compliance reports? Yes No BSQ/1 3/2015 Revision

(c) Is fifty percent or more of your company owned by a minority? Yes No (d) Is fifty percent or more of your company owned by a woman? Yes No (e) Is fifty percent or more of your company owned by a veteran or service disabled veteran? Yes No (f) Is your company a Disadvantaged Business Enterprise? Yes No 9. Have you or your company been suspended or debarred from working at any University of Missouri

campus? Yes No (If the answer is "yes", give details.) 10. Have any administrative or legal proceedings been started against you or your company alleging violation

of any wage and hour regulations or laws? Yes No (If the answer is "yes", give details.) 11. Workers Compensation Experience Modification Rates (last 3 yrs): / / _ Incidence Rates (last 3 years): / / 12. List banking references. 13. (a) Do you have a current confidential financial statement on file with Owner? Yes No (If not, and if desired, Bidder may submit such statement with bid, in

a separate sealed and labeled envelope.) (b) If not, upon request will you file a detailed confidential financial statement within three (3) days? Yes No Dated at this day of 20 Name of Organization Signature Printed Name Title of Person Signing END OF SECTION

BSQ/2 3/2015 Revision

SD/1

SUPPLIER DIVERSITY COMPLIANCE EVALUATION FORM This form shall be completed by Bidders and submitted with the Bidder's Statement of Qualifications form for each diverse firm who will function as a subcontractor on the contract. The undersigned submits the following data with respect to this firm's assurance to meet the goal for Supplier Diversity participation. I. Project:

II. Name of General Contractor: III. Name of Diverse Firm:

Address:

Phone No.: Fax No.:

Status (check one) MBE _____ WBE _____ Veteran_____ Service Disabled Veteran______ DBE______ IV. Describe the subcontract work to be performed. (List Base Bid work and any Alternate work separately):

Base Bid:

V. Dollar amount of contract to be subcontracted to the Diverse firm:

Base Bid:

Alternate(s), (Identify separately):

VI. Is the proposed subcontractor listed in the Directory of M/W/DBE Vendors, Directory of Serviced Disabled

Veterans and/or the Directory of Veterans maintained by the State of Missouri?

Yes ______ No ______

SD/2

Is the proposed subcontractor certified as a diverse supplier by any of the following: federal government agencies, state agencies, State of Missouri city or county government agencies, Minority and/or WBE certifying agencies?

Yes ______ No ______ If yes, please provide details and attach

a copy of the certification.

Does the proposed subcontractor have a signed document from their attorney certifying the Supplier as a Diverse and meeting the 51% owned and committed requirement?

Yes ______ No ______ If yes, please attach letter.

Signature: ________ Name: Title: Date:

SD/3

APPLICATION FOR WAIVER This form shall be completed and submitted with the Bidder's Statement of Qualifications. Firms wishing to be considered for award are required to demonstrate that a good faith effort has been made to include diverse suppliers. This form will be used to evaluate the extent to which a good faith effort has been made. The undersigned submits the following data with respect to the firm's efforts to meet the goal for Supplier Diversity Participation. 1. List pre-bid conferences your firm attended where Supplier Diversity requirements were discussed.

2. Identify advertising efforts undertaken by your firm which were intended to recruit potential diverse subcontractors for

various aspects of this project. Provide names of newspapers, dates of advertisements and copies of ads that were run.

3. Note specific efforts to contact in writing those diverse suppliers capable of and likely to participate as subcontractors

for this project.

4. Describe steps taken by your firm to divide work into areas in which diverse suppliers/contractors would be capable of

performing.

5. What efforts were taken to negotiate with prospective diverse suppliers/contractors for specific sub-bids? Include the

names, addresses, and telephone numbers of diverse suppliers/contractors contacted, a description of the information given to diverse suppliers/contractors regarding plans and specifications for the assigned work, and a statement as to why additional agreements were not made with diverse suppliers/contractors.

6. List reasons for rejecting a diverse supplier/contractor which has been contacted.

SD/4

8. Describe the follow-up contacts with diverse suppliers/contractors made by your firm after the initial solicitation.

9. Describe the efforts made by your firm to provide interested diverse suppliers/contractors with sufficiently detailed information about the plans, specifications and requirements of the contract.

10. Describe your firm's efforts to locate diverse suppliers/contractors.

Based on the above stated good faith efforts made to include supplier diversity, the bidder hereby requests that the original supplier diversity percentage goal be waived and that the percentage goal for this project be set at ________ percent.

The undersigned hereby certifies, having read the answers contained in the foregoing Application for Waiver, that they are true and correct to the best of his/her knowledge, information and belief.

Signature

Name

Title

Company

Date

SD/5

AFFIDAVIT

"The undersigned swears that the foregoing statements are true and correct and include all material information necessary to identify and explain the operation of ____________________________ ____________________(name of firm) as well as the ownership thereof. Further, the undersigned agrees to provide through the prime contractor or directly to the Contracting Officer current, complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed on the project, the payment therefore and any proposed changes, if any, of the project, the foregoing arrangements and to permit the audit and examination of books, records and files of the named firm. Any material misrepresentation will be grounds for terminating any contract which may be awarded and for initiating action under federal or state laws concerning false statements."

Note - If, after filing this information and before the work of this firm is completed on the contract covered by this regulation, there is any significant change in the information submitted, you must inform the Director of Facilities Planning and Development of the change either through the prime contractor or directly. Signature Name Title Date Corporate Seal (where appropriate) Date State of County of On this _______________________________________ day of _________________________________________, 19 ,

before me appeared (name) __________________________________________________ to me personally known, who, being

duly sworn, did execute the foregoing affidavit, and did state that he or she was properly authorized by (name of firm)

to execute the affidavit and did so as his or her own free act and deed. (Seal) Notary Public Commission expires

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

SD/6

AFFIDAVIT FOR AFFIRMATIVE ACTION

State of Missouri )

) ss. County of ) _______________________________________________________________________ first being duly sworn on his/her oath states: that he/she is the (sole proprietor, partner, or officer) of __________________________________________________ _______________________ a (sole proprietorship, partnership, corporation), and as such (sole proprietor, partner, or officer) is duly authorized to make this affidavit on behalf of said (sole proprietorship, partnership, corporation); that under the contract known as "___________________________________________________________________________________________" Project No. ________________ less than 50 persons in the aggregate will be employed and therefore, the applicable Affirmative Action requirements as set forth in the "Nondiscrimination in Employment Equal Opportunity," Supplemental Special Conditions, and Article 13 in the General Conditions do not apply.

Subscribed and sworn before me this _______________ day of ___________________________, 19________. My commission expires ___________________________________________________________, 19________.

SD/7

CERTIFYING SUPPLIER DIVERSITYAGENCIES Diverse firms are defined in General Conditions Articles 1.1.7 and those businesses must be certified as disadvantaged by an approved agency. The Bidder is responsible for obtaining information regarding the certification status of a firm. A list of certified firms may be obtained by contacting the agencies listed below. Any firm listed as disadvantaged by any of the following agencies will be classified as a diverse firm by the Owner. St. Louis Development Corporation 1015 Locust St. Louis, MO 63101 314/622-3400; 314/622-3413 (Fax) CONTACT: Minority Business Development Manager Metro 707 North First Street St. Louis, MO 63102-2595 314/982-1400; 314/982-1558 (Fax) CONTACT: Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Coordinator St. Louis Minority Business Council 308 North 21st St., 7th Floor St. Louis, MO 63101 314/241-1143; 314/241-1073 (Fax) CONTACT: Executive Director U.S. Small Business Administration - St. Louis, MO 8(a) Contractors, Minority Small Business 1222 Spruce Street, Suite 10.103 St. Louis, MO 63101 314/539-6600; 202/481-6565 (Fax) CONTACT: Business Opportunity Specialist Lambert St. Louis International Airport 11495 Navaid Bridgeton, MO 63044 314/551-5000; 314/551-5013 (Fax) CONTACT: Program Specialist City of Kansas City, Missouri Human Relations Department, MBE/WBE Division 4th Floor, City Hall 414 E. 12th Street Kansas City, MO 64106 816/513-1836; 816/513-1805 (Fax) CONTACT: Minority Business Specialist Mid America Minority Development Council 7777 Admiral Boulevard Kansas City, MO 64106 816/221-4200; 816/221-4212 (Fax) CONTACT: President

U.S. Small Business Administration - Kansas City, MO 8(a) Contractors, Minority Small Business 1000 Walnut, Suite 500 Kansas City, MO 64106 816/426-4900; 816/426-4939 (Fax) CONTACT: Business Opportunity Specialist Missouri Department of Transportation Division of Construction P.O. Box 270 Jefferson City, MO 65102 573/751-6801; 573/526-5640-6555 (Fax) CONTACT: Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Coordinator Illinois Department of Transportation MBE/WBE Certification Section 2300 Dirksen Parkway Springfield, IL 62764 217/782-5490; 217/785-1524 (Fax) CONTACT: Certification Manager State of Missouri-Office of Administration Office of Supplier & Workforce Diversity P.O. Box 809 Jefferson City, MO 65102 573/751-8130; 573/522-8078 (Fax) CONTACT: MBE/WBE Certification Coordinator

SD/8

Minority Newspapers Dos Mundos Bilingual Newspaper

902A Southwest Blvd. Kansas City, MO 64108 816-221-4747 www.dosmundos.com

Kansas City Hispanic News 2918 Southwest Blvd. Kansas City, MO 64108 816/472-5246 www.kchispanicnews.com The Kansas City Globe

615 E. 29th Street Kansas City, MO 64109 816-531-5253 www.thekcglobe.com/about_us.php

St. Louis American

4144 Lindell St. Louis, MO 63108 314-533-8000 www.stlamerican.com

St. Louis Chinese American News

1766 Burns Ave, Suite 201 St. Louis, MO 63132 314-432-3858 www.scannews.com

St. Louis Business Journal 815 Olive St., Suite 100 St. Louis, MO 63101 314-421-6200 www.bizjournal.com/stlouis Kansas City Business Journal 1100 Main Street, Suite 210 Kansas City, MO 64105 816-421-5900 www.bizjournals.com/kansascity

http://www.dosmundos.com/

http://www.kchispanicnews.com/

http://www.thekcglobe.com/about_us.php

http://www.stlamerican.com/

http://www.scannews.com/

http://www.bizjournal.com/stlouis

http://www.bizjournals.com/kansascity

SD/9

AFFIDAVIT OF SUPPLIER DIVERSITY PARTICIPATION The apparent low Bidder shall complete and submit this form within 48 hours of bid opening for each Diverse firm that will participate on the contract. 1. Diverse Firm:

Contact Name:

Address: Phone No.: E-Mail:

Status (check one) MBE � WBE � Veteran � Service Disabled Veteran � DBE � If MBE, Certified as (circle one): 1) Black American 2) Hispanic American 3) Native American 4) Asian American

2. Is the proposed diverse firm certified by an approved agency [see IFB article 15]? Yes � No �

Agency: [attach copy of certification authorization from agency]

Certification Number: 3. Diverse firm scope work and bid/contract dollar amount of participation (List Base Bid and Alternate work separately). The final

Dollar amount will be determined at substantial completion:

Scope of Work Bid/Contract Amount Final Dollar Amount Base Bid

Alternate #1

Alternate #2

Alternate #3

Alternate #4

Alternate #5

Alternate #6

The undersigned certifies that the information contained herein (i.e. Scope of Work and Bid/Contract Amount) is true and correct to the best of their knowledge, information and belief. General Contractor: Diverse Firm: Signature: Signature: Name: Name: Title: Title: Date: Date: The undersigned certifies that the information contained herein (i.e. Scope of Work and Final Dollar Amount) is true and correct to the best of their knowledge, information and belief. If the Final Dollar Amount is different than the Bid/Contract Amount, then attach justification for the difference. . Contractor: Diverse Firm: Signature: Signature: Name: Name: Title: Title: Date: Date:

IFB/1 09/16

University of Missouri INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS Page No. 1. Contract Documents ........................................................................................................................................................... IFB/1 2. Bidder's Obligation ............................................................................................................................................................ IFB/1 3. Interpretation of Documents .............................................................................................................................................. IFB/1 4. Bids .................................................................................................................................................................................... IFB/1 5. Modification and Withdrawal of Bids ................................................................................................................................ IFB/2 6. Signing of Bids .................................................................................................................................................................. IFB/2 7. Bid Security ....................................................................................................................................................................... IFB/2 8. Bidder’s Statement of Qualifications ................................................................................................................................. IFB/2 9. Award of Contract .............................................................................................................................................................. IFB/2 10. Contract Execution ............................................................................................................................................................ IFB/2 11. Contract Security ............................................................................................................................................................... IFB/3 12. Time of Completion ........................................................................................................................................................... IFB/3 13. Number of Contract Documents ........................................................................................................................................ IFB/3 14. Missouri Products and Missouri Firms .............................................................................................................................. IFB/3 15. Supplier Diversity .............................................................................................................................................................. IFB/3 16. List of Subcontractors ........................................................................................................................................................ IFB/5 1. Contract Documents 1.1 Drawings, specifications, and other contract documents, pursuant to work which is to be done, may be obtained shown in the Advertisement for Bids and Special Conditions. 2. Bidder Obligations 2.1 Before submitting bids each bidder shall carefully examine the drawings and specifications and related contract documents, visit site of work and fully inform themselves as to all existing conditions, facilities, restrictions and other matters which can affect the work or the cost thereof. 2.2 Each bidder shall include in their bid the cost of all work and materials required to complete the contract in a first-class manner as hereinafter specified. 2.3 Failure or omission of any bidder to receive or examine any form, instrument, addendum, or other document, or to visit the site and acquaint themselves with existing conditions, shall in no way relieve them from any obligation with respect to their bid or contract, and no extra compensation will be allowed by reason of any thing or matter concerning which bidder should have fully informed themselves prior to bidding. 2.4 Submission of bids shall be deemed acceptance of the above obligations and each and every obligation required to be performed by all of the contract documents in the event the bid is accepted. 3. Interpretation of Documents 3.1 If any prospective bidder is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the drawings and specifications or contract documents, they shall submit a written request to the Architect for an interpretation. 3.2 Requests for such interpretations shall be delivered to the Architect at least one (1) week prior to time for receipt of bids.

3.3 Bids shall be based only on interpretations issued in the form of addenda mailed to each person who is on the Architect's record as having received a set of the contract documents. 4. Bids 4.1 Bids shall be received separately or in combination as shown in and required by the Bid for Lump Sum contract. Bids will be completed so as to include insertion of amounts for alternate bids, unit prices and cost accounting data. 4.2 Bidders shall apportion each base bid between various phases of the work, as stipulated in the Bid for Lump Sum contract. All work shall be done as defined in the specifications and as indicated on the drawings. 4.3 Bids shall be presented in sealed envelopes which shall be plainly marked "Bids for (indicate name of project from cover sheet)”, and mailed or delivered to the building and room number specified in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders shall be responsible for actual delivery of bids during business hours, and it shall not be sufficient to show that a bid was mailed in time to be received before scheduled closing time for receipt of bids, nor shall it be sufficient to show that a bid was somewhere in a university facility. 4.4 The bidder's price shall include all federal sales, excise, and similar taxes, which may be lawfully assessed in connection with their performance of work and purchase of materials to be incorporated in the work. City & State taxes shall not be included as defined within Article 3.16 of the General Conditions for Construction Contract included in the contract documents. 4.5 Bids shall be submitted on a single bid form, furnished by the Owner or Architect. Do not remove the bid form from the specifications. 4.6 No bidder shall stipulate in their bid any conditions not contained in the bid form.

IFB/2 09/16

4.7 The Owner reserves the right to waive informalities in bids and to reject any or all bids. 5. Modification and Withdrawal of Bids 5.1 The bidder may withdraw their bid at any time before the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids, but no bidder may withdraw their bid after the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids. 5.2 Only telegrams, letters and other written requests for modifications or correction of previously submitted bids, contained in a sealed envelope which is plainly marked "Modification of Bid on (name of project on cover sheet),” which are addressed in the same manner as bids, and are received by Owner before the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids will be accepted and bids corrected in accordance with such written requests. 6. Signing of Bids 6.1 Bids which are signed for a partnership shall be manually signed in the firm name by at least one partner, or in the firm name by Attorney-in-Fact. If signed by Attorney-in-Fact there should be attached to the bid, a Power of Attorney evidencing authority to sign the bid dated the same date as the bid and executed by all partners of the firm. 6.2 Bids that are signed for a corporation shall have the correct corporate name thereon and the signature of an authorized officer of the corporation manually written below corporate name. Title of office held by the person signing for the corporation shall appear below the signature of the officer. 6.3 Bids that are signed by an individual doing business under a firm name, shall be manually signed in the name of the individual doing business under the proper firm name and style. 6.4 Bids that are signed under joint venture shall be manually signed by officers of the firms having authority to sign for their firm. 7. Bid Security 7.1 Each bid shall be accompanied by a bid bond, certified check, or cashier's check, acceptable to and payable without condition to The Curators of the University of Missouri, in an amount at least equal to five percent (5%) of bidder's bid including additive alternates. 7.2 Bid security is required as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a written contract and furnish a performance bond within the time and in form as specified in these specifications; and if successful bidder fails to do so, the bid security will be realized upon or retained by the Owner. The apparent low bidder shall notify the Owner in writing within 48 hours (2 work days) of the bid opening of any circumstance that may affect the bid security including, but not limited to, a bidding error. This notification will not guarantee release of the bidder’s security and/or the bidder from the Bidder’s Obligations. 7.3 If a bid bond is given as a bid security, the amount of the bond may be stated as an amount equal to at least five percent (5%) of the bid, including additive alternates,

described in the bid. The bid bond shall be executed by the bidder and a responsible surety licensed in the State of Missouri with a Best’s rating of no less than A-/XI. 7.4 It is specifically understood that the bid security is a guarantee and shall not be considered as liquidated damages for failure of bidder to execute and deliver their contract and performance bond, nor limit or fix bidder's liability to Owner for any damages sustained because of failure to execute and deliver the required contract and performance bond. 7.5 Bid security of the two (2) lowest and responsive Bidders will be retained by the Owner until a contract has been executed and an acceptable bond has been furnished, as required hereby, when such bid security will be returned. Surety bid bonds of all other bidders will be destroyed and all other alternative forms of bid bonds will be returned to them within ten (10) days after Owner has determined the two (2) lowest and responsive bids. 8. Bidder's Statement of Qualifications 8.1 Each bidder submitting a bid shall present evidence of their experience, qualifications, financial responsibility and ability to carry out the terms of the contract by completing and submitting with their bid the schedule of information set forth in the form furnished in the bid form. 8.2 Such information, a single copy required in a separate sealed envelope, will be treated as confidential information by the Owner, within the meaning of Missouri Statue 610.010. 8.3 Bids not accompanied with current Bidder's Statement of Qualifications may be rejected. 9. Award of Contract 9.1 The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with the work, including, but not by way of limitation, contracts for furnishing and installation of furniture, equipment, machines, appliances, and other apparatus. 9.2 In awarding the contract, the Owner may take into consideration the bidder's, and their subcontractor’s, ability to handle promptly the additional work, skill, facilities, capacity, experience, ability, responsibility, previous work, financial standing of bidder, and the bidder’s ability to provide the required bonds and insurance; quality, efficiency and construction of equipment proposed to be furnished; period of time within which equipment is proposed to be furnished and delivered; success in achieving the specified Supplier Diversity goal, or demonstrating a good faith effort as described in Article 15; necessity of prompt and efficient completion of work herein described, and the bidder’s status as suspended or debarred. Inability of any bidder to meet the requirements mentioned above may be cause for rejection of their bid. 10. Contract Execution 10.1 The Contractor shall submit within fifteen (15) days from receipt of notice, the documents required in Article 9 of the General Conditions for Construction Contract included in the contract documents.

IFB/3 09/16

10.2 No bids will be considered binding upon the Owner until the documents listed above have been furnished. Failure of Contractor to execute and submit these documents within the time period specified will be treated, at the option of the Owner, as a breach of the bidder's bid security under Article 7 and the Owner shall be under no further obligation to Bidder. 11. Contract Security 11.1 When the Contract sum exceeds $50,000, the Contractor shall procure and furnish a Performance bond and a Payment bond in the form prepared by Owner. Each bond shall be in the amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract sum, as well as adjustments to the Contract Sum. The Performance Bond shall secure and guarantee Contractor’s faithful performance of this Contract, including but not limited to Contractor’s obligation to correct defects after final payment has been made as required by the Contract Documents. The Payment Bond shall secure and guarantee payment of all persons performing labor on the Project under this Contract and furnishing materials in connection with this Contract. These Bonds shall be in effect through the duration of the Contract plus the Guaranty Period as required by the Contract Documents. 11.2 The bonds required hereunder shall be meet all requirements of Article 11 of the General Conditions for Construction Contract included in the contract documents. 11.3 If the surety of any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to conduct business in the State of Missouri is terminated, or it ceases to meet the requirements of this Article 11, Contractor shall within ten (10) days substitute another bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. If Contractor fails to make such substitution, Owner may procure such required bonds on behalf of Contractor at Contractor’s expense. 12. Time of Completion 12.1 Contractors shall agree to commence work within five (5) days of the date "Notice to Proceed" is received from the Owner, and the entire work shall be completed by the completion date specified or within the number of consecutive calendar days stated in the Special Conditions. The duration of the construction period, when specified in consecutive calendar days, shall begin when the contractor receives notice requesting the documents required in Article 9 of the General Conditions for Construction Contract included in the contract documents. 13. Number of Contract Documents 13.1 The Owner will furnish the Contractor a copy of the executed contract and performance bond. 13.2 The Owner will furnish the Contractor the number of copies of complete sets of drawings and specifications for the work, as well as, clarification and change order drawings pertaining to change orders required during construction as set forth in the Special Conditions. 14. Missouri Products and Missouri Firms 14.1 The Curators of the University of Missouri have adopted a policy which is binding upon all employees and departments of the University of Missouri, and which by contract, shall be binding upon independent contractors and

subcontractors with the University of Missouri whereby all other things being equal, and when the same can be secured without additional cost over foreign products, or products of other states, a preference shall be granted in all construction, repair and purchase contracts, to all products, commodities, materials, supplies and articles mined, grown, produced and manufactured in marketable quantity and quality in the State of Missouri, and to all firms, corporations or individuals doing business as Missouri firms, corporations or individuals. Each bidder submitting a bid agrees to comply with, and be bound by the foregoing policy. 15. SUPPLIER DIVERSITY 15.1 Award of Contract The Supplier Diversity participation goal for this project is stated on the Bid for Lump Sum Contract Form, and the Owner will take into consideration the bidder's success in achieving the Supplier Diversity participation goal in awarding the contract. Inability of any bidder to meet this requirement may be cause for rejection of their bid. The University will grant a three (3) point bonus preference to a Missouri based, certified Service Disabled Veteran Enterprise (SDVE) bidder as defined in Article 1 – (Supplier Diversity Definitions) of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction included in the contract documents. 15.2 List of Supplier Diversity Firms 15.2.1 The bidder shall submit as part of their bid a list of diverse firms performing as contractor, subcontractors, and/or suppliers. The list shall specify the single designated diverse firm name and address. If acceptance or non-acceptance of alternates will affect the designation of a subcontractor, provide information for each affected category. 15.2.2 Failure to include a complete list of diverse firms may be grounds for rejection of the bid. 15.2.3 The list of diverse firms shall be submitted in addition to any other listing of subcontractors required in the Bid for Lump Sum Contract Form. 15.3 Supplier Diversity Percentage Goal The bidder shall have a minimum goal of subcontracting with diverse contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers, the percent of contract price stated in the Supplier Diversity goal paragraph of the Bid for Lump Sum Contract Form. . 15.4 Supplier Diversity Percent Goal Computation 15.4.1 The total dollar value of the work granted to the diverse firms by the successful bidder is counted towards the applicable goal of the entire contract, unless otherwise noted below. 15.4.2 The bidder may count toward the Supplier Diversity goal only expenditures to diverse firms that perform a commercially useful function in the work of a contract. A diverse firm is considered to perform a commercially useful function when it is responsible for executing a distinct element of the work and carrying out its responsibilities by actually performing, managing and supervising the work involved. A bidder that is a certified diverse firm may count as 100% of the contract towards the Supplier Diversity goal. For projects with separate MBE, SDVE, and WBE/Veteran

IFB/4 09/16

/DBE goals, a MBE firm bidding as the prime bidder is expected to obtain the required SDVE, and WBE/Veteran/ DBE participation; a WBE or Veteran or DBE firm bidding as the prime bidder is expected to obtain the required MBE and SDVE participation and a SDVE firm bidding as the prime bidder is expected to obtain the required MBE, and WBE/Veteran/ DBE participation. 15.4.3 The bidder may count toward its Supplier Diversity goal expenditures for materials and supplies obtained from diverse suppliers and manufacturers, provided the diverse firm assumes the actual and contractual responsibility for the provision of the materials and supplies. 15.4.3.1 The bidder may count its entire expenditure to a diverse manufacturer. A manufacturer shall be defined as an individual or firm that produces goods from raw materials or substantially alters them before resale. 15.4.3.2 The bidder may count its entire expenditure to diverse suppliers that are not manufacturers provided the diverse supplier performs a commercially useful function as defined above in the supply process. 15.4.3.3 The bidder may count 25% of its entire expenditures to diverse firms that do not meet the definition of a subcontractor, a manufacturer, nor a supplier. Such diverse firms may arrange for, expedite, or procure portions of the work but are not actively engaged in the business of performing, manufacturing, or supplying that work. 15.4.4 The bidder may count toward the Supplier Diversity goal that portion of the total dollar value of the work awarded to a certified joint venture equal to the percentage of the ownership and control of the diverse partner in the joint venture. 15.4.5 On projects with separate MBE and WBE/Veteran/DBE goals, the Owner may allow MBE participation provided in excess of the MBE goal to be counted towards the WBE/Veteran /DBE goal. 15.5 Certification by Bidder of Diverse Firms 15.5.1 The bidder shall submit with its bid the information requested in the "Supplier Diversity Compliance Evaluation Form" for every diverse firm the bidder intends to award work to on the contract. 15.5.2 Diverse firms are defined in Article 1 – (Supplier Diversity Definitions) of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction included in the contract documents, and as those businesses certified as disadvantaged by an approved agency. The bidder is responsible for obtaining information regarding the certification status of a firm. A list of certified firms may be obtained by contacting the agencies listed in the proposal form document “Supplier Diversity Certifying Agencies”. Any firm listed as disadvantaged by any of the identified agencies will be classified as a diverse firm by the Owner. 15.5.3 Bidders are urged to encourage their prospective diverse contractors, subcontractors, joint venture participants, team partners, and suppliers who are not currently certified to obtain certification from one of the approved agencies.

15.6 Supplier Diversity Participation Waiver 15.6.1 The bidder is required to make a good faith effort to locate and contract with diverse firms. If a bidder has made a good faith effort to secure the required diverse firms and has failed, the bidder shall submit with the bid, the information requested in "Application for Supplier Diversity Participation Waiver." The Contracting Officer will review the bidder's actions as set forth in the bidder's "Application for Waiver" and any other factors deemed relevant by the Contracting Officer to determine if a good faith effort has been made to meet the applicable percentage goal. If the bidder is judged not to have made a good faith effort, the bid may be rejected. Bidder's who demonstrate that they have made a good faith effort to include Supplier Diversity participation may be awarded the contract regardless of the percent of Supplier Diversity participation, provided the bid is otherwise acceptable and is determined to be the best bid. 15.6.2 To determine good faith effort of the bidder, the Contracting Officer may evaluate factors including, but not limited to, the following: 15.6.2.1 The bidder’s attendance at pre-proposal meetings scheduled to inform bidders and diverse firms of contracting and subcontracting opportunities and responsibilities associated with Supplier Diversity participation. 15.6.2.2 The bidder’s advertisements in general circulation trade association, and diverse (minority) focused media concerning subcontracting opportunities. 15.6.2.3 The bidder’s written notice to specific diverse firms that their services were being solicited in sufficient time to allow for their effective participation. 15.6.2.4 The bidder’s follow-up attempts to the initial solicitation(s) to determine with certainty whether diverse firms were interested. 15.6.2.5 The bidder’s efforts to divide the work into packages suitable for subcontracting to diverse firms. 15.6.2.6 The bidder’s efforts to provide interested diverse firms with sufficiently detailed information about the drawings, specific actions and requirements of the contract, and clear scopes of work for the firms to bid on. 15.6.2.7 The bidder’s efforts to solicit for specific sub-bids from diverse firms in good faith. Documentation should include names, addresses, and telephone numbers of firms contacted a description of all information provided the diverse firms, and an explanation as to why agreements were not reached. 15.6.2.8 The bidder's efforts to locate diverse firms not on the directory list and assist diverse firms in becoming certified as such. 15.6.2.9 The bidder's initiatives to encourage and develop participation by diverse firms.

IFB/5 09/16

15.6.2.10 The bidder’s efforts to help diverse firms overcome legal or other barriers impeding the participation of diverse firms in the construction contract. 15.6.2.11 The availability of diverse firms and the adequacy of the bidder's efforts to increase the participation of such business provided by the persons and organizations consulted by the bidder. 15.7 Submittal of Forms 15.7.1 The bidder will include the Supplier Diversity Compliance Evaluation Form(s), or the Application for Waiver and other form(s) as required above in the envelope containing the "Bidder's Statement of Qualifications", see Article 8. 15.8 Additional Bid/Proposer Information 15.8.1 The Contracting Officer reserves the right to request additional information regarding Supplier Diversity participation and supporting documentation from the apparent low bidder. The bidder shall respond in writing to the Contracting Officer within 24 hours (1 work day) of a request. 15.8.2 The Contracting Officer reserves the right to request additional information after the bidder has responded to prior 24 hour requests. This information may include follow up and/or clarification of the information previously submitted. 15.8.3 The Owner reserves the right to consider additional diverse subcontractor and supplier participation submitted by the bidder after bids are opened under the provisions within these contract documents that describe the Owner’s right to accept or reject subcontractors including, but not limited to, Article 16 below. The Owner may elect to waive the good faith effort requirement if such additional participation achieves the Supplier Diversity goal. 15.8.4 The Bidder shall provide the Owner information related to the Supplier Diversity participation included in the bidder’s proposal, including, but is not limited to, the complete Application for Waiver, evidence of diverse certification of participating firms, dollar amount of participation of diverse firms, information supporting a good faith effort as described in Article 15.6 above, and a list of all diverse firms that submitted bids to the Bidder with the diverse firm’s price and the name and the price of the firm awarded the scope of work bid by the diverse firm.

16. List of Subcontractors 16.1 If a list of subcontractors is required on the Bid for Lump Sum Contract Form, the bidders shall list the name, city and state of the firm(s) which will accomplish that portion of the contract requested in the space provided. This list is separate from both the list of diverse firms required in Article 15.2, and the complete list of subcontractors required in Article 10.1 of this document. Should the bidder choose to perform any of the listed portions of the work with its own forces, the bidder shall enter its own name, city and state in the space provided. If acceptance or non-acceptance of alternates will affect the designation of a subcontractor, the bidder shall provide that information on the bid form. 16.2 Failure of the bidder to supply the list of subcontractors required or the listing of more than one subcontractor for any category without designating the portion of the work to be performed by each, shall be grounds for the rejection of the bid. The bidder can petition the Owner to change a listed subcontractor within 48 hours of the bid opening. The Owner reserves the right to make the final determination on a petition to change a subcontractor. The Owner will consider factors such as clerical and mathematical bidding errors, listed subcontractor’s inability to perform the work for the bid used, etc. Any request to change a listed subcontractor shall include at a minimum, contractor’s bid sheet showing tabulation of the bid; all subcontractor bids with documentation of the time they were received by the contractor; and a letter from the listed subcontractor on their letterhead stating why they cannot perform the work if applicable. The Owner reserves the right to ask for additional information. 16.3 Upon award of the contract, the requirements of Article 10 of this document and Article 5 of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction included in the contract documents will apply.

University of Missouri

General Conditions

of the

Contract

for

Construction

September 2016 Edition

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

TABLE OF ARTICLES PAGE

1. GENERAL PROVISIONS .................................................................................................................................... GC/1 1.1 Basic Definitions ............................................................................................................................................. GC/1 1.2 Specifications and Drawings ........................................................................................................................... GC/3 1.3 Required Provisions Deemed Inserted ............................................................................................................ GC/4 2. OWNER .................................................................................................................................................................. GC/4 2.1 Information and Services Required of the Owner ........................................................................................... GC/4 2.2 Owner's Right to Stop the Work ...................................................................................................................... GC/4 2.3 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work ............................................................................................................. GC/4 2.4 Extent of Owner Rights ................................................................................................................................... GC/4 3. CONTRACTOR .................................................................................................................................................... GC/5 3.1 Contractor's Warranty ..................................................................................................................................... GC/5 3.2 Compliance with Laws, Permits, Regulations and Inspections ....................................................................... GC/5 3.3 Anti-Kickback ................................................................................................................................................. GC/6 3.4 Supervision and Construction Procedures ....................................................................................................... GC/6 3.5 Use of Site ....................................................................................................................................................... GC/7 3.6 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor .............................................................. GC/8 3.7 Cleaning and Removal .................................................................................................................................... GC/8 3.8 Cutting and Patching ....................................................................................................................................... GC/8 3.9 Indemnification ............................................................................................................................................... GC/9 3.10 Patents ............................................................................................................................................................. GC/9 3.11 Materials, Labor, and Workmanship ............................................................................................................... GC/10 3.12 Approved Equal .............................................................................................................................................. GC/11 3.13 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples .................................................................................................... GC/11 3.14 Record Drawings ............................................................................................................................................. GC/12 3.15 Operating Instructions and Service Manual .................................................................................................... GC/13 3.16 Taxes ............................................................................................................................................................... GC/13 3.17 Contractor’s Construction Schedules .............................................................................................................. GC/14 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT ..................................................................................................... GC/14 4.1 Rights of the Owner ........................................................................................................................................ GC/14 4.2 Rights of the Architect .................................................................................................................................... GC/15 4.3 Review of the Work ........................................................................................................................................ GC/15 4.4 Claims ............................................................................................................................................................. GC/15 4.5 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions ............................................................................................... GC/15 4.6 Claim for Additional Cost ............................................................................................................................... GC/16 4.7 Claims for Additional Time ............................................................................................................................ GC/16 4.8 Resolution of Claims and Disputes ................................................................................................................. GC/17 4.9 Administrative Review .................................................................................................................................... GC/17 5. SUBCONTRACTORS .......................................................................................................................................... GC/18 5.1 Award of Subcontracts .................................................................................................................................... GC/18 5.2 Subcontractual Relations ................................................................................................................................. GC/18 5.3 Contingent Assignment of Subcontract ........................................................................................................... GC/18 6. SEPARATE CONTRACTS AND COOPERATION .......................................................................................... GC/18 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK ................................................................................................................................. GC/19

7.1 Change Orders ................................................................................................................................................ GC/19 7.2 Construction Change Directive ....................................................................................................................... GC/20 7.3 Overhead and Profit ........................................................................................................................................ GC/20 7.4 Extended General Conditions ......................................................................................................................... GC/21 7.5 Emergency Work ............................................................................................................................................ GC/21

8. TIME ...................................................................................................................................................................... GC/21 8.1 Progress and Completion ................................................................................................................................ GC/21 8.2 Delay in Completion ....................................................................................................................................... GC/21 8.3 Liquidated Damages ........................................................................................................................................ GC/22 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION ..................................................................................................................... GC/23 9.1 Commencement, Prosecution and Completion ................................................................................................ GC/23 9.2 Contract Sum ................................................................................................................................................... GC/24 9.3 Schedule of Values .......................................................................................................................................... GC/24 9.4 Applications for Payment ................................................................................................................................ GC/24 9.5 Approval for Payment ..................................................................................................................................... GC/25 9.6 Decisions to Withhold Approval ..................................................................................................................... GC/25 9.7 Progress Payments .......................................................................................................................................... GC/26 9.8 Failure of Payment .......................................................................................................................................... GC/26 9.9 Substantial Completion ................................................................................................................................... GC/26 9.10 Partial Occupancy or Use ................................................................................................................................ GC/26 9.11 Final Completion and Final Payment .............................................................................................................. GC/27 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY ............................................................................................ GC/27 10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs .................................................................................................................... GC/27 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property ....................................................................................................................... GC/28 11. INSURANCE & BONDS....................................................................................................................................... GC/28 11.1 Insurance ......................................................................................................................................................... GC/28 11.2 Commercial General Liability ......................................................................................................................... GC/28 11.3 Licensed for Use Vehicle Liability .................................................................................................................. GC/29 11.4 Workers’ Compensation Insurance ................................................................................................................. GC/29 11.5 Liability Insurance General Requirements ...................................................................................................... GC/29 11.6 Builder’s Risk Insurance ................................................................................................................................. GC/30 11.7 Bonds .............................................................................................................................................................. GC/31 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF THE WORK .................................................................................. GC/32 12.1 Uncovering of the Work .................................................................................................................................. GC/32 12.2 Correction of the Work ................................................................................................................................... GC/32 12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work ............................................................................................................. GC/33 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ..................................................................................................................... GC/33 13.1 Written Notice ................................................................................................................................................. GC/33 13.2 Rights and Remedies ....................................................................................................................................... GC/33 13.3 Tests and Inspections ...................................................................................................................................... GC/33 13.4 Nondiscrimination in Employment Equal Opportunity ................................................................................... GC/34 13.5 Supplier Diversity Goal Program .................................................................................................................... GC/34 13.6 Wage Rates ..................................................................................................................................................... GC/34 13.7 Records ........................................................................................................................................................... GC/36 13.8 Codes and Standards ....................................................................................................................................... GC/36 13.9 General Provisions .......................................................................................................................................... GC/37 13.10Debarment and Suspension Certificate…………………………………………………………………… .... GC/37

14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT ........................................................................... GC/38 14.1 Termination by Owner for Cause .................................................................................................................... GC/38 14.2 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience .................................................................................................. GC/38 14.3 Owner’s Termination for Convenience ........................................................................................................... GC/38

GC/1 09/16

ARTICLE 1

GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 Basic Definitions As used in the Contract Documents, the following terms shall have the meanings and refer to the parties designated in these definitions. 1.1.1 Owner The Curators of the University of Missouri. The Owner may act through its Board of Curators or any duly authorized committee or representative thereof. 1.1.2 Contracting Officer The Contracting Officer is the duly authorized representative of the Owner with the authority to execute contracts. Communications to the Contracting Officer shall be forwarded via the Owner's Representative. 1.1.3 Owner's Representative The Owner’s Representative is authorized by the Owner as the administrator of the Contract and will represent the Owner during the progress of the Work. Communications from the Architect to the Contractor and from the Contractor to the Architect shall be through the Owner's Representative, unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. 1.1.4 Architect When the term "Architect" is used herein, it shall refer to the Architect or the Engineer specified and defined in the Contract for Construction or its duly authorized representative. Communications to the Architect shall be forwarded to the address shown in the Contract for Construction. 1.1.5 Contractor The Contractor is the person or entity with whom the Owner has entered into the Contract for Construction. The term “Contractor” means the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative. 1.1.6 Subcontractor and Lower-tier Subcontractor A Subcontractor is a person or organization who has a contract with the Contractor to perform any of the Work. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or its authorized representative. The term "Subcontractor" also is applicable to those furnishing materials to be incorporated in the Work whether work performed is at the Owner’s site or off site, or both. A lower-tier Subcontractor is a person or organization who has a contract with a Subcontractor or another lower-tier Subcontractor to perform any of the Work at the site. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create contractual relationships between the Owner or the Architect and any Subcontractor or lower-tier Subcontractor of any tier.

1.1.7 Supplier Diversity Definitions Businesses that fall into the Supplier Diversity classification shall mean an approved certified business concern which is at least fifty-one percent (51%) owned and controlled by one (1) or more diverse suppliers as described below. .1 Minority Business Enterprises (MBE) Minority Business Enterprise [MBE] shall mean an approved certified business concern which is at least fifty-one percent (51%) owned and controlled by one (1) or more minorities as defined below or, in the case of any publicly-owned business, in which at least fifty-one percent (51%) of the stock of which is owned by one (1) or more minorities as defined below, and whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one (1) or more minorities as defined herein.

.1.1 "African Americans", which includes persons having origins in any of the black racial groups of Africa.

.1.2 "Hispanic Americans", which includes persons of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban, Central or South American, or other Spanish culture or origin, regardless of race.

.1.3 "Native Americans", which includes persons of American Indian, Eskimo, Aleut, or Native Hawaiian origin.

.1.4 "Asian-Pacific Americans", which includes persons whose origins are from Japan, China, Taiwan, Korea, Vietnam, Laos, Cambodia, the Philippines, Samoa, Guam, the U.S. Trust Territories of the Pacific, or the Northern Marinas.

.1.5 "Asian-Indian Americans", which includes persons whose origins are from India, Pakistan, or Bangladesh.

.2 Women Business Enterprise (WBE) Women Business Enterprise [WBE] shall mean an approved certified business concern which is at least fifty-one percent (51%) owned and controlled by one (1) or more women or, in the case of any publicly-owned business, in which at least fifty-one percent (51%) of the stock of which is owned by one (1) or more women, and whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one (1) or more women. .3 Veteran Owned Business Veteran Owned Business shall mean an approved certified business concern which is at least fifty-one percent (51%) owned and controlled by one (1) or more Veterans or, in the case of any publicly-owned business, in which at least fifty-one percent (51%) of the stock of which is owned by one (1) or more Veterans, and whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one (1) or more Veterans. Veterans must be certified by the appropriate federal agency responsible for veterans’ affairs. .4 Service Disabled Veteran Enterprise (SDVE) Service Disabled Veteran Enterprise (SDVE) shall mean a business certified by the State of Missouri Office of Administration as a Service Disabled Veteran Enterprise, which is at least fifty-one percent (51%) owned and controlled by one (1) or more Serviced Disabled Veterans or,

GC/2 09/16

in the case of any publicly-owned business, in which at least fifty-one percent (51%) of the stock of which is owned by one (1) or more Service Disabled Veterans, and whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one (1) or more Serviced Disabled Veterans. .5 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) A Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) is a for-profit small business concern where a socially and economically disadvantaged individual owns at least 51% interest and also controls management and daily business operations. These firms can and also be referred to as Small Disadvantaged Businesses (SDB). Eligibility requirements for certification are stated in 49 CFR (Code of Federal Regulations), part 26, Subpart D. U.S. citizens that are African-Americans, Hispanics, Native Americans, Asian-Pacific and Subcontinent Asian Americans, and women are presumed to be socially and economically disadvantaged. Also recognized as DBE’s are Historically Black Colleges and Universities (HBCU) and small businesses located in Federal HUB Zones. To be regarded as economically disadvantaged, an individual must have a personal net worth that does not exceed $1.32 million. To be seen as a small business, a firm must meet Small Business Administration (SBA) size criteria (500 employees or less) and have average annual gross receipts not to exceed $22.41 million. To be considered a DBE/SDB, a small business owned and controlled by socially and/or economically disadvantaged individuals must receive DBE certification from one of the recognized Missouri state agencies to be recognized in this classification. 1.1.9 Work Work shall mean supervision, labor, equipment, tools, material, supplies, incidentals operations and activities required by the Contract Documents or reasonably inferable by Contractor therefrom as necessary to produce the results intended by the Contract Documents in a safe, expeditious, orderly, and workmanlike manner, and in the best manner known to each respective trade. 1.1.10 Approved The terms "approved", "equal to", "directed", "required", "ordered", "designated", "acceptable", "satisfactory", and similar words or phrases will be understood to have reference to action on the part of the Architect and/or the Owner's Representative. 1.1.11 Contract Documents The Contract Documents consist of (1) the executed Contract for Construction, (2) these General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, (3) any Supplemental Conditions or Special Conditions identified in the Contract for Construction, (4) the Specifications identified in the Contract for Construction, (5) the Drawings identified in the Contract for Construction, (6) Addenda

issued prior to the receipt of bids, (7) Contractor’s bid addressed to Owner, including Contractor’s completed Qualification Statement, (8) Contractor’s Performance Bond and Contractor’s Payment Bond, (9) Notice to Proceed, (10) and any other exhibits and/or post bid adjustments identified in the Contract for Construction, (11) Advertisement for Bid, (12) Information for Bidders, and (13) Change Orders issued after execution of the Contract. All other documents and technical reports and information are not Contract Documents, including without limitation, Shop Drawings, and Submittals. 1.1.12 Contract The Contract Documents form the Contract and are the exclusive statement of agreement between the parties. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind between the Owner and a Subcontractor or any lower-tier Subcontractor. 1.1.13 Change Order The Contract may be amended or modified without invalidating the Contract, only by a Change Order, subject to the limitations in Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. A Change Order is a written instrument signed by the Owner and the Contractor stating their agreement to a change in the Work, the amount of the adjustment to the Contract Sum, if any, and the extent of the adjustment to the Contract Time, if any. Agreement to any Change Order shall constitute a final settlement of all matters relating to the change in the work which is the subject of the Change Order, including, but not limited to, all direct and indirect costs associated with such change and any and all adjustments of the Contract sum, time and schedule. 1.1.14 Substantial Completion The terms “Substantial Completion” or "substantially complete" as used herein shall be construed to mean the completion of the entire Work, including all submittals required under the Contract Documents, except minor items which in the opinion of the Architect, and/or the Owner's Representative will not interfere with the complete and satisfactory use of the facilities for the purposes intended. 1.1.15 Final Completion The date when all punch list items are completed, including all closeout submittals and approval by the Architect is given to the Owner in writing. 1.1.16 Supplemental and Special Conditions The terms “Supplemental Conditions” or “Special Conditions” shall mean the part of the Contract Documents which amend, supplement, delete from, or add to these General Conditions.

GC/3 09/16

1.1.17 Day The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. 1.1.18 Knowledge. The terms “knowledge,” “recognize” and “discover,“ their respective derivatives and similar terms in the Contract Documents, as used in reference to the Contractor, shall be interpreted to mean that which the Contractor knows or should know, recognizes or should recognize and discovers or should discover in exercising the care, skill, and diligence of a diligent and prudent contractor familiar with the work. Analogously, the expression “reasonably inferable” and similar terms in the Contract Documents shall be interpreted to mean reasonably inferable by a diligent and prudent contractor familiar with the work. 1.1.19 Punch List “Punch List” means the list of items, prepared in connection with the inspection of the Project by the Owner’s Representative or Architect in connection with Substantial Completion of the Work or a portion of the Work, which the Owner’s Representative or Architect has designated as remaining to be performed, completed or corrected before the Work will be accepted by the Owner. 1.2 Specifications and Drawings 1.2.1 The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction system, standards and workmanship and performance of related services for the Work identified in the Contract for Construction. Specifications are separated into titled divisions for convenience of reference only. Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. Such separation will not operate to make the Owner or the Architect an arbiter of labor disputes or work agreements. 1.2.2 The drawings herein referred to, consist of drawings prepared by the Architect and are enumerated in the Contract Documents. 1.2.3 Drawings are intended to show general arrangements, design, and dimensions of work and are partly diagrammatic. Dimensions shall not be determined by scale or rule. If figured dimensions are lacking, they shall be supplied by the Architect on the Contractor's written request to the Owner's Representative. 1.2.4 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complimentary, and what is required by

one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall by required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the intended results. 1.2.5 In the event of inconsistencies within or between parts of the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and applicable standards, codes and ordinances, the Contractor shall (1) provide the better quality or greater quantity of Work or (2) comply with the more stringent requirement; either or both in accordance with the Owner’s Representative’s interpretation. On the Drawings, given dimensions shall take precedence over scaled measurements and large scale drawings over small scale drawings. Before ordering any materials or doing any Work, the Contractor and each Subcontractor shall verify measurements at the Work site and shall be responsible for the correctness of such measurements. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative and Architect for resolution before proceeding with the Work. If a minor change in the Work is found necessary due to actual field conditions, the Contractor shall submit detailed drawings of such departure for the approval by the Owner’s Representative and Architect before making the change. 1.2.6 Data in the Contract Documents concerning lot size, ground elevations, present obstructions on or near the site, locations and depths of sewers, conduits, pipes, wires, etc., position of sidewalks, curbs, pavements, etc., and nature of ground and subsurface conditions have been obtained from sources the Architect believes reliable, but the Architect and Owner do not represent or warrant that this information is accurate or complete. The Contractor shall verify such data to the extent possible through normal construction procedures, including but not limited to contacting utility owners and by prospecting. 1.2.7 Only work included in the Contract Documents is authorized, and the Contractor shall do no work other than that described therein. 1.2.8 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor represents that it has performed its own investigation and examination of the Work site and its surroundings and satisfied itself before entering into this Contract as to: .1 conditions bearing upon transportation, disposal,

handling, and storage of materials; .2 the availability of labor, materials, equipment, water,

electrical power, utilities and roads; .3 uncertainties of weather, river stages, flooding and

similar characteristics of the site; .4 conditions bearing upon security and protection of

material, equipment, and Work in progress;

GC/4 09/16

.5 the form and nature of the Work site, including the surface and sub-surface conditions;

.6 the extent and nature of Work and materials necessary for the execution of the Work and the remedying of any defects therein; and

.7 the means of access to the site and the accommodations it may require and, in general, shall be deemed to have obtained all information as to risks, contingencies and other circumstances.

.8 the ability to complete work without disruption to normal campus activities, except as specifically allowed in the contract documents.

The Owner assumes no responsibility or liability for the physical condition or safety of the Work site or any improvements located on the Work site. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing a safe place for the performance of the Work. The Owner shall not be required to make any adjustment in either the Contract Sum or Contract Time concerning any failure by the Contractor or any Subcontractor to comply with the requirements of this Paragraph. 1.2.9 Drawings, specifications, and copies thereof furnished by the Owner are and shall remain the Owner’s property. They are not to be used on another project and, with the exception of one contract set for each party to the Contract, shall be returned to the Owner's Representative on request, at the completion of the Work. 1.3 Required Provisions Deemed Inserted Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in this Contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though it were included herein; and if through mistake or otherwise any such provision is not inserted, or is not correctly inserted, then upon the written application of either party the Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction.

ARTICLE 2 OWNER

2.1 Information and Services Required of the

Owner 2.1.1 Permits and fees are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, unless specifically stated in the contract documents that the Owner will secure and pay for specific necessary approvals, easements, assessments, and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures, or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 2.1.2 When requested in writing by the Contractor, information or services under the Owner's control, which

are reasonably necessary to perform the Work, will be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work. 2.2 Owner's Right to Stop the Work 2.2.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in strict accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents or fails to carry out Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner's Representative may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work will not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity. Owner’s lifting of Stop Work Order shall not prejudice Owner’s right to enforce any provision of this Contract. 2.3 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 2.3.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and fails within a seven (7) day period after receipt of a written notice from the Owner to correct such default or neglect, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such default or neglect. In such case, an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for the Architect’s additional services and expenses made necessary by such default or neglect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. However, such notice shall be waived in the event of an emergency with the potential for property damage or the endangerment of students, faculty, staff, the public or construction personnel, at the sole discretion of the Owner. 2.3.2 In the event the Contractor has not satisfactorily completed all items on the Punch List within thirty (30) days of its receipt, the Owner reserves the right to complete the Punch List without further notice to the Contractor or its surety. In such case, Owner shall be entitled to deduct from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of completing the Punch List items, including compensation for the Architect’s additional services. If payments then or thereafter due Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. 2.4 Extent of Owner Rights 2.4.1 The rights stated in this Article 2 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents are cumulative and not in limitation of any rights of the Owner (1) granted in the Contract Documents, (2) at law or (3) in equity. 2.4.2 In no event shall the Owner have control over, charge of, or any responsibility for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures or for safety

GC/5 09/16

precautions and programs in connection with the Work, notwithstanding any of the rights and authority granted the Owner in the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR

3.1 Contractor's Warranty 3.1.1 The Contractor warrants all equipment and materials furnished, and work performed, under this Contract, against defective materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months after acceptance as provided in this Contract, unless a longer period is specified, regardless of whether the same were furnished or performed by the Contractor or any Subcontractors of any tier. Upon written notice from the Owner of any breech of warranty during the applicable warranty period due to defective material or workmanship, the affected part or parts thereof shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. Should the Contractor fail or refuse to make the necessary repairs, replacements, and tests when requested by the Owner, the Owner may perform, or cause the necessary work and tests to be performed, at the Contractor's expense, or exercise the Owner's rights under Article 14. 3.1.2 Should one or more defects mentioned above appear within the specified period, the Owner shall have the right to continue to use or operate the defective part or apparatus until the Contractor makes repairs or replacements or until such time as it can be taken out of service without loss or inconvenience to the Owner. 3.1.3 The above warranties are not intended as a limitation, but are in addition to all other express warranties set forth in this Contract and such other warranties as are implied by law, custom, and usage of trade. The Contractor, and its surety or sureties, if any, shall be liable for the satisfaction and full performance of the warranties set forth herein. 3.1.4 Neither the final payment nor any provision in the Contract Documents nor partial or entire occupancy of the premises by the Owner, nor expiration of warranty stated herein, will constitute an acceptance of Work not done in accordance with the Contract Documents or relieve the Contractor of liability in respect to any responsibility for non-conforming work. The Contractor shall immediately remedy any defects in the Work and pay for any damage to other Work resulting therefrom upon written notice from the Owner. Should the Contractor fail or refuse to remedy the non-conforming work, the Owner may perform, or cause to be performed the work necessary to bring the work into conformance with the Contract Documents at the Contractor's expense.

3.1.5 The Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify, and save harmless The Curators of the University of Missouri, their Officers, Agents, Employees and Volunteers, from and against all loss or expense from any injury or damages to property of others suffered or incurred on account of any breech of the aforesaid obligations and covenants. The Contractor agrees to investigate, handle, respond to and provide defense for and defend against any such liability, claims, and demands at the sole expense of the Contractor, or at the option of the University, agrees to pay to or reimburse the University for the defense costs incurred by the University in connection with any such liability claims, or demands. The parties hereto understand and agree that the University is relying on, and does not waive or intend to waive by any provision of this Contract, any monetary limitations or any other rights, immunities, and protections provided by the State of Missouri, as from time to time amended, or otherwise available to the University, or its officers, employees, agents or volunteers. 3.2 Compliance with Laws, Permits, Regulations and

Inspections 3.2.1 The Contractor shall, without additional expense to the Owner, comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, statutes, and regulations (collectively referred to as “Laws”). 3.2.2 Since the Owner is an instrumentality of the State of Missouri, municipal, or political subdivision, ordinances, zoning ordinances, and other like ordinances are not applicable to construction on the Owner's property, and the Contractor will not be required to submit plans and specifications to any municipal or political subdivision authority to obtain construction permits or any other licenses or permits from or submit to, inspection by any municipality or political subdivision relating to the construction on the Owner's property, unless required by the Owner in these Contract Documents or otherwise in writing. 3.2.3 All fees, permits, inspections, or licenses required by municipality or political subdivision for operation on property not belonging to the Owner, shall be obtained by and paid for by the Contractor. The Contractor, of its own expense, is responsible to ensure that all inspections required by said permits or licenses on property, easements, or utilities not belonging to the Owner are conducted as required therein. All connection charges, assessments or transportation fees as may be imposed by any utility company or others are included in the Contract Sum and shall be the Contractor’s responsibility, as stated in 2.1.1 above. 3.2.4 If the Contractor has knowledge that any Contract Documents are at variance with any Laws, including Americans with Disabilities Act – Standards for Accessible Design, ordinances, rules, regulations or codes applying to the Work, Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and the Owner’s Representative, in writing, and any necessary

GC/6 09/16

changes will be adjusted as provided in Contract Documents. However, it is not the Contractor’s primary responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable Laws, unless such Laws bear upon performance of the Work. 3.3 Anti-Kickback 3.3.1 No member or delegate to Congress, or resident commissioner, shall be admitted to any share or part of this Contract or to any benefit that may arise therefrom, but this provision shall not be construed to extend to this Contract if made with a corporation for its general benefit. 3.3.2 No official of the Owner who is authorized in such capacity and on behalf of the Owner to negotiate, make, accept or approve, or to take part in negotiating, making, accepting, or approving any architectural, engineering, inspection, construction, or material supply contract or any Subcontract of any tier in connection with the construction of the Work shall have a financial interest in this Contract or in any part thereof, any material supply contract, Subcontract of any tier, insurance contract, or any other contract pertaining to the Work. 3.4 Supervision and Construction Procedures 3.4.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. The Contractor shall supply sufficient and competent supervision and personnel, and sufficient material, plant, and equipment to prosecute the Work with diligence to ensure completion thereof within the time specified in the Contract Documents, and shall pay when due any laborer, Subcontractor of any tier, or supplier. 3.4.2 The Contractor, if an individual, shall give the Work an adequate amount of personal supervision, and if a partnership or corporation or joint venture the Work shall be given an adequate amount of personal supervision by a partner or executive officer, as determined by the Owner's Representative. 3.4.3 The Contractor and each of its Subcontractors of any tier shall submit to the Owner such schedules of quantities and costs, progress schedules in accordance with 3.17.2 of this document, payrolls, reports, estimates, records, and other data as the Owner may request concerning Work performed or to be performed under the Contract. 3.4.4 The Contractor shall be represented at the site by a competent superintendent from the beginning of the Work until its final acceptance, whenever contract work is being performed, unless otherwise permitted in writing by

the Owner's Representative. The superintendent for the Contractor shall exercise general supervision over the Work and such superintendent shall have decision making authority of the Contractor. Communications given to the superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. The superintendent shall not be changed by the contractor without approval from the Owner’s Representative. 3.4.5 The Contractor shall establish and maintain a permanent bench mark to which access may be had during progress of the Work, and Contractor shall establish all lines and levels, and shall be responsible for the correctness of such. Contractor shall be fully responsible for all layout work for the proper location of Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.4.6 The Contractor shall establish and be responsible for wall and partition locations. If applicable, separate contractors shall be entitled to rely upon these locations and for setting their sleeves, openings, or chases. 3.4.7 The Contractor’s scheduled outage/tie-in plan, time, and date for any utilities is subject to approval by the Owner’s Representative. Communication with the appropriate entity and planning for any scheduled outage/tie-in of utilities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Failure of Contractor to comply with the provisions of this Paragraph shall cause Contractor to forfeit any right to an adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract Time for any postponement, rescheduling or other delays ordered by Owner in connection with such Work. The Contractor shall follow the following procedures for all utility outages/tie-ins or disruption of any building system: .1 All shutting of valves, switches, etc., shall be by the

Owner's personnel. .2 Contractor shall submit its preliminary outage/tie-in

schedule with its baseline schedule. .3 The Contractor shall request an outage/tie-in meeting

at least two weeks before the outage/tie-in is required.

.4 The Owner's Representative will schedule an outage/tie-in meeting at least one week prior to the outage/tie-in.

3.4.8 The Contractor shall coordinate all Work so there shall be no prolonged interruption of existing utilities, systems and equipment of Owner. Any existing plumbing, heating, ventilating, air conditioning, or electrical disconnection necessary, which affect portions of this construction or building or any other building, must be scheduled with the Owner's Representative to avoid any disruption of operation within the building under construction or other buildings or utilities. In no case shall utilities be left disconnected at the end of a work day or over a weekend. Any interruption of utilities, either intentionally or accidentally, shall not relieve the Contractor from repairing and restoring the utility to normal service. Repairs and

GC/7 09/16

restoration shall be made before the workers responsible for the repair and restoration leave the job. 3.4.9 The Contractor shall be responsible for repair of damage to property on or off the project occurring during construction of project, and all such repairs shall be made to meet code requirements or to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative if code is not applicable. 3.4.10 The Contractor shall be responsible for all shoring required to protect its work or adjacent property and shall pay for any damage caused by failure to shore or by improper shoring or by failure to give proper notice. Shoring shall be removed only after completion of permanent supports. 3.4.11 The Contractor shall maintain at his own cost and expense, adequate, safe and sufficient walkways, platforms, scaffolds, ladders, hoists and all necessary, proper, and adequate equipment, apparatus, and appliances useful in carrying on the Work and which are necessary to make the place of Work safe and free from avoidable danger for students, faculty, staff, the public and construction personnel, and as may be required by safety provisions of applicable laws, ordinances, rules regulations and building and construction codes. 3.4.12 During the performance of the Work, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining warning signs, lights, signal devices, barricades, guard rails, fences, and other devices appropriately located on site which shall give proper and understandable warning to all persons of danger of entry onto land, structure, or equipment, within the limits of the Contractor’s work area. 3.4.13 The Contractor shall pump, bail, or otherwise keep any general excavations free of water. The Contractor shall keep all areas free of water before, during and after concrete placement. The Contractor shall be responsible for protection, including weather protection, and proper maintenance of all equipment and materials installed, or to be installed by him. 3.4.14 The Contractor shall be responsible for care of the Work and must protect same from damage of defacement until acceptance by the Owner. All damaged or defaced Work shall be repaired or replaced to the Owner's satisfaction, without cost to the Owner. 3.4.15 When requested by the Owner's Representative, the Contractor, at no extra charge, shall provide scaffolds or ladders in place as may be required by the Architect or the Owner for examination of Work in progress or completed.

3.4.16 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors of any tier and their agents and employees, and any entity or other persons performing portions of the Work. 3.4.17 The Contractor shall not be relieved of its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Owner’s Representative or Architect in their administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. 3.4.18 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of the Work already performed under this Contract to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. 3.5 Use of Site 3.5.1 The Contractor shall limit operations and storage of material to the area within the Work limit lines shown on Drawings, except as necessary to connect to exiting utilities, shall not encroach on neighboring property, and shall exercise caution to prevent damage to existing structures. 3.5.2 Only materials and equipment, which are to be used directly in the Work, shall be brought to and stored on the Work site by the Contractor. After equipment is no longer required for the Work, it shall be promptly removed from the Work site. Protection of construction materials and equipment stored at the Work site from weather, theft, damage and all other adversity is solely the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.5.3 No project signs shall be erected without the written approval of the Owner's Representative. 3.5.4 The Contractor shall ensure that the Work is at all times performed in a manner that affords reasonable access, both vehicular and pedestrian, to the site of the Work and all adjacent areas. Particular attention shall be paid to access for emergency vehicles, including fire trucks. Wherever there is the possibility of interfering with normal emergency vehicle operations, Contractor shall obtain permission from both campus and municipal emergency response entities prior to limiting any access. The Work shall be performed, to the fullest extent reasonably possible, in such a manner that public areas adjacent to the site of the Work shall be free from all debris, building materials and equipment likely to cause hazardous conditions. Without limitation of any other provision of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall not interfere with the occupancy or beneficial use of (1) any areas and buildings adjacent to the site of the Work or (2) the Work in the event of partial occupancy. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to the property comprising the Work or to the owner or occupant of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of the Work.

GC/8 09/16

3.5.5 The Contractor shall not permit any workers to use any existing facilities at the Work site, including, without limitation, lavatories, toilets, entrances, and parking areas other than those designated by Owner. The Contractor, Subcontractors of any tier, suppliers and employees shall comply with instructions or regulations of the Owner’s Representative governing access to, operation of, and conduct while in or on the premises and shall perform all Work required under the Contract Documents in such a manner as not to unreasonably interrupt or interfere with the conduct of Owner’s operations. Any request for Work, a suspension of Work or any other request or directive received by the Contractor from occupants of existing buildings shall be referred to the Owner’s Representative for determination. 3.5.6 The Contractor and the Subcontractor of any tier shall have its’ name, acceptable abbreviation or recognizable logo and the name of the city and state of the mailing address of the principal office of the company, on each motor vehicle and motorized self-propelled piece of equipment which is used in connection with the project. The signs are required on such vehicles during the time the Contractor is working on the project. 3.6 Review of Contract Documents and Field

Conditions by Contractor 3.6.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by the Architect and Owner and shall at once report in writing to the Architect and Owner’s Representative any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered. If the Contractor performs any construction activity which it knows or should have known involves a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such written notice to the Architect and Owner’s Representative, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such performance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable costs for correction. 3.6.2 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported in writing to the Architect and Owner’s Representative within twenty-four (24) hours. During the progress of work, Contractor shall verify all field measurements prior to fabrication of building components or equipment, and proceed with the fabrication to meet field conditions. Contractor shall consult all Contract Documents to determine the exact location of all work and verify spatial relationships of all work. Any question concerning said location or spatial relationships shall be submitted to the Owner's

Representative. Specific locations for equipment, pipelines, ductwork and other such items of work, where not dimensioned on plans, shall be determined in consultation with Owner's Representative and Architect. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of the Work in place. 3.6.3 The Contractor shall provide, at the proper time, such material as required for support of the Work. If openings or chases are required, whether shown on Drawings or not, the Contractor shall see they are properly constructed. If required openings or chases are omitted, the Contractor shall cut them at the Contractors own expense, but only as directed by the Architect, through the Owner Representative. 3.6.4 Should the Contract Documents fail to particularly describe materials or goods to be used, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to inquire of the Architect and the Owner’s Representative what is to be used and to supply it at the Contractor’s expense, or else thereafter replace it to the Owner’s Representative’s satisfaction. At a minimum, the Contractor shall provide the quality of materials as generally specified throughout the Contract Documents. 3.7 Cleaning and Removal 3.7.1 The Contractor shall keep the Work site and surrounding areas free from accumulation of waste materials, rubbish, debris, and dirt resulting from the Work and shall clean the Work site and surrounding areas as requested by the Architect and the Owner's Representative, including mowing of grass greater than 6 inches high. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of clean up and removal of debris from premises. The building and premises shall be kept clean, safe, in a workmanlike manner, and in compliance with OSHA standards at all times. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Work site tools, construction equipment, machinery, fencing, and surplus materials. Further, at the completion of the work, all dirt, stains, and smudges shall be removed from every part of the building, all glass in doors and windows shall be washed, and entire Work shall be left broom clean in a finished state ready for occupancy. The Contractor shall advise his Subcontractors of any tier of this provision, and the Contractor shall be fully responsible for leaving the premises in a finished state ready for use to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. If the Contractor fails to comply with the provisions of this paragraph, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. 3.8 Cutting and Patching 3.8.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting, or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. 3.8.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching, or otherwise altering such construction, or by

GC/9 09/16

excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. 3.8.3 If the Work involves renovation and/or alteration of existing improvements, Contractor acknowledges that cutting and patching of the Work is essential for the Work to be successfully completed. Contractor shall perform any cutting, altering, patching, and/or fitting of the Work necessary for the Work and the existing improvements to be fully integrated and to present the visual appearance of an entire, completed, and unified project. In performing any Work which requires cutting or patching, Contractor shall use its best efforts to protect and preserve the visual appearance and aesthetics of the Work to the reasonable satisfaction of both the Owner’s Representative and Architect. 3.9 Indemnification 3.9.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner, the Architect, Architect’s consultants, and the agents, employees, representatives, insurers and re-insurers of any of the foregoing (hereafter collectively referred to as the “Indemnitees”) from and against claims, damages (including loss of use of the Work itself), punitive damages, penalties and civil fines unless expressly prohibited by law, losses and expenses, including, but not limited to, attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions or other fault of Contractor, a Subcontractor of any tier, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss, or expense is caused in part by the negligent acts or omissions or other fault of a party indemnified hereunder. The Contractor’s obligations hereunder are in addition to and shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that the Owner may possess. If one or more of the Indemnitees demand performance by the Contractor of obligations under this paragraph or other provisions of the Contract Documents and if Contractor refuses to assume or perform, or delays in assuming or performing Contractor’s obligations, Contractor shall pay each Indemnitee who has made such demand its respective attorneys’ fees, costs, and other expenses incurred in enforcing this provision. The defense and indemnity required herein shall be a binding obligation upon Contractor whether or not an Indemnitee has made such demand. Even if a defense is successful to a claim or demand for which Contractor is obligated to indemnify

the Indemnitees from under this Paragraph, Contractor shall remain liable for all costs of defense. 3.9.2 The indemnity obligations of Contractor under this Section 3.9 shall survive termination of this Contract or final payment thereunder. In the event of any claim or demand made against any party which is entitled to be indemnified hereunder, the Owner may in its sole discretion reserve, return or apply any monies due or to become due the Contractor under the Contract for the purpose of resolving such claims; provided, however, that the Owner may release such funds if the Contractor provides the Owner with reasonable assurance of protection of the Owner’s interests. The Owner shall in its sole discretion determine if such assurances are reasonable. Owner reserves the right to control the defense and settlement of any claim, action or proceeding which Contractor has an obligation to indemnify the Indemnitees against under Paragraph 3.9.1. 3.9.3 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.9 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor of any tier, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this Section 3.9 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor of any tier under workers’ or workmen’s compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 3.9.4 The obligations of the Contractor under Paragraph 3.9.1 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect, his agents or employees, arising out of the preparation and approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications. 3.10 Patents 3.10.1 The Contractor shall hold and save harmless the Owner and its officers, agents, servants, and employees from liability of any nature or kind, including cost and expense, for, or on account of, any patented or otherwise protected invention, process, article, or appliance manufactured or used in the performance of the Contract, including its use by the Owner, unless otherwise specifically stipulated in the Contract Documents. 3.10.2 If the Contractor uses any design, device, or material covered by letters patent or copyright, he shall provide for such use by suitable agreement with the Owner of such patented or copyrighted design, device, or material. It is mutually agreed and understood, without exception, that the Contract Sum includes and the Contractor shall pay all royalties, license fees or costs arising from the use of such design, device, or material in any way involved in the Work. The Contractor and/or sureties shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner from any and all claims for infringement by reason of the use of such patented or copyrighted design,

GC/10 09/16

device, or material or any trademark or copyright in connection with Work agreed to be performed under this Contract and shall indemnify the Owner for any cost, expense, or damage it may be obligated to pay by reason of such infringement at any time during the prosecution of the Work or after completion of the Work. 3.11 Materials, Labor, and Workmanship 3.11.1 Materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall strictly conform to the Contract Documents and representations and approved Samples provided by Contractor and shall be of the most suitable grade of their respective kinds for their respective uses, and shall be fit and sufficient for the purpose intended, merchantable, of good new material and workmanship, and free from defect. Workmanship shall be in accordance with the highest standard in the industry and free from defect in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.11.2 Materials and fixtures shall be new and of latest design unless otherwise specified, and shall provide the most efficient operating and maintenance costs to the Owner. All Work shall be performed by competent workers and shall be of best quality. 3.11.3 The Contractor shall carefully examine the Contract Documents and shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material, equipment, and apparatus into the building. 3.11.4 The Contractor shall base his bid only on the Contract Documents. 3.11.5 Materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, examination, and test by the Architect and the Owner's Representative at any and all times during manufacture, installation, and construction of any of them, at places where such manufacture, installation, or construction is performed. 3.11.6 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. 3.11.7 Unless otherwise specifically noted, the Contractor shall provide and pay for supervision, labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work.

3.11.8 Substitutions 3.11.8.1 A substitution is a Contractor proposal of an alternate product or method in lieu of has been specified or shown in the Contract Documents, which is not an “or equal” as set forth in Section 3.12.1. 3.11.8.2 Contractor may make a proposal to the Architect and the Owner’s Representative to use substitute products or methods as set forth herein, but the Architect's and the Owner’s Representative’s decision concerning acceptance of a substitute shall be final. The Contractor must do so in writing and setting forth the following: .1 Full explanation of the proposed substitution and

submittal of all supporting data including technical information, catalog cuts, warranties, test results, installation instructions, operating procedures, and other like information necessary for a complete evaluation of the substitution.

.2 Reasons the substitution is advantageous and necessary, including the benefits to the Owner and the Work in the event the substitution is acceptable.

.3 The adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum, in the event the substitution is acceptable.

.4 The adjustment, if any, in the time of completion of the Contract and the construction schedule in the event the substitution is acceptable.

.5 An affidavit stating that (a) the proposed substitution conforms to and meets all of the Contract Documents, except as specifically disclosed and set forth in the affidavit and (b) the Contractor accepts the warranty and correction obligations in connection with the proposed substitution as if originally specified by the Architect. Proposals for substitutions shall be submitted to the Architect and Owner’s Representative in sufficient time to allow the Architect and Owner’s Representative no less than ten (10) working days for review. No substitution will be considered or allowed without the Contractor's submittal of complete substantiating data and information as stated herein.

3.11.8.3 Substitutions may be rejected without explanation in Owner’s sole discretion and will be considered only under one or more of the following conditions: .1 Required for compliance with interpretation of code

requirements or insurance regulations then existing; .2 Unavailability of specified products, through no

fault of the Contractor; .3 Material delivered fails to comply with the Contract

Documents; .4 Subsequent information discloses inability of

specified products to perform properly or to fit in designated space;

.5 Manufacturer/fabricator refuses to certify or guarantee performance of specified product as required; or

GC/11 09/16

.6 When in the judgment of the Owner or the Architect, a substitution would be substantially to the Owner's best interests, in terms of cost, time, or other considerations.

3.11.8.4 Whether or not any proposed substitution is accepted by the Owner or the Architect, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for any fees charged by the Architect or other consultants for evaluating each proposed substitute. 3.12 Approved Equal 3.12.1 Whenever in the Contract Documents any article, appliance, device, or material is designated by the name of a manufacturer, vendor, or by any proprietary or trade name, the words "or approved equal," shall automatically follow and shall be implied unless specifically indicated otherwise. The standard products of manufacturers other than those specified will be accepted when, prior to the ordering or use thereof, it is proven to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative and the Architect they are equal in design, appearance, spare parts availability, strength, durability, usefulness, serviceability, operation cost, maintenance cost, and convenience for the purpose intended. Any general listings of approved manufacturers in any Contract Document shall be for informational purposes only and it shall be the Contractor’s sole responsibility to ensure that any proposed “or equal” complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 3.12.2 The Contractor shall submit to Architect and Owner’s Representative a written and full description of the proposed “or equal” including all supporting data, including technical information, catalog cuts, warranties, test results, installation instructions, operating procedures, and similar information demonstrating that the proposed “or equal” strictly complies with the Contract Documents. The Architect or Owner’s Representative shall take appropriate action with respect to the submission of a proposed “or equal” item. If Contractor fails to submit proposed “or equals” as set forth herein, it shall waive any right to supply such items. The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall not be adjusted as a result of any failure by Contractor to submit proposed “or equals” as provided for herein. All documents submitted in connection with preparing an “or equal” shall be clearly and obviously marked as a proposed “or equal” submission. 3.12.3 No approvals or action taken by the Architect or Owner’s Representative shall relieve Contractor from its obligation to ensure that an “or equal” article, appliance, devise or material strictly complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not propose “or equal” items in connection with Shop Drawings or other Submittals, and Contractor acknowledges and agrees that no approvals or action taken by the Architect or

Owner’s Representative with respect to Shop Drawings or other Submittals shall constitute approval of any “or equal” item or relieve Contractor from its sole and exclusive responsibility. Any changes required in the details and dimensions indicated in the Contract Documents for the incorporation or installation of any “or equal” item supplied by the Contractor shall be properly made and approved by the Architect at the expense of the Contractor. No ‘or equal’ items will be permitted for components of or extensions to existing systems when, in the opinion of the Architect, the named manufacturer must be provided in order to ensure compatibility with the existing systems, including, but not limited to, mechanical systems, electrical systems, fire alarms, smoke detectors, etc. No action will be taken by the Architect with respect to proposed “or equal” items prior to receipt of bids, unless otherwise noted in the Special Conditions. 3.13 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and

Coordination Drawings/BIM Models 3.13.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specifically prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 3.13.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. 3.13.3 Samples are physical samples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 3.13.4 Coordination Drawings are drawings for the integration of the Work, including work first shown in detail on shop drawings or product data. Coordination drawings show sequencing and relationship of separate units of work which must interface in a restricted manner to fit in the space provided, or function as indicated. Coordination Drawings are the responsibility of the contractor and are submitted for informational purposes. The Special Conditions will state whether coordination drawings are required. BIM models may be used for coordination in lieu of coordination drawings at the contractor’s discretion, unless required in the Special Conditions. The final coordination drawings/BIM Model will not change the contract documents, unless approved by a fully executed change order describing the specific modifications that are being made to the contract documents. 3.13.5 Shop Drawings, Coordination Drawings/BIM Models, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals (collectively referred to as “Submittals”) are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required the way the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.

GC/12 09/16

3.13.6 The Contractor shall schedule submittal of Shop Drawings and Product Data to the Architect so that no delays will result in delivery of materials and equipment, advising the Architect of priority for checking of Shop Drawings and Product Data, but a minimum of two weeks shall be provided for this purpose. Because time is of the essence in this contract, unless noted otherwise in the Special Conditions or Technical Specifications, all submittals, shop drawings and samples must be submitted as required to maintain the contractor’s plan for proceeding, but must be submitted within 90 days of the Notice To Proceed. If Contractor believes that this milestone is unreasonable for any submittal, Contractor shall request an extension of this milestone, within 60 days of Notice To Proceed, for each submittal that cannot meet the milestone. The request shall contain a reasonable explanation as to why the 90 day milestone is unrealistic, and shall specify a date on which the submittal will be transmitted, for approval by the Owner’s Representative. Failure of the Contractor to comply with this section may result in delays in the submittal approval process and/or charges for expediting approval, both of which will be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.13.7 The Contractor, at its own expense, shall submit Samples required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or the activities of separate contractors and no later than twenty (20) days before materials are required to be ordered for scheduled delivery to the Work site. Samples shall be labeled to designate material or products represented, grade, place of origin, name of producer, name of Contractor and the name and number of the Owner’s project. Quantities of Samples shall be twice the number required for testing so that Architect can return one set of the Samples. Materials delivered before receipt of Architect’s approval may be rejected by Architect and in such event, Contractor shall immediately remove all such materials from the Work site. When requested by Architect or Owner’s Representative, samples of finished masonry and field applied paints and finishes shall be located as directed and shall include sample panels built at the site of approximately twenty (20) square feet each. 3.13.8 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. Such Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. 3.13.9 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents such Submittals strictly comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents and that the Contractor has determined and verified field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, that materials

are fit for their intended use and that the fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation of all materials, systems and equipment are in accordance with best practices in the industry and are in strict compliance with any applicable requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also coordinate each Submittal with other Submittals. 3.13.10 Contractor shall be responsible for the correctness and accuracy of the dimensions, measurements and other information contained in the Submittals. 3.13.11 Each Submittal will bear a stamp or specific indication that the Submittal complies with the Contract Documents and Contractor has satisfied its obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor’s review and approval of that Submittal. Each Submittal shall bear the signature of the representative of Contractor who approved the Submittal, together with the Contractor’s name, Owner’s name, number of the Project, and the item name and specification section number. 3.13.12 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof. Specifically, but not by way of limitation, Contractor acknowledges that Architect’s approval of Shop Drawings shall not relieve Contractor for responsibility for errors and omissions in the Shop Drawings since Contractor is responsible for the correctness of dimensions, details and the design of adequate connections and details contained in the Shop Drawings. 3.13.13 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous Submittals. 3.13.14 The Contractor represents and warrants that all Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons and entities possessing expertise and experience in the trade for which the Shop Drawing is prepared and, if required by the Architect or applicable Laws, by a licensed engineer or other design professional. 3.14 Record Drawings 3.14.1 The Contractor shall maintain a set of Record Drawings on site in good condition and shall use colored pencils to mark up said set with "record information" in a legible manner to show: (1) bidding addendums, (2) executed change orders, (3)deviations from the Drawings made during construction; (4) details in the Work not previously shown; (5) changes to existing conditions or existing conditions found to differ from those shown on any existing drawings; (6) the actual installed position of equipment, piping, conduits, light switches, electric fixtures, circuiting, ducts, dampers, access panels,

GC/13 09/16

control valves, drains, openings, and stub-outs; and (7) such other information as either Owner or Architect may reasonably request. The prints for Record Drawing use will be a set of “blue line” prints provided by Architect to Contractor at the start of construction. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, Contractor shall deliver all Record Drawings to Owner and Architect for approval. If not approved, Contractor shall make the revisions requested by Architect or Owner’s Representative. Final payment and any retainage shall not be due and owing to Contractor until the final Record Drawings marked by Contractor as required above are delivered to Owner. 3.15 Operating Instructions and Service Manuals 3.15.1 The Contractor shall submit four (4) volumes of operating instructions and service manuals to the Architect before completing 50% of the adjusted contract amount. Payments beyond 50% of the adjusted contract amount may be withheld until all operating instructions and service manuals are received. The operating instructions and service manuals shall contain: .1 Start-up and Shutdown Procedures: Provide a

step-by-step write up of all major equipment. When manufacturer's printed start-up, trouble shooting and shut-down procedures are available, they may be incorporated into the operating manual for reference.

.2 Operating Instructions: Written operating instructions shall be included for the efficient and safe operation of all equipment.

.3 Equipment List: List of all major equipment as installed shall include model number, capacities, flow rate, and name-plate data.

.4 Service Instructions: The Contractor shall be required to provide the following information for all pieces of equipment. (a) Recommended spare parts including catalog

number and name of local suppliers or factory representative.

(b) Belt sizes, types, and lengths. (c) Wiring diagrams.

.5 Manufacturer's Certificate of Warranty: Manufacturer's certificates of warranty shall be obtained for all major equipment. Warranty shall be obtained for at least one year from the date of Substantial Completion. Where longer period is required by the Contract Documents, the longer period shall govern.

.6 Parts catalogs: For each piece of equipment furnished, a parts catalog or similar document shall be provided which identifies the components by number for replacement ordering.

3.15.2 Submission .1 Manuals shall be bound into volumes of standard

8 1/2" x 11" hard binders. Large drawings too bulky to be folded into 8 1/2" x 11" shall be

separately bound or folded and in brown envelopes, cross-referenced and indexed with the manuals.

.2 The manuals shall identify the Owner’s project name, project number, and include the name and address of the Contractor and major Subcontractors of any tier who were involved with the activity described in that particular manual.

3.16 Taxes 3.16.1 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use, and similar taxes for the Work which are legally enacted when the bids are received, whether or not yet effective or scheduled to go into effect. However, certain purchases by the Contractor of materials incorporated in or consumed in the Work are exempt from certain sales tax pursuant to RSMo § 144.062. The Contractor shall be issued a Project Tax Exemption Certificate for this Work to obtain the benefits of RSMo § 144.062. 3.16.2 The Contractor shall furnish this certificate to all subcontractors, and any person or entity purchasing materials for the Work shall present such certificate to all material suppliers as authorization to purchase, on behalf of the Owner, all tangible personal property and materials to be incorporated into or consumed in the Work and no other on a tax-exempt basis. Such suppliers shall provide to the purchasing party invoices bearing the name of the exempt entity and the project identification number. Nothing in this section shall be deemed to exempt from any sales or similar tax the purchase of any construction machinery, equipment or tools used in construction, repairing or remodeling facilities for the Owner. All invoices for all personal property and materials purchased under a Project Tax Exemption Certificate shall be retained by the Contractor for a period of five years and shall be subject to audit by the Director of Revenue. 3.16.3 Any excess resalable tangible personal property or materials which were purchased for the project under this Project Tax Exemption Certificate but which were not incorporated into or consumed in the Work shall either be returned to the supplier for credit or the appropriate sales or use tax on such excess property or materials shall be reported on a return and paid by such purchasing party not later than the due date of the purchasing party’s Missouri sales or use tax return following the month in which it was determined that the materials were not used in the Work. 3.16.4 If it is determined that sales tax is owed by the Contractor on property and materials due to the failure of the Owner to revise the certificate expiration date to cover the applicable date of purchase, Owner shall be liable for the tax owed. 3.16.5 The Owner shall not be responsible for any tax liability due to Contractor’s neglect to make timely orders, payments, etc. or Contractor’s misuse of the Project Tax

GC/14 09/16

Exemption Certificate. Contractor represents that the Project Tax Exemption Certificate shall be used in accordance with RSMo § 144.062 and the terms of the Project Tax Exemption Certificate. Contractor shall indemnify the Owner for any loss or expense, including but not limited to, reasonable attorneys’ fees, arising out of Contractor’s use of the Project Tax Exemption Certificate. 3.17 Contractor’s Construction Schedules 3.17.1 The Contractor, within fifteen (15) days after the issuance of the Notice to Proceed, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information Contractor's construction schedule for the Work and shall set forth interim dates for completion of various components of the Work and Work Milestone Dates as defined herein. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised on a monthly basis or as requested by the Owner’s Representative as required by the conditions of the Work, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. The Contractor shall conform to the most recent schedule. 3.17.2 The construction schedule shall be in a detailed format satisfactory to the Owner’s Representative and the Architect and in accordance with the detailed schedule requirements set forth in this document and the Special Conditions. If the Owner’s Representative or Architect has a reasonable objection to the schedule submitted by Contractor, the construction schedule shall be promptly revised by the Contractor. The Contractor shall monitor the progress of the Work for conformance with the requirements of the construction schedule and shall promptly advise the Owner of any delays or potential delays. 3.17.3 As time is of the essence to this contract, the University expects that the Contractor will take all necessary steps to insure that the project construction schedule shall be prepared in accordance with the specific requirements of the Special Conditions to this contract. At a minimum, contractor shall comply with the following: .1 The schedule shall be prepared using Primavera

P3, Oracle P6, Microsoft Project or other software acceptable to the Owner’s Representative.

.2 The schedule shall be prepared and maintained in CPM format, in accordance with Construction CPM Scheduling, published by the Associated General Contractors of American (AGC).

.3 Prior to submittal to the Owner’s Representative for review, Contractor shall obtain full buy-in to the schedule from all major subcontractors, in writing if so requested by Owner’s Representative.

.4 Schedule shall be updated, in accordance with Construction CPM Scheduling, published by the AGC, on a monthly basis at minimum, prior to,

and submitted with, the monthly pay application or as requested by the Owner’s Representative.

.5 Along with the update the Contractor shall submit a narrative report addressing all changes, delays and impacts, including weather to the schedule during the last month, and explain how the end date has been impacted by same.

.6 The submission of the updated certifies that all delays and impacts that have occurred on or to the project during the previous month have been factored into the update and are fully integrated into the schedule and the projected completion date.

Failure to comply with any of these requirements will be considered a material breach of this contract. See Special Conditions for detailed scheduling requirements. 3.17. 4 In the event the Owner’s Representative or Architect determines that the performance of the Work, as of a Milestone Date, has not progressed or reached the level of completion required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall have the right to order the Contractor to take corrective measures necessary to expedite the progress of construction, including, without limitation, (1) working additional shifts or overtime, (2) supplying additional manpower, equipment, facilities, (3) expediting delivery of materials, and (4) other similar measures (hereinafter referred to collectively as Extraordinary Measures). Such Extraordinary Measures shall continue until the progress of the Work complies with the stage of completion required by the Contract Documents. The Owner's right to require Extraordinary Measures is solely for the purpose of ensuring the Contractor's compliance with the construction schedule. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum concerning Extraordinary Measures required by the Owner under or pursuant to this Paragraph 3.17.3. The Owner may exercise the rights furnished the Owner under or pursuant to this Paragraph 3.17.3 as frequently as the Owner deems necessary to ensure that the Contractor's performance of the Work will comply with any Milestone Date or completion date set forth in the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT

4.1 Rights of the Owner 4.1.1 The Owner's Representative will administer the Construction Contract. The Architect will assist the Owner's Representative with the administration of the Contract as indicated in these Contract Documents. 4.1.2 If, in the judgment of the Owner's Representative, it becomes necessary to accelerate the work, the Contractor, when directed by the Owner's Representative in writing, shall cease work at any point and transfer its workers to such point or points and execute such portions of the work as may be required to enable others to hasten and properly engage and

GC/15 09/16

carry out the work, all as directed by the Owner's Representative. The additional cost of accelerating the work, if any, will be borne by the Owner, unless the Contractor's work progress is behind schedule as shown on the most recent progress schedule. 4.1.3 If the Contractor refuses, for any reason, to proceed with what the Owner believes to be contract work, the Owner may issue a Construction Directive, directing the Contractor to proceed. Contractor shall be obligated to promptly proceed with this work. If Contractor feels that it is entitled to additional compensation for this work, it may file a claim for additional compensation and/or time, in accordance with 4.4 of this document. 4.1.4 The Owner's Representative, may, by written notice, require a Contractor to remove from involvement with the Work, any of Contractor’s personnel or the personnel of its Subcontractors of any tier whom the Owner's Representative may deem abusive, incompetent, careless, or a hindrance to proper and timely execution of the Work. The Contractor shall comply with such notice promptly, but without detriment to the Work or its progress. 4.1.5 The Owner's Representative will schedule Work status meetings that shall be attended by representatives of the Contractor and appropriate Subcontractors of any tier. Material suppliers shall attend status meetings if required by the Owner's Representative. These meetings shall include preconstruction meetings. 4.1.6 The Owner does not allow smoking on University property. 4.2 Rights of the Architect 4.2.1 The Architect will interpret requirements of the Contract Documents with respect to the quality, quantity and other technical requirements of the Work itself within a reasonable time after written request of the Contractor. Contractor shall provide Owner’s Representative a copy of such written request. 4.3 Review of the Work 4.3.1 The Architect and the Owner's Representative shall, at all times, have access to the Work; and the Contractor shall provide proper and safe facilities for such access. 4.3.2 The Owner’s Representative shall have authority to reject Work that does not strictly comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Whenever the Owner’s Representative considers it necessary or advisable for implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, Owner’s Representative shall have the authority to require additional inspection or testing of the

Work, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 4.3.3 The fact that the Architect or the Owner's Representative observed, or failed to observe, faulty Work, or Work done which is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, regardless of whether or not the Owner has released final payment, shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for all damages and additional costs of the Owner as a result of defective or faulty Work. 4.4 Claims 4.4.1 A Claim is a demand or assertion by Contractor seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or any other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim(s)" also includes demands and assertions of Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents, including Claims based upon breach of contract, mistake, misrepresentation, or other cause for Contract Modification or recision. Claims must be made by written notice. Contractor shall have the responsibility to substantiate Claims. 4.4.2 Claims by Contractor must be made promptly, and no later than within fourteen (14) days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim. Claims must be made by written notice. Such notice shall include a detailed statement setting forth all reasons for the Claim and the amount of additional money and additional time claimed by Contractor. The notice of Claims shall also strictly comply with all other provisions of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be entitled to rely upon any grounds or basis for additional money on additional time not specifically set forth in the notice of Claim. All Claims not made in the manner provided herein shall be deemed waived and of no effect. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and Architect such timely written notice of any Claim provided for herein, including, without limitation, those in connection with alleged concealed or unknown conditions, and shall cooperate with the Owner and Architect in any effort to mitigate the alleged or potential damages, delay or other adverse consequences arising out of the condition which is the cause of such a Claim. 4.4.3 Pending final resolution of a Claim, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments that are not in dispute in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.5 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions 4.5.1 If conditions are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents, or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice by the Contractor shall be given to

GC/16 09/16

the Owner's Representative promptly before conditions are disturbed, and in no event later than three (3) days after first observance of the conditions. The Owner's Representative will promptly investigate such conditions. If such conditions differ materially, as provided for above and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost, or time, required for performance of the Work, an equitable adjustment in the Contract sum or Contract Time, or both, shall be made, subject to the provisions and restrictions set for herein. If the Owner's Representative determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents, and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Owner's Representative will so notify the Contractor in writing. If the Contractor disputes the finding of the Owner’s Representative that no change in the terms of the Contract terms is justified, Contractor shall proceed with the Work, taking whatever steps are necessary to overcome or correct such conditions so that Contractor can proceed in a timely manner. The Contractor may have the right to file a Claim in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.5.2 It is expressly agreed that no adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum shall be permitted, however, in connection with a concealed or unknown condition which does not differ materially from those conditions disclosed or which reasonably should have been disclosed by the Contractor’s (1) prior inspections, tests, reviews and preconstruction investigations for the Project, or (2) inspections, tests, reviews and preconstruction inspections which the Contractor had the opportunity to make or should have performed in connection with the Project. 4.6 Claim for Additional Cost 4.6.1 If the Contractor makes a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. In addition to all other requirements for notice of a Claim, said notice shall detail and itemize the amount of all Claims and shall contain sufficient data to permit evaluation of same by Owner. 4.7 Claims for Additional Time 4.7.1 If the Contractor makes a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. In addition to other requirements for notice of a Claim, Contractor shall include an estimate of the probable effect of delay upon the progress of the Work, utilizing a CPM Time Impact Schedule Analysis, (TIA) as defined in the AGC Scheduling Manual. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary. .1 Time extensions will be considered for excusable

delays only. That is, delays that are beyond the control and/or contractual responsibility of the contractor.

4.7.2 If weather days are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by the Contractor by data acceptable to the Owner's Representative substantiating that weather conditions for the period of time in question, had an adverse effect on the critical path of the scheduled construction. Weather days shall be defined as days on which critical path work cannot proceed due to weather conditions (including but not limited to rain, snow, etc.), in excess of the number of days shown on the Anticipated Weather Day schedule in the Special Conditions. To be considered a weather day, at least four hours must be lost due to the weather conditions on a critical path scope item for that day.; Weather days and Anticipated weather days listed in the Special Conditions shall only apply to Monday through Friday. A weather day claim cannot be made for Saturdays, Sundays, New Year’s Day, Martin Luther King Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the day after Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day, unless that specific day was approved in writing for work by the Owner’s Representative. .1 The Contractor must have fulfilled its contract

obligations with respect to temporary facilities and protection of its work; and worker protection for hot and cold weather per OSHA guidelines.

.2 If the contract obligations have been satisfied, the Owner will review requests for non-compensable time extensions for critical path activities as follows: .2.1 If the Contractor cannot work on a critical

path activity due to adverse weather, after implementing all reasonable temporary weather protection, the Contractor will so notify the Owner’s Representative. Each week, the Contractor will notify the Owner’s Representative of the number of adverse weather days that it believes it has experienced in the previous week. As provided in the contract, until such time as the weather days acknowledged by the Owner’s Representative exceed the number of days of adverse weather contemplated in the Special Conditions, no request for extension of the contract completion time will be considered.

.2.2 If the Contractor has accumulated in excess of the number of adverse weather days contemplated in the Special Conditions due to the stoppage of work on critical path activities due to adverse weather, the Owner will consider a time extension request from the Contractor that is submitted in accordance with the contract requirements. The Owner will provide a change order extending the time for contract completion or direct an acceleration of the work in accordance with the contract terms and conditions to recover

GC/17 09/16

the time lost due to adverse weather in excess of the number of adverse weather working days contemplated in the Special Conditions.

4.7.3 If any other Force Majeure event results in the delay to the critical path of the project, the Owner will consider a time extension request from the Contractor that is submitted in accordance with the contract requirements.

4.7.4 The Owner will consider and evaluate requests for time extensions due to changes or other events beyond the control of the Contractor on a monthly basis only, with the submission of the Contractor’s updated schedule, in conjunction with the monthly application for payment. 4.8 Resolution of Claims and Disputes 4.8.1 The Owner's Representative will review Claims and take one or more of the following preliminary actions within ten days of receipt of a Claim: (1) request additional supporting data from the Contractor, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, or (4) suggest a compromise. 4.8.2 If a Claim has not been resolved, the Contractor shall, within ten days after the Owner's Representative's preliminary response, take one or more of the following actions: (1) submit additional supporting data requested, (2) modify the initial Claim, or (3) notify the Owner's Representative that the initial Claim stands. 4.8.3 If a Claim has not been resolved after consideration of the foregoing and of further information presented by the Contractor, the Contractor has the right to seek administrative review as set forth in Section 4.9. However, Owner’s Representative’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetics will be final. 4.9 Administrative Review 4.9.1 Claims not resolved pursuant to the procedures set forth in the Contract Documents except with respect to Owner’s Representative’s decision on matters relating to aesthetic effect, and except for claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment, or the Contractor's acceptance of payments in full for changes in work may be submitted to administrative review as provided in this section. All requests for administrative review shall be made in writing. 4.9.2 Upon written request from the Contractor, the Owner’s Review Administrator authorized by the Campus Contracting Officer will convene a review meeting between the Contractor and Owner’s Representative’s within fifteen (15) days of receipt of such written request. The Contractor and Owner’s Representative will be allowed to present written documentation with respect to the claim(s) before or during the meeting. The Contractor

and Owner’s Representative will be allowed to present the testimony of any knowledgeable person regarding the claim at the review meeting. The Owner’s Review Administrator will issue a written summary of the review meeting and decision to resolve the Claim within fifteen (15) days. If the Contractor is in agreement with the decision the Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Review Administrator in writing within five (5) days, and appropriate documentation will be signed by the parties to resolve the Claim. 4.9.3 If the Contractor is not in agreement with the proposal of the Owner’s Review Administrator as to the resolution of the claim, the Contractor may file a written appeal with the UM System Contracting Officer, [in care of the Director of Facilities Planning and Development, University of Missouri, 109 Old Alumni Centers, University of Missouri, Columbia, Missouri 65211] within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the Owner’s Review Administrator’s proposal. The UM System Contracting Officer will call a meeting of the Contractor, the Owner’s Representative, and the Owner’s Review Administrator by written notice, within thirty (30) days after receipt of the Contractor's written appeal. The Owner’s Review Administrator shall provide the UM System Contracting Officer with a copy of the written decision and summary of the review meeting, the Contractor's corrections or comments regarding the summary of the review meeting, and any written documentation presented by the Contractor and the Owner’s Representative at the initial review meeting. The parties may present further documentation and/or present the testimony of any knowledgeable person regarding the claim at the meeting called by the UM System Contracting Officer. 4.9.4 The UM System Contracting Officer will issue a written decision to resolve the claim within fifteen (15) days after the meeting. If the Contractor is in agreement with the UM System Contracting Officer's proposal, the Contractor shall notify the UM System Contracting Officer in writing within five (5) days, and the Contractor and the Owner shall sign appropriate documents. The issuance of the UM System Contracting Officer's written proposal shall conclude the administrative review process even if the Contractor is not in agreement. However, proposals and any opinions expressed in such proposals issued under this section will not be binding on the Contractor nor will the decisions or any opinions expressed be admissible in any legal actions arising from the Claim and will not be deemed to remove any right or remedy of the Contractor as may otherwise exist by virtue of Contract Documents or law. Contractor and Owner agree that the Missouri Circuit Court for the County where the Work is located shall have exclusive jurisdiction to determine all issues between them. Contractor agrees not to file any complaint, petition, lawsuit or legal proceeding against Owner except with such Missouri Circuit Court.

GC/18 09/16

ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS

5.1 Award of Subcontracts 5.1.1 Pursuant to Article 9, the Contractor shall furnish the Owner and the Architect, in writing, with the name, and trade for each Subcontractor and the names of all persons or entities proposed as manufacturers of products, materials and equipment identified in the Contract Documents and where applicable, the name of the installing contractor. The Owner’s Representative will reply to the Contractor in writing if the Owner has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner has made reasonable and timely objection. 5.1.2 The Contractor may request to change a subcontractor. Any such request shall be made in writing to the Owner’s Representative. The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person, or entity previously disclosed if the Owner makes reasonable objection to such change. 5.1.3 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts, defaults, and omissions of its Subcontractors of any tier. 5.2 Subcontractual Relations 5.2.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor of any tier, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor of any tier, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and the Architect. Each subcontract agreement of any tier shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and the Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor of any tier so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights and shall allow to the Subcontractor of any tier, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies, and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with its sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor of any tier, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor of any tier shall be bound Subcontractors of any tier shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Subcontractors of any tier.

5.2.2 All agreements between the Contractor and a Subcontractor or supplier shall contain provisions whereby Subcontractor or supplier waives all rights against the Owner, contractor, Owner’s representative, Architect and all other additional insureds for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting from any of the perils covered by property or builders risk insurance coverage required of the Contractor in the Contract Documents. If Contractor fails to include said provisions in all subcontracts, Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold all the above entities harmless in the event of any legal action by Subcontractor or supplier. If insureds on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractors of any tier or suppliers, Contractor shall obtain the same. 5.3 Contingent Assignment of Subcontract 5.3.1 No assignment by the Contractor of any amount or any part of the Contract or of the funds to be received thereunder will be recognized unless such assignment has had the written approval of the Owner, and the surety has been given due notice of such assignment and has furnished written consent hereto. In addition to the usual recitals in assignment Contracts, the following language must be set forth: "it is agreed that the funds to be paid to the assignee under this assignment are subject to performance by the Contractor of the contract and to claims and to liens for services rendered or materials supplied for the performance of the Work called for in said contract in favor of all persons, firms or corporations rendering such services or supplying such materials.

ARTICLE 6 SEPARATE CONTRACTS AND COOPERATION

6.1 The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with the Work. 6.2 It shall be the duty of each Contractor to whom Work may be awarded, as well as all Subcontractors of any tier employed by them, to communicate immediately with each other in order to schedule Work, locate storage facilities, etc., in a manner that will permit all Contractors to work in harmony in order that Work may be completed in the manner and within the time specified in the Contract Documents. 6.3 No Contractor shall delay another Contractor by neglecting to perform his work at the proper time. Each Contractor shall be required to coordinate his work with other Contractors to afford others reasonable opportunity for execution of their work. Any costs caused by defective or ill- timed work, including actual damages and liquidated damages for delay, if applicable, shall be borne by the Contractor responsible therefor.

GC/19 09/16

6.4 Each Contractor shall be responsible for damage to Owner's or other Contractor's property done by him or persons in his employ, through his or their fault or negligence. If any Contractor shall cause damage to any other Contractor, the Contractor causing such damage shall upon notice of any claim, settle with such Contractor. 6.5 The Contractor shall not claim from the Owner money damages or extra compensation under this Contract when delayed in initiating or completing his performance hereunder, when the delay is caused by labor disputes, acts of God, or the failure of any other Contractor to complete his performance under any Contract with the Owner, where any such cause is beyond the Owner's reasonable control. 6.6 Progress schedule of the Contractor for the Work shall be submitted to other Contractors as necessary to permit coordinating their progress schedules. 6.7 If Contractors or Subcontractors of any tier refuse to cooperate with the instructions and reasonable requests of other contractors performing work for the Owner under separate contract, in the overall coordinating of the Work, the Owner's Representative may take such appropriate action and issue such instructions as in his judgement may be required to avoid unnecessary and unwarranted delay.

ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK

7.1 CHANGE ORDERS 7.1.1 A change order is a written instrument prepared by the Owner and signed by the Owner and Contractor formalizing their agreement on the following: .1 a change in the Work .2 the amount of an adjustment, if any, in the

Contract amount .3 an adjustment, if any, in the Contract time 7.1.2 The Owner may at any time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by a Change Order or a Construction Change Directive. Such Change Order or Construction Change Directive shall not invalidate the Contract and requires no notice to the surety. Upon receipt of any such document, or written authorization from the Owner’s Representative directing the Contractor to proceed pending receipt of the document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved in accordance with the terms set forth therein. 7.1.3 Until such time as the change order is formalized and signed by both the Owner and the Contractor it shall be considered a Change Order Request.

7.1.4 The amount of adjustment in the contract price for authorized Change Orders will be agreed upon before such Change Orders becomes effective and will be determined as follows: .1 By a lump sum proposal from the Contractor and

the Subcontractors of any tier, including overhead and profit.

.2 By a time and material basis with or without a specified maximum. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner’s Representative itemized time and material sheets depicting labor, materials, equipment utilized in completing the Work on a daily basis for the Owner's Representative approval. If this pricing option is utilized, the Contractor may be required to submit weekly reports summarizing costs to date on time and material change orders not yet finalized.

.3 By unit prices contained in the Contractor's original bid and incorporated in the Construction Contract or subsequently agreed upon. Such unit prices contained in the Contractor's original proposal are understood to include the Contractor's overhead and profit. If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order that application of such unit prices to quantities of the Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or to the Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.

7.1.5 The Contractor shall submit all fully documented change order requests with corresponding back-up documentation within the time requested by the Owner but no later than fourteen (14) working days following 1.) the Owner’s request for change order pricing in the case of a lump sum; or 2.) the completion of unit price or time and material work.

7.1.6 The Contractor shall submit change order requests in sufficient detail to allow evaluation by the Owner. Such requests shall be fully itemized by units of labor, material and equipment and overhead and profit. Such breakdowns shall be itemized as follows: .1 Labor: The Contractor’s proposal shall include

breakdowns by labor, by trade, indicating number of hours and cost per hour for each Subcontractor as applicable. Such breakdowns shall only include employees in the direct employ of Contractor or Subcontractors in the performance of the Work. Such employees shall only include laborers at the site, mechanics, craftsmen and foremen. Payroll cost shall include base rate salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits required by agreement or custom and social security contributions, unemployment, payroll taxes and workers' or workmen's compensation insurance and other customary and legally required taxes paid by the Contractor or Subcontractors. Any item or expense

GC/20 09/16

outside of these categories is not allowed. The expense of performing Work after regular working hours, on Saturdays, Sundays or legal holidays shall not be included in the above, unless approved in writing and in advance by Owner.

.2 Material, supplies, consumables and equipment to be incorporated into the Work at actual invoice cost to the Contractor or Subcontractors; breakdowns showing all material, installed equipment and consumables fully itemized with number of units installed and cost per unit extended. Any singular item or items in aggregate greater than one thousand dollars ($1,000) in cost shall be supported with supplier invoices at the request of the Owner’s Representative. Normal hand tools are not compensable.

.3 Equipment: Breakdown for required equipment shall itemize (at a minimum) delivery / pick-up charge, hourly rate and hours used. Operator hours and rate shall not be included in the equipment breakdown. Contractor must use the most cost effective equipment available in the area and should not exceed the rates listed in the Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (Blue Book). Contractor shall submit documentation for the Blue Book to support the rate being requested.

7.2 Construction Change Directive 7.2.1 A construction change directive is a written order prepared and signed by the Owner, issued with supporting documents prepared by the Architect (if applicable), directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment of the Contract amount or Contract time, or both. A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of complete agreement between the Owner and Contractor on the terms of a change order. If the Construction Change Directive allows an adjustment of the contract amount or time, such adjustment amount shall be based on one of the following methods: .1 A lump sum agreement, properly itemized and

supported by substantiating documents of sufficient detail to allow evaluation.

.2 By unit prices contained in the Contractor's original proposal and incorporated in the Construction Contract or subsequently agreed upon.

.3 A method agreed to by both the Owner and the contractor with a mutually agreeable fee for overhead and profit.

.4 In the absence of an agreement between the Owner and the Contractor on the method of establishing an adjustment of the contract amount, the Owner, with the assistance of the architect, shall determine the adjustment amount on the basis of expenditures by the Contractor for labor, materials, equipment and other costs consistent with other provisions of the Contract. The contractor shall keep and submit to the Owner an itemized accounting of all cost components, either expended or saved, while

performing the Work covered under the Construction Change Directive.

7.2.2 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise Owner of Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum, Contract Time or both.

7.2.3 A Construction Change Directive signed by Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.

7.3 Overhead and Profit 7.3.1 Overhead and Profit on Change Orders shall be applied as follows: .1 The overhead and profit charged by the Contractor

and Subcontractors shall be considered to include, but not limited to, job site office and clerical expense, normal hand tools, incidental job supervision, field supervision, payroll costs and other compensation for project manager, officers, executives, principals, general managers, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, time-keepers, and other personnel employed whether at the site or in principal or a branch office for general superintendent and administration of the Work.

.2 The percentages for overhead and profit charged on Change Orders shall be negotiated and may vary according to the nature, extent, and complexity of the Work involved but in no case shall exceed the following: 15% To the Contractor or the Subcontractor of any

tier for Work performed with their respective forces or materials purchased

5% To the Contractor on Work performed by other than his forces

5% To first tier Subcontractor on Work performed by his Subcontractor

.3 The Contractor will be allowed to add 2% for the cost of bonding and insurance to their cost of work. This 2% shall be allowed on the total cost of the added work, including overhead and profit.

.4 Not more than three mark-ups, not to exceed individual maximums shown above, shall be allowed regardless of the number of tier subcontractors. Overhead and profit shall be shown separately for each subcontractor of any tier and the Contractor.

.5 On proposals covering both increases and decreases in the amount of the Contract, the application of overhead and profit shall be on the net change in

GC/21 09/16

direct cost for the Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier performing the Work.

.6 The percentages for overhead and profit credit to the Owner on Change Orders that are strictly decreases in the quantity of work or materials shall be negotiated and may vary according to the nature, extent, and complexity of the Work involved, but shall not be less than the following: Overhead and Profit 7.5% Credit to the Owner from the Contractor or

Subcontractor of any tier for Work performed with their respective forces or materials purchased

2.5% Credit to the Owner from the Contractor on Work performed by other than his forces

2.5% Credit to the Owner from the first tier Subcontractor on Work performed by his Subcontractor of any tier

7.4 Extended General Conditions 7.4.1 The Contractor acknowledges that the percentage mark-up allowed on change orders for overhead and profit cover the Contractor’s cost of administering and executing the Work, inclusive of change orders that increase the contract time. Contractor further acknowledges that no compensation beyond the specified mark-up percentages for extended overhead shall be due or payable as a result of an increase in the Contract Time. 7.4.2 The Owner may reimburse the Contractor for extended overhead if an extension of the Contract Time is granted by the Owner, in accordance with Article 4.7.1 and the Owner determines that the extension of the Contract Time creates an inequitable condition for the Contractor. If these conditions are determined by the Owner to exist the Contractor may be reimbursed by unit prices contained in the Contractor's original bid and incorporated in the Construction Contract or by unit prices subsequently agreed upon. 7.4.3 If unit prices are subsequently agreed upon, the Contractor’s compensation shall be limited as follows: .1 For the portion of the direct payroll cost of the

Contractor’s project manager expended in completing the Work and the direct payroll cost of other onsite administrative staff not included in Article 7.3.1. Direct payroll cost shall include base rate salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits required by agreement or custom and social security contributions, unemployment, payroll taxes and workers' or workmen's compensation insurance and other customary and legally required taxes paid by the Contractor;

.2 Cost of Contractor’s temporary office, including temporary office utilities expense;

.3 Cost of temporary utilities required in the performance of the work;

.4 Profit not to exceed 5% of the total extended overhead direct costs;

7.4.4 All costs not falling into one of these categories and costs of the Contractors staff not employed onsite are not allowed. 7.5 Emergency Work 7.5.1 If, during the course of the Work, the Owner has need to engage the Contractor in emergency work, whether related to the Work or not, the Contractor shall immediately proceed with the emergency work as directed by the Owner under the applicable provisions of the contract. In so doing, Contractor agrees that all provisions of the contract remain in full force and effect and the schedule for the Work is not impacted in any way unless explicitly agreed to in writing by the Owner.

ARTICLE 8 TIME

8.1 Progress and Completion 8.1.1 Contractor acknowledges and agrees that time is of the essence of this Contract 8.1.2 Contract Time is the period of time set forth in the Contract for Construction required for Substantial Completion and Final Completion of the entire Work or portions of the Work as defined in the Contract Documents. Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. By executing the Contract, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a sufficient period for performing the Work in its entirety. 8.1.3 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance and bonds required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor. 8.1.4 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously and diligently with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion and Final Completion within the time specified in the Contract Documents. 8.2 Delay in Completion 8.2.1 The Contractor shall be liable for all of the Owner’s damages for delay in achieving Substantial Completion and/or Final Completion of the entire Work or portions of Work as set forth in the Contract Documents within the Contract Time unless liquidated damages are specifically

GC/22 09/16

provided for in the Contract Documents. If liquidated damages are specifically provided for in the Contract for Construction, Contractor shall be liable for such liquidated damages as set forth in Paragraph 8.3 8.2.2 All time limits stated in the Contract are of the essence of the Contract. However, if the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any act or neglect of the Owner or by the Owner's Representative, by changes ordered in the Work, by strikes, lockouts, abnormal weather conditions, jurisdictional disputes, or any other causes beyond the Contractor's reasonable control which the Owner’s Representative determines may justify delay then, upon submission of the Time Impact Schedule Analysis (TIA) called out in Section 4.7 of these General Conditions, the Contract Time may be extended for a reasonable time to the extent such delay will prevent Contractor from achieving Substantial Completion and/or Final Completion within the Contract Time and if performance of the Work is not, was not or would not have been delayed by any other cause for which the Contractor is not entitled to an extension in the Contract Time under the Contract Documents. It shall be a condition precedent to any adjustment of the Contract Time that Contractor provide the Owner’s Representative with written notice of the cause of delay within seven (7) days from the occurrence of the event or condition which caused the claimed delay. Written notices hereunder shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of Section 4.7. 8.2.3 The Contractor further acknowledges and agrees that adjustments in the Contract Time will be permitted for a delay only to the extent such delay (1) is not caused, or could not have been anticipated, by the Contractor, (2) could not be limited or avoided by the Contractor's timely notice to the Owner of the delay, (3) prevents Contractor from completing its Work by the Contract Time, and (4) is of a duration not less than one (1) day. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or supplier shall not justify an extension of the Contract Time. 8.2.4 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Contract Documents, except as otherwise noted in these General Conditions, an extension in the Contract Time, to the extent permitted under this Article, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any (1) delay in the commencement, prosecution or completion of the Work, (2) hindrance or obstruction in the performance of the Work, (3) loss of productivity, or (4) other similar claims due to or caused by any events beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any damages or any portion of damages resulting from delays caused by or within the control of Contractor or by acts or omissions of Contractor or its Subcontractors of any tier or delays beyond the control of both Owner and Contractor. If the

Contractor contends that delay, hindrance, obstruction or other adverse condition results from acts or omissions of the Owner, the Owner’s Representative or the Architect, Contractor shall promptly provide written notice to the Owner. Contractor shall only be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum to the extent that such acts or omissions continue after the Contractor's written notice to the Owner of such acts or omissions. The Owner's exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents (including, without limitation, ordering changes in the Work, or directing suspension, rescheduling or correction of the Work) regardless of the extent or frequency of the Owner's exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be the basis of any Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. In the event Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum for any delay, hindrance, obstruction or other adverse condition caused by the acts or omissions of the Owner, the Owner’s Representative or the Architect, Contractor shall only be entitled to its actual direct costs caused thereby and Contractor shall not be entitled to and waives any right to special, indirect, or consequential damages including loss of profits, loss of savings or revenues, loss of anticipated profits, labor inefficiencies, idle equipment, home office overhead, and similar type of damages. 8.2.5 If the Contractor submits a progress report or any construction schedule indicating, or otherwise expressing an intention to achieve completion of the Work prior to any completion date required by the Contract Documents or expiration of the Contract Time, no liability of the Owner to the Contractor for any failure of the Contractor to so complete the Work shall be created or implied. Further, the Contractor acknowledges and agrees that even if Contractor intends or is able to complete the Work prior to the Contract Time, it shall assert no Claim and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any failure of the Contractor, regardless of the cause of the failure, to complete the Work prior to the Contract Time. 8.3 Liquidated Damages 8.3.1 If Liquidated Damages are prescribed on the Bid Form and Special Conditions in the Contract Documents, the Owner may deduct from the Contract Sum and retain as Liquidated Damages, and not as penalty or forfeiture, the sum stipulated in the Contract Documents for each calendar day after the date specified for completion of the Work that the entire Work is not substantially complete and/or finally complete. 8.3.2 The Owner’s Representative shall establish the date of Substantial completion and the date of Final Completion of the Work which shall be conclusive and binding on the Owner and Contractor for the purpose of determining whether or not Liquidated Damages shall be assessed under terms hereof and the sum total amount due. 8.3.3 Liquidated Damages or any matter related thereto shall not relieve the Contractor or his surety of any responsibility or obligation under this Contract.

GC/23 09/16

ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

9.1 Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion 9.1.1 The Contractor shall commence Work within five (5) days upon the date of a “Notice to Proceed” from the Owner or the date fixed in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall prosecute the Work with faithfulness and diligence, and the Contractor shall complete the Work within the Contract Time set forth in the Contract Documents. 9.1.2 The Owner will prepare and forward three (3) copies of the Contract and Performance Bond to the bidder to whom the contract for the Work is awarded and such bidder shall return two (2) properly executed prescribed copies of the Contract and Bond to the Owner. 9.1.3 The construction period, when specified in consecutive calendar days, shall begin when the Contractor receives notice requesting the instruments listed in below. Before the Owner will issue Notice to Proceed to permit the Contractor to begin Work, the Owner shall have received the following instruments, properly executed as described in the Contract Documents. The documents below shall have been received by the Owner within fifteen (15) days after receipt of request for documents: .1 Contract .2 Bond (See Article 11) .3 Insurance (See Article 11) .4 List of Subcontractors of any tier .5 Affirmative Action Plan (see Article 13.4) 9.1.4 In the event Contractor fails to provide Owner such documents, Contractor may not enter upon the site of the Work until such documents are provided. The date the Contractor is required to commence and complete the Work shall not be affected by the Owner denying Contractor access to the site as a result of Contractor’s failure to provide such documents and Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Time or Contract sum as a result of its failure to comply with the provisions of this Paragraph 9.1.5 Contracts executed by partnerships shall be signed by all general partners of the partnership. Contracts signed by corporations shall be signed by the President or Vice President and the Secretary or Assistant Secretary. In case the Assistant Secretary or Vice President signs, it shall be so indicated by writing the word "Asst." or "Vice" in front of the words "Secretary" and "President". The corporate seal of the corporation shall be affixed. For all other types of entities, the Contractor and the person signing the Contract on behalf of Contractor represent and warrant that the person

signing the Contract has the legal authority to bind Contractor to the Contract. 9.1.6 Any successful bidder which is a corporation organized in a state other than Missouri or any bidder doing business in the State of Missouri under a fictitious name shall furnish, at no cost to the Owner, no later than the time at which the executed Contract for Construction, the Payment Bond, and the Performance Bond are returned, a properly certified copy of its current Certificate of Authority and License to do business in the State of Missouri. No contract will be executed by the Owner until such certificate is furnished by the bidder, unless there already is on file with the Owner a current certificate, in which event, no additional certificate will be required during the period of time for which such current certificate remains in effect. 9.1.7 Within fifteen (15) calendar days of the issuance of a Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit one (1) signed copy of the following instruments. No payment will be processed until all of these instruments are received and approved by the Owner's Representative. .1 Reproducible progress and payment schedule .2 Contractor's Schedule of Values .3 List of material suppliers .4 Itemized breakdown of all labor rates for each

classification. Overhead and profit shall not be included. Payroll cost shall include base rate salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits required by agreement or custom and social security contributions, unemployment, payroll taxes and workers' or workmen's compensation insurance and other customary and legally required taxes paid by the Contractor or Subcontractors. Any item or expense outside of these categories is not allowed. The expense of performing Work after regular working hours, on Saturdays, Sundays or legal holidays shall not be included in the above, unless approved in writing and in advance by Owner.

.5 Itemized breakdown of anticipated equipment rates (breakout operator rate). Overhead and profit shall not be included. Breakdown for required equipment shall itemize (at a minimum) delivery/ pick-up charge, hourly rate and hours used. Operator hours and rate shall not be included in the equipment breakdown. Contractor must use the most cost effective equipment available in the area and should not exceed the rates listed in the Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (Blue Book). Contractor shall submit documentation for the Blue Book to support the rate being requested.

9.1.8 The Contractor shall be paid electronically using the Owner’s web-based payment program with a direct electronic transfer from the Owner’s account into the Contractor’s account. The Contractor must submit the following information to the Owner’s Representative:

GC/24 09/16

.1 Bank Transit Number for the Contractor’s bank

into which the electronic deposit will be made. .2 Bank Account Number for the Contractor’s

account into which the electronic deposit will be made.

.3 Contractor’s E-Mail address so that formal notification of the deposit by the Owner can be provided.

9.2 Contract Sum 9.2.1 The Owner shall compensate Contractor for all Work described herein and in the Contract Documents the Contract Sum set forth in the Contract for Construction, subject to additions and deletions as provided hereunder. 9.3 Schedule of Values 9.3.1 Within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner’s Representative a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Owner’s Representative may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Owner’s Representative, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. The values set forth in such schedule may, at the Owner’s option be used in any manner as fixing a basis for additions to or deletions from the Contract Sum. 9.3.2 The progress and payment schedule of values shall show the following: .1 Enough detail as necessary to adequately evaluate

the actual percent complete of any line item on a monthly basis, as determined by the Owner’s Representative.

.2 Line items, when being performed by a subcontractor or material supplier, shall correlate directly back to the subcontract or purchase order amount if requested by the Owner’s Representative.

9.4 Applications for Payment 9.4.1 The Contractor shall submit monthly to the Owner’s Representative and the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values. Such application shall be supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner’s Representative or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage as provided for herein. 9.4.2 Such applications shall not include requests for payment of amounts the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier

9.4.3 Progress payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered to the site and incorporated in the Work. No payments will be made for materials and equipment stored at the Project site but not yet incorporated into the Work except as provided in Paragraph 9.4.4. 9.4.4 If approved in writing and in advance by Owner, progress payments may be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. Owner may in its sole discretion refuse to grant approval for payments for materials and equipment stored at the Project site but not yet incorporated in the Work. Any approval by Owner for payment for materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site, or stored offsite as noted below, for subsequent incorporation in the Work shall be conditioned upon Contractor’s demonstrating that such materials and equipment are adequately protected from weather, damage, vandalism and theft and that such materials and equipment have been inventoried and stored in accordance with procedures established by or approved by the Owner. Nothing in this clause shall imply or create any liability on the part of the Owner for the Contractor’s inventory and storage procedures or for any loss or damage to material, equipment or supplies stored on the site, whether incorporated into the work or not. In the event any such loss or damage occurs, the Contractor remains solely responsible for all costs associated with replacement of the affected materials, supplies and equipment including labor and incidental costs, and shall have no claim against the Owner for such loss. No allowance shall be made in the project pay requests for materials not delivered to the site of the work and incorporated into the work, except as noted below. For the purposes of this Article, Offsite is defined as any location not owned or leased by the Owner. Contractor shall submit a list of materials that they are requesting payment for offsite storage within 60 days of Notice Proceed. .1 Items considered to be major items of considerable

magnitude, if suitably stored, may be allowed in project pay requests on the basis of ninety percent (90%) of invoices

.2 Determination of acceptable “major items of considerable magnitude” and “suitably stored” shall be made by the Owner’s Representative.

.3 Aggregate quantities of materials not considered unique to this project will not be considered for offsite storage payment.

.4 Contractor shall submit to the Owner’s Representative a list of the material for which application for payment for offsite storage is anticipated no less than forty-five days prior to the submission of the applicable pay request. The list shall include a material description, applicable division, quantity and discounts offered to the Owner for early payment. Contractor shall also

GC/25 09/16

submit the location the material will be stored and the method of protection

.5 The storage facility shall be subject to approval by the Owner’s representative, shall be located within an acceptable distance of the project sites as established by the Owner’s Representative and all materials for the Owner’s project must be stored separately from all other items within the storage facility and shall be labeled and stored in the name of the Curators of the University of Missouri.

.6 The Owner’s representative shall be provided a minimum of two weeks tice to visit the storage facility and inspect the stored material prior to submission of the pay request.

.7 Upon favorable inspection by the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor shall, at the Owner’s option, submit the appropriate UCC filing, transferring title of the material or equipment to The Curators of the University of Missouri.

.8 An invoice provided by the supplier shall be included with the applicable pay request.

.9 The contractor shall remain fully responsible for all items, until acceptance of the project by the Owner.

10. The contractor shall reimburse all costs incurred by the Owner in inspecting and verifying all material stored offsite, including mileage, airfare, meals, lodging and time, charged at a reasonable hourly rate.

9.4.5 The Application for Payment shall constitute a representation by the Contractor to the Owner that the Work has progressed to the point indicated; the quality of the Work covered by the Application for Payment is in accordance with the Contract Documents; and the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount requested. 9.4.6 The Contractor will be reimbursed for ninety-five

percent (95%) of the value of all labor furnished and material installed and computed in the same manner, less all previous payments made. On projects where a bond is not required, the contractor will be reimbursed for ninety percent (90%) of the value of all labor furnished and material installed and computed in the same manner, less all previous payments made

9.5 Approval for Payment 9.5.1 The Owner’s Representative will, within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either approve Contractor’s Application for Payment for such amount as the Owner’s Representative determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor of the Owner’s Representative's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.6.

9.6 Decisions to Withhold Approval 9.6.1 The Owner’s Representative may decide not to certify payment and may withhold approval in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner. If the Owner’s Representative is unable to approve payment in the amount of the Application, the Owner’s Representative will notify the Contractor as provided in Paragraph 9.5.1. If the Contractor and Owner’s Representative cannot agree on a revised amount, the Owner’s Representative will promptly issue approval for payment for the amount for which the Owner’s Representative is able to determine is due Contractor. The Owner’s Representative may also decide not to approve payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, may nullify the whole or a part of approval for payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Owner’s Representative opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of: .1 defective Work not remedied or damage to completed

Work; .2 failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable

materials; .3 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence

indicating probable filing of such claims; .4 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to

Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment, Owner may, at its sole option issue joint checks to subcontractors who have presented evidence that it has not been paid in accordance with the Contract;

.5 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

.6 damage to the Owner or another contractor;

.7 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time or an unsatisfactory rate of progress made by Contractor;

.8 Contractor's failure to comply with applicable Laws;

.9 Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s failure to comply with contract Prevailing Wage requirements; or

.10 Contractor’s failure to carry out the Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents.

9.6.2 When the above reasons for withholding approval are removed, approval will be made for amounts previously withheld. 9.7 Progress Payments 9.7.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Owner by the Contractor and approvals issued by the Owner’s Representative, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 9.7.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one (1) calendar month. 9.7.3 The Owner shall make payment to Contractor for amounts due and approved by Owner’s Representative not later

GC/26 09/16

than thirty (30) days after the Owner approves a properly detailed Application for Payment which is in compliance with the Contract Documents. The Owner shall not have the obligation to process or pay such Application for Payment until it receives an Application for Payment satisfying such requirements. 9.7.4 Based on the Schedule of Values submitted by Contractor, Applications for Payment submitted by Contractor shall indicate the actual percentage of completion of each portion of Contractor's Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. 9.7.5 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor and Supplier, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's or supplier's portion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor or supplier is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of each Subcontractor's or supplier's portion of the Work, in full compliance with state statute. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor or supplier, require each Subcontractor or supplier to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 9.7.6 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor of any tier nor a laborer or employee of Contractor except to the extent required by law. Retainage provided for by the Contract Documents are to be retained and held for the sole protection of Owner, and no other person, firm or corporation shall have any claim or right whatsoever thereto. 9.7.7 An approval for payment by Owner’s Representative, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.8 Failure of Payment 9.8.1 If the Owner is entitled to reimbursement or payment from the Contractor under or pursuant to the Contract Documents, such payment by Contractor shall be made promptly upon demand by the Owner. Notwithstanding anything contained in the Contract Documents to the contrary, if the Contractor fails to promptly make any payment due the Owner, or the Owner incurs any costs and expenses to cure any default of the Contractor or to correct defective Work, the Owner shall have an absolute right to offset such amount against the Contract Sum and may, in the Owner's sole discretion, elect either to: (1) deduct an amount equal to that to which the Owner is entitled from any payment then or thereafter due the Contractor from the Owner, or (2) issue a written notice

to the Contractor reducing the Contract Sum by an amount equal to that to which the Owner is entitled. 9.9 Substantial Completion 9.9.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work as defined in Paragraph 1.1.9 as certified by the Owner. 9.9.2 When the Contractor considers the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and the Architect. The Owner’s Representative will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Owner’s Representative's inspection discloses any item which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall complete or correct such item upon notification by the Owner’s Representative. The Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Owner’s Representative to determine Substantial Completion. When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Owner will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion. Substantial Completion shall transfer from the Contractor to the Owner responsibilities for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance. In no event shall Contractor have more than thirty (30) days to complete all items on the Punch List and achieve Final Completion. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion or as agreed otherwise. 9.9.3 At the date of Substantial Completion, the Contractor may apply for, and if approved by Owner’s Representative, the Owner, subject to the provisions herein, shall increase total payments to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum less one hundred fifty percent (150%) of the value of any incomplete Work and unsettled claims, as determined by the Owner’s Representative. 9.10 Partial Occupancy or Use 9.10.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by the Owner’s Representative. 9.10.2 Immediately before such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, and Contractor shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. Unless

GC/27 09/16

otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.11 Final Completion and Final Payment 9.11.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Owner’s Representative and the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Owner’s Representative and Architect find the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Owner’s Representative will promptly issue a final approval for payment; otherwise, Owner’s Representative will return Contractor's Final Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Submission of a Final Application for Payment shall constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Paragraph 9.11.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. All warranties and guarantees required under or pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be assembled and delivered by the Contractor to the Owner’s Representative as part of the final Application for Payment. The final approval for payment will not be issued by the Owner’s Representative until all warranties and guarantees have been received and accepted by the Owner. 9.11.2 The Owner will request the Contractor to submit the application for final payment along with a manually signed notarized letter on the Contractor's letterhead certifying that: .1 Labor costs, prevailing wage rates, fringe benefits

and material costs have been paid. .2 Subcontractors of any tier and manufacturers

furnishing materials and labor for the project have fully completed their Work and have been paid in full.

.3 The project has been fully completed in accordance with the Contract Documents as modified by Change Orders.

.4 The acceptance by Contractor of its Final Payment, by check or electronic transfer, shall be and operate as a release of all claims of Contractor against Owner for all things done or furnished or relating to the Work and for every act or alleged neglect of Owner arising out of the Work.

9.11.3 Final Payment constituting the entire unpaid balance due shall be paid by the Owner to the Contractor within thirty (30) days after Owner's receipt of Contractor's Final Application for Payment which satisfies all the requirements of the Contract Documents and Owner’s

receipt of all information and documents set forth in Section 9.11. 9.11.4 No payment under this Contract, including but not limited to final payment, shall constitute acceptance by Owner of any Work or act not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.11.5 No recourse shall be had against any member of the Board of Curators, or officer thereof, for any payment under the Contract or any claim based thereon.

ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs 10.1.1 The Contractor shall at all times conduct operations under this Contract in a manner to avoid the risk of bodily harm to persons or risk of damage to any property. The Contractor shall promptly take precautions which are necessary and adequate against conditions created during the progress of the Contractor's activities hereunder which involve a risk of bodily harm to persons or a risk of damage to property. The Contractor shall continuously inspect Work, materials, and equipment to discover and determine any such conditions and shall be solely responsible for discovery, determination, and correction of any such conditions. The Contractor shall comply with applicable safety laws, standards, codes, and regulations in the jurisdiction where the Work is being performed, specifically, but without limiting the generality of the foregoing, with rules regulations, and standards adopted pursuant to the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and applicable amendments. 10.1.2 All contractors, subcontractors and workers on this project are subject to the Construction Safety Training provisions 292.675 RSMo. 10.1.3 In the event the Contractor encounters on the site, material reasonably believed to be asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), lead, mercury, or other material known to be hazardous, which has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected and report the condition to the Owner's Representative and the Architect in writing. The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the Owner's Representative and Contractor if in fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered harmless. The Work in the affected area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), or when it has been rendered harmless by written agreement of the Owner's Representative and the Contractor. “Rendered Harmless” shall mean that levels of such materials are less than any applicable exposure standards, including but limited to OSHA regulations.

GC/28 09/16

10.2 Safety Of Persons And Property 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: .1 students, faculty, staff, the public, construction

personnel, and other persons who may be affected thereby;

.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody, or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors of any tier; and

.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, and utilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.

10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury, or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, safeguards for safety and protection, including, but not limited to, posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations, and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise the highest degree of care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Article 10 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor of any tier, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable, and for which the Contractor is responsible under Article 10, except damage or loss attributable solely to acts or omissions of Owner or the Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's other obligations stated elsewhere in the Contract.

10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents, and the maintaining, enforcing and supervising of safety precautions and programs. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner's Representative and Architect. The Contractor shall hold regularly scheduled safety meetings to instruct Contractor personnel on safety practices, accident avoidance and prevention, and the Project Safety Program. The Contractor shall furnish safety equipment, and enforce the use of such equipment by it's employees and it’s subcontractors of any tier. 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. 10.2.8 The Contractor shall promptly report in writing to the Owner all accidents arising out of or in connection with the Work which cause death, lost time injury, personal injury, or property damage, giving full details and statements of any witnesses. In addition, if death, serious personal injuries, or serious property damages are caused, the accident shall be reported immediately by telephone or messenger to the Owner 10.2.9 The Contractor shall promptly notify in writing to the Owner of any claims for injury or damage to personal property related to the work, either by or against the Contractor.

ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE & BONDS

11.1 Insurance 11.1.1 Contractor shall secure from the date of the Contract for Construction and maintain for such periods of time as set forth below, insurance of such types and in such amounts specified below, to protect Contractor, Owner and others against all hazards or risks of loss described below. The form of such insurance together with carriers thereof, in each case, shall be approved by Owner, but, regardless of such approval, it shall be the responsibility of Contractor to maintain the insurance coverages set forth herein. 11.1.2 The contractor shall not be allowed on the Owners property without proof of the insurance coverages set forth herein 11.2 Commercial General Liability 11.2.1 Contractor shall secure and maintain from the date of the Contract and for a period of at least five (5) years from the date of Final Completion of the entire Work Commercial General Liability insurance (“CGL”) with a combined single limit of not less than $2,000,000 per occurrence, $5,000,000 general aggregate, $5,000,000 products and completed operations aggregate and $1,000,000 personal injury and

GC/29 09/16

advertising injury. General Aggregate should apply per project. An umbrella policy may be used to satisfy these limits. If the General Aggregate is not on a per project basis, the contractor shall provide an additional $2,000,000 general aggregate. 11.2.2 CGL insurance shall be written on a comprehensive form and shall cover claims and liability in connection with or resulting from the Contractor’s operations and activities under the Contract, for personal injuries, occupational sickness, disease, death or damage to property of others, including loss of use resulting therefrom, arising out of any operations or activities of the Contractor, its agents, or any Subcontractors of any tier or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. 11.2.3 CGL insurance shall include premises, operations, independent contractors, products-completed operations, personal injury and advertising injury and liability assumed under an insured contract (including the tort liability of another assumed in a business contract) coverages. In particular, and not by way of any limitation, the CGL insurance shall cover the Contractor’s indemnity obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 11.2.4 There shall be no endorsement or modification of the CGL policy limiting the scope of coverage for liability arising from blasting, explosion, collapse, or underground property damage. 11.2.5 “The Curators of the University of Missouri” shall be endorsed as an “additional insured” under the CGL policy. The additional insured status must be conveyed by using the ISO CG 2 10 (2004) edition or equivalent and the ISO CG 20 37 (2004) edition. The policy shall be endorsed to be primary coverage and any other insurance carried by the Owner shall be excess only and will not contribute with Contractors’ insurance. To confirm, the Endorsement should accompany the insurance certificate. 11.2.6 Contractor waives all rights against Owner and its agents, officers, representatives and employees for recovery of damages to the extent those damages are covered by the CGL policy required hereunder. 11.3 Licensed for Use Vehicle Liability 11.3.1 Contractor shall secure and maintain from the date of the Contract for Construction until the date of Final Completion of the entire Work, insurance, to be on comprehensive form, which shall protect Contractor against any and all claims for all injuries and all damage to property arising from the use of automobiles, trucks and motorized vehicles, in connection with the performance of Work under this Contract, and shall cover the operation on or off the site of the Work of all motor vehicles licensed for highway use

whether they are owned, non-owned or hired. Such insurance shall include contractual liability coverage and shall provide coverage on the basis of the date of any accident. The liability limits under such policy shall not be less than $2,000,000 combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage per accident. 11.3.2 Contractor waives all rights against Owner and its agents, officers, directors and employees for recovery of damages to the extent such damages are covered by the automobile liability insurance required hereunder. 11.4 Workers’ Compensation Insurance 11.4.1 Contractor shall purchase and maintain workers’ compensation insurance and employers’ liability insurance which shall protect Contractor from claims for injury, sickness, disease or death of Contractor’s employees or statutory employees. The insurance policies required hereunder shall include an “all states” or “other states” endorsement. In case any Work is sublet, Contractor shall require any Subcontractor of any tier to provide the insurance coverages required under this Section 11.4. 11.4.2 Contractor’s workers’ compensation insurance coverage shall be in compliance with all applicable Laws, including the statutes of the State of Missouri. Contractor’s employers’ liability coverage limits shall not be less than $1,000,000 each accident for bodily injury by accident or $1,000,000 each employee for bodily injury by disease. 11.5 Liability Insurance General Requirements 11.5.1 All insurance coverages procured by Contractor shall be provided by agencies and insurance companies acceptable to and approved by Owner. Any insurance coverage shall be provided by insurance companies that are duly licensed to conduct business in the State of Missouri as an admitted carrier. The form and content of all insurance coverage provided by Contractor are subject to the approval of Owner. All required insurance coverages shall be obtained and paid for by Contractor. Any approval of the form, content or insurance company by Owner shall not relieve the Contractor from the obligation to provide the coverages required herein. 11.5.2 All insurance coverage procured by the Contractor shall be provided by insurance companies having policyholder ratings no lower than "A-" and financial ratings not lower than "XI" in the Best's Insurance Guide, latest edition in effect as of the date of the Contract, and subsequently in effect at the time of renewal of any policies required by the Contract Documents. Insurance coverages required hereunder shall not be subject to a deductible amount on a per-claim basis of more than $10,000.00 and shall not be subject to a per-occurrence deductible of more than $25,000.00. Insurance procured by Contractor covering the additional insureds shall be primary insurance and any insurance maintained by Owner shall be excess insurance.

GC/30 09/16

11.5.3 All insurance required hereunder shall provide that the insurer’s cost of providing the insureds a defense and appeal, including attorneys’ fees, shall be supplementary and shall not be included as part of the policy limits but shall remain the insurer’s separate responsibility. Contractor shall cause its insurance carriers to waive all rights of subrogation, except for Workers’ Compensation, against the Owner and its officers, employees and agents. 11.5.4 The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with certificates, Additional Insured endorsements, policies, or binders which indicate the Contractor and/or the Owner and other Contractors (where required) are covered by the required insurance showing type, amount, class of operations covered, effective dates and dates of expiration of policies prior to commencement of the work. Contractor is required to maintain coverages as stated and required to notify the University of a Carrier Change or cancellation within 2 business days. The University reserves the right to request a copy of the policy. Contractor fails to provide, procure and deliver acceptable policies of insurance or satisfactory certificates or other evidence thereof, the Owner may obtain such insurance at the cost and expense of the Contractor without notice to the Contractor. 11.5.5 With respect to all insurance coverages required to remain in force and affect after final payment, Contractor shall provide Owner additional certificates, policies and binders evidencing continuation of such insurance coverages along with Contractor’s application for final payment and shall provide certificates, policies and binders thereafter as requested by Owner. 11.5.6 The maintenance in full current force and effect of such forms and amounts of insurance and bonds required by the Contract Documents shall be a condition precedent to Contractor’s exercise or enforcement of any rights under the Contract Documents. 11.5.7 Failure of Owner to demand certificates, policies and binders evidencing insurance coverages required by the Contract Documents, approval by Owner of such certificates, policies and binders or failure of Owner to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided by Contractor shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor’s obligations to maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. 11.5.8 The Owner shall have the right to terminate the Contract if Contractor fails to maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. 11.5.9 If Contractor fails to maintain the insurance required by the Contract Document, Owner shall have the right, but not the obligation, to purchase said insurance at

Contractor’s expense. If Owner is damaged by Contractor’s failure to maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents, Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable to such failure. 11.5.10 By requiring the insurance set forth herein and in the Contract Documents, Owner does not represent or warrant that coverage and limits will necessarily be adequate to protect Contractor, and such coverages and limits shall not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor’s liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. 11.5.11 If Contractor’s liability policies do not contain a standard separation of insureds provision, such policies shall be endorsed to provide cross-liability coverage. 11.5.12 If a part of the Work hereunder is to be subcontracted, the Contractor shall: (1) cover any and all Subcontractors in its insurance policies; (2) require each Subcontractor to secure insurance which will protect said Subcontractor and supplier against all applicable hazards or risks of loss designated in accordance with Article 11 hereunder; and (3) require each Subcontractor or supplier to assist in every manner possible in the reporting and investigation of any accident, and upon request, to cooperate with any insurance carrier in the handling of any claim by securing and giving evidence and obtaining the attendance of witnesses as required by any claim or suit. 11.5.13 It is understood and agreed that the insurance coverages required by the provisions of this Article 11 are required in the public interest and that the Owner does not assume any liability for acts of Contractor or Subcontractors of any tier or their employees in the performance of the Contract or Work. 11.6 Builder’s Risk Insurance 11.6.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the State of Missouri, as an admitted carrier, builder’s risk insurance on the entire Work. Such insurance shall be written on a completed value form for the entire Work. The insurance shall apply on a replacement cost basis. 11.6.2 The insurance as required herein shall name as insureds the Owner, Contractor and all Subcontractors of any tier. The insurance policy shall contain a provision that the insurance will not be canceled, allowed to expire or materially changed until at least thirty (30) days prior written notice has been given to Owner. 11.6.3 The insurance as required herein shall cover the entire Work, including reasonable compensation for Architect’s services and expenses made necessary by an insured loss. Insured property shall include portions of the Work located away from the site (including all offsite stored materials) but intended for use at the site, and shall also cover portions of the Work in transit, including ocean transit. The

GC/31 09/16

policy shall include as insured property scaffolding, falsework, and temporary buildings located at the site. The policy shall cover the cost of removing debris, including demolition as may be made legally necessary by the operation of any law, ordinance or regulation. 11.6.4 The insurance required herein shall be on an all risk form and shall be written to cover all risks of physical loss or damage to the insured party and shall insure at least against the perils of fire and extended coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, lightening, earthquake, flood, frost, water damage, windstorm and freezing. 11.6.5 If there are any deductibles applicable to the insurance required herein, Contractor shall pay any part of any loss not covered because of the operation of such deductibles. 11.6.6 The insurance as required herein shall be maintained in effect until the earliest of the following dates: .1 the date which all persons and organization who

are insureds under the policy agree in writing that it shall be terminated;

.2 the date on which final payment of this Contract has been made by Owner to Contractor; or

.3 the date on which the insurable interests in the property of all insureds other than the Owner have ceased.

11.6.7 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors of any tier, suppliers, agents and employees, each of the other, (2) the Architect and Architect's consultants, and (3) separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors of any tier, suppliers, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 11.7 or other insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors of any tier, suppliers, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, was at fault or was negligent in causing the loss and whether or not the person or entity had an interest in the property damaged.

11.6.8 A loss insured under Contractor's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner in good faith and made payable to the Owner for the insureds, subject to requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors of any tier their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors of any tier to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 11.7 Bonds 11.7.1 When the Contract sum exceeds Fifty Thousand Dollars ($50,000), the Contractor shall procure and furnish a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond in the form prepared by the Owner, each in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum, as well as adjustments to the Contract Sum. The Performance Bond shall secure and guarantee Contractor’s faithful performance of this Contract, including but not limited to Contractor’s obligation to correct defects after final payment has been made as required by the Contract Documents. The Payment Bond shall secure and guarantee payment of all persons performing labor on the Project under this Contract and furnishing materials in connection with this Contract. These Bonds shall be in effect through the duration of the Contract plus the Guaranty Period as required by the Contract Documents. 11.7.2 The bonds required hereunder shall be executed by a responsible surety licensed in the State of Missouri, with a Best’s rating of no less than A-/XI. The Contractor shall require the attorney in fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of this power of attorney indicating the monetary limit of such power. 11.7.3 If the surety of any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to conduct business in the State of Missouri is terminated, or it ceases to meet the requirements of this paragraph, Contractor shall within ten (10) days substitute another bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. If Contractor fails to make such substitution, Owner may procure such required bonds on behalf of Contractor at Contractor’s expense. 11.7.4 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds to such person or entity. 11.7.5 The Contractor shall keep the surety informed of the progress of the Work, and, where necessary, obtain the surety's consent to or waiver of: (1) notice of changes in the Work; (2) request for reduction or release of retention; (3) request for final payment; and (4) any other material required by the surety. The Owner shall be notified by the Contractor, in writing, of all communications with the surety, as it relates to items one through four. The Owner may, in the Owner's sole discretion,

GC/32 09/16

inform surety of the progress of the Work, any defects in the Work, or any defaults of Contractor under the Contract Documents and obtain consents as necessary to protect the Owner's rights, interest, privileges and benefits under and pursuant to any bond issued in connection with the Work. 11.7.6 Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and any agents, employees, representative or member of the Board of Curators from and against any claims, expenses, losses, costs, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, as a result of any failure of Contractor to procure the bonds required herein.

ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF THE

WORK 12.1 Uncovering of the Work 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it shall, if required in writing by the Architect or the Owner's Representative, be uncovered for the Architect's observation and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect or the Owner's Representative has not specifically requested to observe, prior to its being covered, the Architect or the Owner's Representative may request to see such Work, and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner will be responsible for payment of such costs. 12.2 Correction of the Work 12.2.1 The Architect or Owner’s Representative shall have the right to reject Work not in strict compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or the Owner's Representative for failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after final completion and whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed. If Work has been rejected by Architect or Owner’s Representative, the Architect or Owner’s Representative shall have the right to require the Contractor to remove it from the Project site and replace it with Work that strictly conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents regardless if such removal and replacement results in “economic waste.” Contractor shall pay all claims, costs,

losses and damages caused by or resulting from the correction, removal or replacement of defective Work, including but not limited to, all costs of repair or replacement of Work of others. The Contractor shall bear costs of correcting, removing and replacing such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby. If prior to the date of final payment, the Contractor, a Subcontractor or anyone for whom either is responsible uses or damages any portion of the Work, including, without limitation, mechanical, electrical, plumbing and other building systems, machinery, equipment or other mechanical device, the Contractor shall cause such item to be restored to “like new” condition at no expense to the Owner. 12.2.2 If, within twelve (12) months after the date of Final Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or after the date for commencement of warranties, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found not to be in strict accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct or remove and replace such defective Work, at the Owner’s discretion. Such twelve (12) month period is referred to as the “Guarantee Period.” The obligations under this Paragraph 12.2.2 shall cover any repairs, removal and replacement to any part of the Work or other property caused by the defective Work. 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. 12.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct or remove it and replace such nonconforming Work. If the Contractor does not proceed with correction of such nonconforming Work within a reasonable time fixed by written notice from the Owner, the Owner may take action to correct or remove the nonconforming work at the contractor’s expense. 12.2.5 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged Work or property, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or of others caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 12.2.6 Nothing contained in Article 12 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations that the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the twelve (12) month Guarantee Period as described in Article 12 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct, remove or replace the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents

GC/33 09/16

may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. The requirements of Article 12 are in addition to and not in limitation of any of the other requirements of the Contract for warranties or conformance of the Work to the requirements of the Contract Documents. 12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 12.3.1 The Owner may accept Work which is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, instead of requiring its removal and correction, in its sole discretion. In Such case the Contract Sum will be adjusted as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be made whether or not final payment has been made. Nothing contained herein shall impose any obligation upon the Owner to accept nonconforming or defective Work.

ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

13.1 Written Notice 13.1.1 All notices required to be given by the contractor under the terms of this Contract shall be made in writing. Written notice when served by the Owner will be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an office of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent to the last business address known to the party giving notice. 13.2 Rights and Remedies 13.2.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents, and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 13.2.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, the Architect, or the Owner’s Representative will constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded to the Owner under the Contract Documents, nor will such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 13.2.3 The terms of this Contract and all representations, indemnifications, warranties and guarantees made in, required by or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion and acceptance of the Work and termination or completion of the Work and shall remain in effect so long as the Owner is entitled to protection of its rights under applicable law.

13.2.4 Contractor shall carry out the Work and adhere to the current construction schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements except as the Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree to in writing. 13.3 Tests and Inspections 13.3.1 Tests, inspections, and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules or regulations shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, and shall bear related costs of tests, inspections, and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect and the Owner's Representative timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect and/or the Owner's Representative may observe procedures. 13.3.2 If the Architect or the Owner's Representative determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included in the Contract Documents, or required by law, the Architect, or the Owner's Representative will instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection, or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner's Representative and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect, and the Owner's Representative, of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect and/or the Owner's Representative may observe such procedures. The Owner will bear such costs except as provided elsewhere in Article 13. 13.3.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection, or approval under Article 13 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses. 13.3.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection, or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner’s Representative and Architect. 13.3.5 Contractor shall take all necessary actions to ensure that all tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. 13.3.6 Contractor shall arrange for and pay for all costs of all testing required by the Contract Documents or any applicable Laws for materials to be tested or certified at or on the place or

GC/34 09/16

premises of the source of the material to be supplied. The Owner shall have the right to require testing of all materials at the place of the source of the material to be supplied if not required by the Contract Documents or any applicable Laws. The Owner shall bear the costs of such tests and inspections not required by the Contract Documents or by applicable Laws unless prior defective Work provides Architect or Owner with a reasonable belief that additional defective Work may be found, in which case Contractor shall be responsible for all costs of tests and inspections ordered by the Owner or Architect, whether or not such tests or inspection reveals that Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 13.4 Nondiscrimination in Employment Equal

Opportunity 13.4.1 The University serves from time to time as a contractor for the United States government. Accordingly, the provider of goods and/or services shall comply with federal laws, rules and regulations applicable to subcontractors of government contracts including those relating to equal employment opportunity and affirmative action in the employment of minorities (Executive Order 11246), women (Executive Order 11375), persons with disabilities (29 USC 706) and Executive Order 11758, and certain veterans (38 USC 4212 formerly [2012]) contracting with business concerns with small disadvantaged business concerns (Publication L. 95-507). Contract clauses required by the Government in such circumstances are incorporated herein by reference. 13.5 Supplier Diversity Goal Program 13.5.1 The Contractor shall subcontract with diverse firms no less than the amount pledged in the Contractor’s Bid and/or the amount accepted by the Owner. 13.5.2 If the Contractor must remove any diverse subcontractor of any tier, the Contractor shall replace the diverse subcontractor of any tier with another diverse subcontractor(s) of equal dollar value to the diverse supplier removed. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner’s Representative in writing of the Contractor’s intent to remove any, and the Contractor’s plan to maintain subcontracts with diverse firms of no less than amount pledged in the Contractor’s Bid and/or the amount accepted by the Owner. All changes of diverse subcontractor of any tier shall be approved by the Director of Facilities Planning & Development. 13.5.3 If the Contractor fails to meet or maintain the contractor’s Supplier Diversity subcontracting pledge, the Contractor shall immediately notify in writing the Owner’s Representative, and the Director of Facilities Planning & Development. Such notice shall include a description of the Contractor’s good faith effort to comply with their Supplier Diversity subcontracting pledge.

13.5.4 If the Director of Facilities Planning & Development finds the Contractor has failed to comply in good faith with the Owner’s Supplier Diversity goal program, the Director may take appropriate action, including but not limited to, declaring the Contractor ineligible to participate in any contracts with the Owner for a period not to exceed six (6) months, and/or directing that the Contractor's actions be declared a material breach of the Contract and that the Contract be terminated. 13.5.5 The Contractor and his subcontractors shall develop, implement, maintain, and submit in writing to the Director of Facilities Planning & Development, an affirmative action program if at least fifty (50) persons in the aggregate are employed under this contract. If less than fifty (50) persons in the aggregate are to be employed under this contract, the Contractor shall submit, in lieu of the written affirmative action program, a properly executed "Affidavit for Affirmative Action" in the form as included in the Contract Documents. For the purpose of this section, an "Affirmative Action Program" means positive actions to influence all employment practices (including, but not limited to, recruiting, hiring, promoting, and training) in providing equal employment opportunity regardless of race, color, sex, national origin, religion, age (where the person affected is between 40 and 70), disabled and Vietnam-era veteran status, and handicapped otherwise qualified status. Such affirmative action program shall include: .1 A written policy statement committing the total

organization to affirmative action and assigning management responsibilities and procedures for evaluation and dissemination.

.2 The identification of a person designated to handle affirmative action.

.3 The establishment of non-discriminatory selection standards, objective measures to analyze recruitment, an upward mobility system, a wage and salary structure, and standards applicable to lay-off, recall, discharge, demotion, and discipline.

.4 The exclusion of discrimination from collective bargaining agreements.

.5 Performance of an internal audit of the reporting system to monitor execution and to provide for future planning.

13.5.6 In the enforcement of this non-discrimination requirement, the Owner may use any reasonable procedures available, including but not limited to: requests, reports, site visits, and inspection of relevant documents of Contractors and Subcontractors of any tier. The contractor shall submit a final Affidavit of Supplier Diversity Participation for each diverse firm at the end of the project stating the actual amount paid to the diverse firm. 13.6 Wage Rates 13.6.1 The Contractor shall pay workers employed in the execution of this contract in full each week and not less than

GC/35 09/16

the predetermined wage rates and overtime for work of a similar character that have been made a part of this Contract. These rates are determined by the University of Missouri Director of Facilities Planning and Development. The rates are based on wage rates published in the Annual Wage Orders of the Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations (MDLIR). The Contractor is to use MDLIR 8 CSR 30-3.020; .030; .040, .060 in determining the appropriate occupational titles and rates for workers used in the execution of this contract. All determinations and/or interpretations regarding wage rates and classification of workers will be made by the office of the University of Missouri Director of Facilities Planning and Development. The Contractor is responsible for the payment of the aggregate of the Basic Hourly Rate and the Total Fringe Benefits to the workers on the project. Fringe benefit payments may be made to the worker in cash, or irrevocably made by a Contractor or Subcontractor to a trustee or to a third person pursuant to a fund, plan or program, or pursuant to an enforceable commitment, or any combination thereof, to carry out a financially responsible plan or program which was communicated in writing to the workmen affected, for medical or hospital care, pensions on retirement or death, compensation for injuries or illness resulting from occupational activity, or insurance to provide any of the foregoing, for unemployment benefits, life insurance, disability and sickness insurance, accident insurance, for vacation and holiday pay, for defraying costs of apprenticeship or other similar programs, or for other bona fide fringe benefits, but only where the Contractor or Subcontractor is not required by other federal or state law to provide any of the benefits as referenced in §290.210(5) RSMo 1994. Pay for travel, mileage, meals, bonuses, or other expenses are not fringe benefits and cannot be considered part of the workers wage rate. The Contractor shall not make any deductions for food, sleeping accommodations, transportation, use of small tools, uniforms, or anything of any kind or description, unless the Contractor and employee enter into an agreement in writing at the beginning of the worker’s term of employment, and such agreement is approved by the Owner. In the event the contract contains more than one wage determination the Contractor shall comply with both. 13.6.2 The Contractor shall submit to the Owner with the Contractor’s periodic pay request, certified payroll records for labor performed by the Contractor and Subcontractors of any tier. The Contractor shall submit all required certified payroll information records electronically in pdf format using the Owner’s web-based payment program. The certified payroll forms shall contain the name, address, personal identification number, and occupational title of the workers as well as the hours they work each day. The Owner’s acceptance of certified payroll records does not in any way relieve the Contractor

of any responsibility for the payment of prevailing wages to workers on the project. The Contractor shall also maintain copies of the certified payroll records. The Owner may, at any time, request copies of, and/or inspect all of the Contractor's payroll records for the Work to verify compliance. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner copies of payroll records within 10 days of the Owner’s written request. The Contractor shall provide copies of workers I-9 forms within 24 hours of written notice. (If applicable, and required by Owner, the Contractor will demonstrate that the Contractor is enrolled and participating in a federal work authorization program with respect to the employees working in connection with this project.) Such payroll records shall be maintained in accordance with Article 13.7.1 and shall be available for inspection for two (2) years after final completion of the Work. The contractor further agrees, in the event the records are not presented as requested, he will abide by any decision made by the Owner regarding underpayment of wages to workers and amounts owed them as well as liquidated damages for underpayment of wages. Falsification of the certified payroll records may result in the debarment of the contractor or subcontractor from future work with the University. 13.6.3 The acquisition of products or services is subject to the supplier's conformance to the rules and regulations of the President's Committee on Equal Employment Opportunity (41 CFR, Ch. 60). 13.6.4 The Contractor shall comply with the Copeland Regulations of the Secretary of Labor (29 CFR, Part 3), which are incorporated herein by reference. In addition, the Weekly Statement of Compliance required by these Regulations shall also contain a statement that the applicable fringe benefits paid are equal to or greater than those set forth in the minimum wage decision. The Contractor may pay workers a rate of pay less than required by the wage rates made a part of the Contract, provided the worker is a bona fide Apprentice or Trainee and also meets the other criteria as set forth in MDLIR 8 CSR 30-3.030. 13.6.5 Contractor acknowledges that violation of the requirements of Article 13.6 result in additional costs to Owner, including, but not limited to, cost of construction delays, of additional work for Owner’s staff and legal expense. The cost of Contractor’s violation of the provisions of Article 13.6 would be and is difficult to determine and establish. In the event that Contractor fails to comply with the provisions of this Article 13.6, Owner shall be entitled to retain or recover from the Contractor, as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, the sum of Fifty Dollars ($50.00) per day per individual who is paid less than the applicable prevailing wage, to approximate the investigative cost resulting to the Owner for such violations. To approximate the delay costs, Owner shall be entitled to retain or recover

GC/36 09/16

from the Contractor, as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, the sum of One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) per day for each day the Contract cannot be closed out and final payment made because of Contractor’s failure to comply with the provisions of this Article 13.6. Such liquidated damages shall be collected regardless of whether the Work has been completed. The liquidated damages and other amounts set forth in this Article 13.6 shall be in addition to all other liquidated damages the Owner may be entitled as set forth in the Contract Documents. 13.6.6 The Owner may deduct liquidated damages described Article 13 and the amounts set forth in Article 13 from any unpaid amounts then or thereafter due the Contractor under the Contract. Any liquidated damages not so deducted from any unpaid amounts due the Contractor shall be payable to the Owner at the demand of the Owner. 13.6.7 The Contractor shall specifically incorporate the obligations of Article 13 into the subcontracts, supply agreements and purchase orders for the Work and require the same of any Subcontractors of any tier. 13.6.8 Contractor acknowledges and recognizes that a material factor in its selection by the Owner is the Contractor’s willingness to undertake and comply with the requirements of this Article 13.6. If Contractor fails to comply with the provisions of this Article 13.6, Owner may, in its sole discretion, immediately terminate the Contract upon written notice. The rights and remedies of Owner provided herein shall not be exclusive and are in addition to other rights and remedies provided by law or under this Contract. 13.6.9 The Contractor may pay workers a reduced rate of pay, provided the worker is a bona fide Apprentice or Trainee and also meets the other criteria as set forth in MDLIR 8 CSR 30-3.030. 13.6.10 The Contractor shall post the wage rates for the contract in a conspicuous place at the field office on the project. On projects where there is no field office the Contractor may post the wage rates at their local office, as long as they provide a copy of the wage rates to a worker upon request. The wage rates shall be kept in a clearly legible condition for the duration of the project. 13.6.11 Neither the Contractor, nor any Subcontractor of any tier, nor any person hired by them or acting on their behalf, shall request or demand that workers pay back, return, donate, contribute or give any part, or all, of said workers wages, salary, or any thing of value, upon the statement, representation or understanding that failure to comply with such request or demand will prevent such worker from procuring or retaining employment. The

exception being to an agent or representative of a duly constituted labor organization acting in the collection of dues or assessments of such organization. 13.6.12 No contractor or subcontractor may directly or indirectly receive a wage subsidy, bid supplement, or rebate for employment on this project if such wage subsidy, bid supplement, or rebate has the effect of reducing the wage rate paid by the employer on a given occupational title below the prevailing wage rate as provided in contract. In the event a wage subsidy, bid supplement, or rebate is provided or received, the entity receiving such subsidy, supplement, or rebate shall report the date and amount of such subsidy, supplement, or rebate to the University within thirty days of receipt of payment. This disclosure report shall be a matter of public record. Any employer not in compliance with this Article shall owe to the University double the dollar amount per hour that the wage subsidy, bid supplement, or rebate has reduced the wage rate paid by the employer below the prevailing wage rate for each hour that work was performed. 13.7 Records 13.7.1 The Owner, or any parties it deems necessary, shall have access to and the right to examine any accounting or other records of the Contractor involving transactions and Work related to this Contract for five (5) years after final payment or five (5) years after the final resolution of any on going disputes at the time of final payment. All records shall be maintained in accordance with generally accepted accounting procedures, consistently applied. Subcontractors of any tier shall be required by Contractor to maintain records and to permit audits as required of Contractor herein. 13.8 Codes and Standards 13.8.1 The Work shall be performed to comply with the International Code Council (ICC) Codes, and the codes and standards noted below. The latest editions and supplements of these Codes and Standards in effect on the date of the execution of the Contract for Construction shall be applicable unless otherwise designated in the Contract Documents. Codes and standards required by accreditation agencies will also be used unless the ICC requirements are more stringent. In the event that special design features and/or construction systems are not covered in the ICC codes, the applicable edition of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) family of standards and/or the NFPA 101 Life Safety Code shall be used. .1 ICC International Building Code and reference

standards .2 ICC International Plumbing Code .3 ICC International Mechanical Code .4 NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC) .5 Americans with Disabilities Act – Standards for

Accessible Design. .6 American National Standard Safety Code for

Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks as published by the American Society of

GC/37 09/16

Mechanical Engineers (ASME), American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A17.1

.7 NFPA 101 Life Safety Code (as noted above)

.8 American Concrete Institute (ACI)

.9 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

.10 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

.11 American Refrigeration Institute (ARI)

.12 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

.13 Missouri Standard Specification for Highway Construction, Missouri State Highway Commission

.14 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

.15 Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Federal Specifications

.16 Williams Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA)

13.9 General Provisions 13.9.1 Any specific requirement in this Contract that the responsibilities or obligations of the Contractor also apply to a Subcontractor is added for emphasis and are also hereby deemed to include a Subcontractor of any tier. The omission of a reference to a Subcontractor in connection with any of the Contractor's responsibilities or obligations shall not be construed to diminish, abrogate or limit any responsibilities or obligations of a Subcontractor of any tier under the Contract Documents or the applicable subcontract. 13.9.2 This Contract shall be interpreted, construed, enforced and regulated under and by the laws of the State of Missouri. Whenever possible, each provision of this Contract shall be interpreted in a manner as to be effective and valid under applicable law. If, however, any provision of this Contract, or a portion thereof, is prohibited by law or found invalid under any law, only such provision or portion thereof shall be ineffective, without invalidating or affecting the remaining provisions of this Contract or valid portions of such provision, which are hereby deemed severable. Contractor and Owner further agree that in the event any provision of this Contract, or a portion thereof, is prohibited by law or found invalid under any law, this Contract shall be reformed to replace such prohibited or invalid provision or portion thereof with a valid and enforceable provision which comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the prohibited or invalid provision. 13.9.3 Contractor and Owner each agree that the State of Missouri Circuit Court for the County where the Project is located shall have exclusive jurisdiction to resolve all Claims and any issue and disputes between Contractor and Owner. Contractor agrees that it shall not file any petition, complaint, lawsuit or legal proceeding against Owner in any

other court other than the State of Missouri Circuit Court for the County where the Project is located. 13.9.4 Owner’s total liability to Contractor and anyone claiming by, through, or under Contractor for any Claim, cost, loss, expense or damage caused in part by the fault of Owner and in part by the fault of Contractor or any other entity or individual shall not exceed the percentage share that Owner’s fault bears to the total fault of Owner, Contractor and all other entities and individuals as determined on the basis of comparative fault principles. 13.9.5 Contractor agrees that Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any special, indirect, incidental, or consequential damage whatsoever, whether caused by Owner’s negligence, fault, errors or omissions, strict liability, breach of contract, breach of warranty or other cause or causes whatsoever. Such special, indirect, incidental or consequential damages include, but are not limited to loss of profits, loss of savings or revenue, loss of anticipated profits, labor inefficiencies, idle equipment, home office overhead, and similar types of damages. 13.9.6 Nothing contained in this Contract or the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship with or cause of action in favor of a third party against the Owner. 13.9.7 No member or officer of the Board of Curators of the University incurs or assumes any individual or personal liability under the Contract or by reason of the default of the Owner in the performance of any terms thereof. Contractor releases and discharges all members or officers of the Board of Curators of the University from any liability as a condition of and as consideration for the award of the Contract to Contractor. 13.9.8 The Contractor hereby binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the Owner in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not assign the Contract or proceeds hereof without written consent of the Owner. If Contractor attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, it shall be void and confer no rights on third parties, and Contractor shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. The Owner’s consent to any assignment is conditioned upon Contractor entering into a written assignment which contains the following language: “it is agreed that the funds to be paid to the assignee under this assignment are subject to performance by the Contractor and to claims and to liens for services rendered or materials supplied for the performance of the Work required in said Contract in favor of all persons, firms, corporations rendering such services or supplying such materials.”

13.10 Debarment and Suspension Certification The contractor certifies to the best of its knowledge and belief that it and its principals are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily

GC/38 09/16

excluded from covered transactions by any Federal department or agency in accordance with Executive Order 12549 (2/18/86).

ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE

CONTRACT 14.1 Termination by Owner for Cause 14.1.1 In addition to other rights and remedies granted to Owner under the Contract Documents and by law, the Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: .1 refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled

workers, superintendents, foremen, or managers; .2 refuses or fails to supply sufficient or proper

materials; .3 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for

materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;

.4 disregards laws, ordinances, rules, or regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction;

.5 disregards the authority of the Owner’s Representative or Architect;

.6 breaches any warranty or representations made by the Contractor under or pursuant to the Contract Documents;

.7 fails to furnish the Owner with assurances satisfactory to the Owner evidencing the Contractor's ability to complete the Work in compliance with all the requirements of the Contract Documents;

.8 fails after commencement of the Work to proceed continuously with the construction and completion of the Work for more than ten (10) days, except as permitted under the Contract Documents;

.9 fails to maintain a satisfactory rate of progress with the Work or fails to comply with approved progress schedules; or

.10 violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents.

14.1.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner, terminate this Contract by delivering a written notice of termination to Contractor and Contractor’s surety, and may: .1 take possession of the site and of all materials,

equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;

.2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.3; and

.3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient, including turning the Work over to the surety.

14.1.3 The Contractor, in the event of a termination under Section 14.1, shall not be entitled to receive any further payments under the Contract until the Work is completed in its entirety. Then, if the unpaid balance under the Contract shall exceed all expenses of the Owner in finishing the Work, including additional compensation for the Architects services and expenses made necessary thereby, such excess will be paid to the Contractor; but, if such expenses of Owner to finish the Work shall exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor and its surety shall be liable for, and shall pay the difference and any damages to the Owner. The obligation of the Contractor and its surety for payment of said amounts shall survive termination of the Contract. 14.1.4 In exercising the Owner's right to secure completion of the Work under any of the provisions hereof, the Owner shall have the right to exercise the Owner's sole discretion as to the manner, methods, and reasonableness of costs of completing the Work. 14.1.5 The rights of the Owner to terminate pursuant to Article 14.1 will be cumulative and not exclusive and shall be in addition to any other remedy provided by law or the Contract Documents. 14.1.6 Should the Contractor fail to achieve Final Completion of the Work within thirty (30) calendar days following the date of Substantial Completion, the Owner may exercise its rights under Article 14.1. 14.2 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.2.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay, or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. 14.2.2 An adjustment will be made to the Contract Sum for increases in the cost of performance of the Contract caused by suspension, delay or interruption. However, in the event of a suspension under this Article 14.2, Contractor hereby waives and forfeits any claims for payment of any special, indirect, incidental or consequential damages such as lost profits, loss of savings or revenue, loss of anticipated profits, idle labor or equipment, home office overhead, and similar type damages. No adjustment will be made to the extent: .1 that performance is, was, or would have been so

suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor in whole or in part is responsible, or

.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of this Contract.

14.3 Owner’s Termination for Convenience 14.3.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract in whole or in part for the Owner's convenience and without cause. Termination by the Owner under this Paragraph shall be

GC/39 09/16

by a notice of termination delivered to the Contractor specifying the extent of termination and the effective date. 14.3.2 Upon receipt of a notice of termination for convenience, the Contractor shall immediately, in accordance with instructions from the Owner, proceed with performance of the following duties regardless of delay in determining or adjusting amounts due under this Paragraph: .1 cease operation as specified in the notice; .2 place no further orders and enter into no further

subcontracts for materials, labor, services or facilities except as necessary to complete Work not terminated;

.3 terminate all subcontracts and orders to the extent they relate to the Work terminated;

.4 proceed to complete the performance of Work not terminated; and

.5 take actions that may be necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the terminated Work.

14.3.3 Upon such termination, the Contractor shall recover as its sole remedy payment for Work properly performed in connection with the terminated portion of the Work prior to the effective date of termination and for items properly and timely fabricated off the Project site, delivered and stored in accordance with the Owner's instructions and for all Owner approved claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors and suppliers. The Contractor hereby waives and forfeits all other claims for payment and damages, including, without limitation, anticipated profits, consequential damages and other economic losses. 14.3.4 The Owner shall be credited for (1) payments previously made to the Contractor for the terminated portion of the Work, (2) claims which the Owner has against the Contractor under the Contract and (3) the value of the materials, supplies, equipment or other items that are to be disposed of by the Contractor that are part of the Contract Sum. 14.3.5 Upon determination by a court that termination of Contractor or its successor in interest pursuant to Paragraph 14.1 was wrongful, such termination will be deemed converted to a termination for convenience pursuant to Paragraph 14.3, and Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for wrongful termination is limited to recovery of the payments permitted for termination for convenience as set forth in Paragraph 14.3.

MU Project #CP160181 SC - 1

SECTION 1.E

SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. DEFINITIONS

a. "Drawings"

Drawings referred to in and accompanying Project Manual consist of Drawings prepared by and bearing name of below defined Architect, bearing Date of June 26, 2017, entitled “Medical Science – Sprinkler System”, project number CP160181.

b. Architect: Simon Oswald Associates, Inc. DBA SOA/Simon Oswald Architecture 2801 Woodard Drive, Suite 103 Columbia, MO 65202 (573) 443-1407

c. Mechanical & Electrical Engineer: Ross & Baruzzini, Inc.

6 South Old Orchard Avenue St. Louis, MO 63119 (314) 918-8383

d. Other Definitions: See Article 1., General Conditions.

2. SPECIAL SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS

a. Health Sciences Library (Lottes) Rooms: HSL 142, HSL 144, HSL 146, HSL 100, HSL 104 and HSL 115: Without exception, no work shall be performed in these designated areas during the following School of Medicine Testing dates. Additionally, all work in these spaces shall be coordinated with the Owner’s Representative with advanced notice given to the School of Medicine. Refer to sheets A101.A, FP101.A and FP101.B.

September 18, 2017 – September 29, 2017 November 27, 2017 – December 8, 2017 February 19, 2018 – March 2, 2018 April 30, 2018 – May 11, 2018

b. Health Sciences Library (Lottes) Chilled Water Shutdown: The Contractor shall

perform the shutdown and relocation of the chilled water pump from HSL 142 to the existing mechanical room HSL 144 between November 2017 and February 2018.

c. Medical Science Addition Building Rooms: MA 105, MA105A – MA 105D, MA 111, MA 111A – MA 111G, MA 112, and MA112A: All work in these designated areas shall be coordinated with the Owner’s Representative with advanced notice of two week’s given to the School of Medicine. Refer to sheets A101.B and FP101.B.

d. Medical Science Building Instructional Lab M123: Without exception, the Contractor shall perform all work in Instructional Lab M123 (shown on sheets A101.C and FP101.C) only during the following permitted timeframes:

November 18, 2017 – November 26, 2017 December 18, 2017 – January 14, 2018

Additionally, there shall be no work noise affecting Lab M123 from 7:00 am to 5:00 pm during the week of December 11 – December 15, 2017.


e. Medical Science Building Rooms: M153A, M153, MV149, M154, A106, A107, M150, M148A and M148: All work in these designated areas shall be coordinated with the Owner’s Representative with advanced notice of two week’s given to the School of Medicine. Refer to sheets A101.D and FP101.D.

f. The Contractor shall coordinate this project with contractor for Medical Science Building First Floor Lab Renovation (CP171091) under separate contract with an anticipated contract award of December 2017.

3. SCOPE OF WORK

a. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment necessary for, and incidental to, construction of this project as indicated on Drawings and specified herein.

b. Work shall include everything requisite and necessary to finish work properly,

notwithstanding that every item of labor or materials or accessories required to make project complete may not be specifically mentioned.

c. General Description of Work:

(1) Project consists of the modifications of an existing mechanical room to create a

dedicated fire suppression system pump room with new pump and integration of a standpipe system to serve all seven floors of the Medical Science Building in preparation for future projects that will add and/or modify sprinkler systems throughout the building. Additionally, the project will include the routing of new fire main piping through the First Floors of Lottes Library and the Medical Science Building to connect to the new standpipe system in the existing stairs. The exterior scope of work shall be limited to the installation of the new fire department connection, the electrical transformer connection to the new transformer associated with the under construction Patient-Centered Care Learning Center (PCCLC) and the required staging and dumpster area.

(2) Selective Demolition shall consist of minor building modifications to accommodate

the addition of the new stand pipe, including but not limited to core drilling through concrete floors, concrete walls and concrete (block) walls, partial removal and replacement of acoustical, gypsum board and lathe and plaster ceilings. Additional selective demolition shall consist of removal of the door and frame, housekeeping pad, controls, fire pump test heard and section of wall associated with the fire pump modifications in Lottes Library.

(3) Architectural work shall consist of replacement, patching and repairs of floors,

flooring and ceilings as a result of the selective demolition described above. Additionally, the architectural work will include installation of new door and frame, concrete housekeeping pad and existing wall modifications for the fire pump room in Lottes Library.

(4) The Mechanical scope of work includes the removal and relocation of an existing chilled water pump and associated piping from its current location to a mechanical room to allow space for the new fire pump room. This will include modifying the existing chilled water service piping to allow connection to the relocated chilled water pump. In addition, the building automation controls and metering equipment will be relocated from the existing chilled water pump location to the mechanical room where the chilled water pump is being relocated to.

(5) The Fire Protection scope of work includes the removal of an existing fire pump, installation of a new fire pump, installation of a new fire department connection and installation of fire protection standpipes in stairwells. The existing fire pump, located in Lottes Library will be removed from an existing mechanical room and a new fire pump will be provided in a new fire pump room located in Lottes Library


which will serve both the Library and Med Science Buildings. Modifications to the existing fire protection piping will be required and new fire protection piping will be also be required. Fire protection standpipe risers will be provided in each stairwell in the Med Science Building and will be connected to the new fire pump.

(6) The Electrical scope of work includes a new service entrance for the fire pump and extending the existing fire alarm system and providing new fire alarm devices to accommodate the installation of the fire protection system. In addition, a variable frequency drive and disconnect switch serving an existing chilled water pump will be relocated to accommodate the relocation of the existing chilled water pump. Modifications to the electrical feeders serving the chilled water pump will be required for the relocation of the chilled water pump.

4. LOCATION

a. Work shall be performed under this Contract on campus of the University of Missouri - Columbia at the Medical Science Building across from the Kentucky Blvd. and Deans Drive intersection. The Medical Science Building connects on the south end to University Hospital.

5. NUMBER OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

a. The Owner's Representative will furnish the Contractor a copy of executed Contract and electronic sets of Drawings and Specifications.

b. Additional sets may be obtained at cost of reproduction.

c. The Owner will furnish electronic sets of explanatory and changed Drawings at no cost to Contractor as issued during project.

6. SUBMITTALS

a. The Contractor shall submit for approval to the Architect, equipment lists and Shop Drawings, as expediently as possible. Failure of the Contractor to submit Shop Drawings in a timely manner will result in the Owner holding back Contractor payments. (See General Conditions)

b. The material and equipment lists shall be submitted and approved before any material or equipment is purchased and shall be corrected to as-built conditions before the completion of the project.

c. The Contractor shall submit electronic versions of all required Shop Drawings, material

and equipment lists. The Contractor shall upload all Shop Drawings to a secure information sharing website determined by the Owner notifying the Owner and Consultant that these shop drawings are available for review. Refer to: http://www.cf.missouri.edu/cf/pdc/contractor_information for protocols for the use of this website. Each submittal shall have the General Contractors digital stamp affixed to the first page signifying their review and acceptance. Review comments, approvals, and rejections will be posted on this same site with notification to the contractor. Submittals requiring a professional seal shall be submitted hard copy with a manual seal affixed.

(1) The Contractor shall identify each submittal item with the following:

(a) Project Title and Location (b) Project Number (c) Supplier’s Name (d) Manufacturer’s Name (e) Contract Specification Section and Article Number (f) Contract Drawing Number


(g) Acrobat file name: Spec Section_Times Submitted-Spec Title: 033000 _01-Cast In Place Concrete.pdf

(2) Reference the accompanying Shop Drawing and Submittal Log at the end of this section (1.E.3) for required submittal information.

d. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect four (4) bound copies of all required Operating Instructions and Service Manuals for the Architect’s and the Owner’s sole use prior to completing 50% of the adjusted contract. Payments beyond 50% of the contract amount may be withheld until all Operating Instructions and Service Manuals are received as referenced in the accompanying Operating Instructions and Service Manual Log at the end of this section (1.E.4).

e. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner’s Representative all items referenced in the

accompanying Closeout Log (1.E.5) within 30 days following substantial completion of the work. The Owner’s Representative will maintain the closeout log and include as an agenda item at all coordination meetings.

7. NOTIFICATION

a. Before beginning Demolition Work or service outages, the Contractor shall provide, at minimum, seventy-two (72) hours advance notice to Owner’s Representative for purpose of verifying utility locations including, but not limited to, gas, telecommunications, electric, water, steam, sewer, and nitrogen. Contractor shall minimize the number of outages, minimize the length of outages and related work shall be continuous until the utility is restored.

8. USE OF PREMISES

a. Access: Access to construction site shall be as indicated on Drawings and as directed by the Owner's Representative.

b. Parking:

(1) The Contractor will be allowed to park service vehicles in the designated North

Construction Staging Area without a permit. This will be for company service vehicles only, no personal vehicles. Contractor shall manage the staging area in a manner to keep all vehicles, equipment and materials within fencing limits of the staging area, and keep it neat and orderly. Since access to the North Construction Staging Area is via a wide campus pedestrian walkway that also serves as an emergency and service related drive, Contractor shall use extreme caution on the walkway at all times and yield to all pedestrians. If necessary, Contractor shall employ and utilize a flag-person to ensure the safety of pedestrians when maneuvering vehicles, equipment or materials in and out of the staging area.

(2) Parking of personal vehicles within project access/lay down/staging areas is prohibited. Violation of this requirement may result in ticketing and/or towing at the vehicle owner’s expense and suspension of progress payments.

(3) Parking or driving on sidewalks, landscaped areas, within fire and service lanes or generally in areas not designated for vehicular traffic is prohibited except as allowed in the contract documents, and item (1) above. Violation of this requirement may result in ticketing and/or towing at the vehicle owner’s expense and suspension of progress payments.

(4) Free parking for contractor employees is available in the Ashland Road Contractor lot on an as available basis. This space is for use by contractor employees for parking their personal vehicles only and is not to be used for staging or storage.


(5) Vendor Permits may be purchased by contractor management personnel on an as available basis by contacting the Parking and Transportation office in the Turner Avenue Parking Structure. These permits will allow contractor management personnel to park in various University lots while conducting business on University construction projects.

(6) Temporary University parking permits may be purchased by contractor employees for use with their personal vehicles on an as available basis by contacting the Parking and Transportation office in the Turner Avenue Parking Structure.

(7) Conley Avenue between Missouri Avenue and University Avenue and Hitt Street between University Avenue and the Memorial Union are designated for pedestrian use only during the work week between the hours of 8:15 AM and 3:45 PM. Unless otherwise indicated in the contract documents, this area is strictly off limits to vehicular traffic without authorization from the Owner’s Representative.

c. Storage of materials: The Contractor shall store all materials within project limits. The

Contractor shall confine apparatus, materials, and operation of workers to location established by the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall not unreasonably encumber premises with materials. In addition, storage trailer locations may be available within 1-1/2 miles of project site as directed by the Owner’s Representative. Storage trailer locations shall be subject to approval by the Owner's Representative and are available to the Contractor without cost.

d. Utilities: Drinking water, water required to carry on work, and 120 volt electrical power

required for small tool operation may be obtained without cost to the Contractor from existing utilities at locations designated by the Owner's Representative. Provisions for obtaining power, including temporary extensions, shall be furnished and maintained by the Contractor. Upon completion of work such extensions shall be removed and any damage caused by use of such extensions shall be repaired to satisfaction of the Owner's Representative, at no cost to the Owner.

e. Restroom: Existing toilet facilities within Project Limits or Restrooms designated by the

Owner's Representative for use by the Contractor will be available. Failure of the Contractor to maintain restrooms in a clean condition will be cause for the Contractor's discontinued use of the restroom.

f. Smoking is prohibited at the University of Missouri and all properties owned, operated,

leased or controlled by the University of Missouri. Violation of the policy is defined as smoking any tobacco products, including e-cigarettes.

g. Landfill: The Contractor shall not use the Owner’s landfill. Dumping or disposal of excavated or demolition materials on Owner’s property shall not be permitted. The Contractor shall remove and legally dispose of excavated or demolished materials off the Owner’s property.

h. Care of Project Work Site: The contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the

construction site in a reasonably neat and orderly condition by regular cleaning and mowing of the premises as determined by the Owner’s Representative.

i. Discharge to Sewer Request: The University of Missouri’s MS4 permit and NPDES Storm Water Discharge Permits along with the City of Columbia’s POTW Operating Permit as well as local ordinances, and state and federal environmental regulations prohibit hazardous materials from being disposed into either the storm water or sanitary sewer systems. Unless specifically approved, all chemical products such as paints, dyes, lawn care products, maintenance products, and oil are prohibited from drain disposal. Any product, including contaminated water, being discarded into the storm water or sanitary sewer systems requires written approval from the Owner through a formal “Discharge to Sewer Request” form obtained at Discharge to Sewer Request Form. The contractor


should submit the form to the Owner’s Representative, not to the Department of Environmental Health and Safety as the form indicates.

j. All concrete waste material including washout water shall be totally contained and removed from the Owner’s property.

k. Artifacts Found During Construction: Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner’s

Representative when artifacts are uncovered or found during the demolition or construction process. Artifacts include, but are not limited to, tools, drawings (construction or other), photographs, books and other objects/devices which may hold historical importance/significance. Do not remove or disturb the object(s) in question. Artifacts are not considered part of demolished materials and shall remain the property of the University of Missouri.

9. PROTECTION OF OWNER'S PROPERTY

a. The Contractor shall be responsible for repair of damage to building exterior and interior, drives, curbs, streets, walks, grass, shrubbery and trees, which was caused by workmen or equipment employed during progress of work. All such repairs shall be made to satisfaction of the Owner's Representative, at no cost to the Owner, or reimburse the Owner if the Owner elects to make repairs. For landscape damage, the Owner shall make such repairs. Compensation for these repairs shall be determined by the Owner's Representative using the "Valuation of Landscape Trees, Shrubs, and other Plants" as published by the International Society of Arboriculture, as last revised.

b. Construction Project Fencing:

(1) Fencing requirements, as indicated on Drawings, shall be constructed of 9 or 11-

gauge chain link not less than six (6) feet in height and not more than 2-inch mesh with posts spaced not more than ten (10) feet apart and all corner and gate posts imbedded in concrete. All other posts shall be sufficiently secured in ground to maintain proper and adequate support of fence. Fenced in area shall have at least two (2) access gates and all gates shall be lockable.

(2) Using existing landmarks, lamp posts, trees or other Owner property for support of fencing is strictly prohibited unless a written waiver is obtained from Owner's Representative.

(3) Use of ribbon, snow fence, chicken wire, rope, and wooden barricades as fencing

is prohibited.

(4) Fencing shall be maintained in an "as-installed" condition throughout the life of the project.

(5) The Contractor may use used fencing provided it is in good condition and is

satisfactory to the Owner's Representative.

c. Preserving and Protecting Existing Vegetation:

(1) Protection and compensation for damages:

(a) Trees and shrubs within work area designated to remain shall be protected from damage during construction by fixed chain link fencing or armoring as indicated on Drawings or specified herein. Plant protection devices shall be installed before work has begun and shall be maintained for duration of work unless otherwise directed by Owner's Representative.

(b) In the event that damage(s) to the Owner's trees, shrubs or vegetation

occurs as a result of the Contractor's unauthorized operations, the


Contractor shall pay or allow to the Owner compensation for said damage(s). Compensation shall be determined by the Owner's Representative using the "Valuation of Landscape Trees, Shrubs, and other Plants" as published by the International Society of Arboriculture, as last revised.

(2) Plants within work area designated for removal shall be removed by Contractor. (3) To prevent compaction of soil over tree roots, vehicles or equipment shall not at

any time park or travel over, nor shall any materials be stored within drip line of trees designated to remain.

(4) Owner's Representative will stop work immediately when proper measures are not

being employed to protect trees and shrubs. Contractor will be notified to resume work after required protection measures are implemented.

(5) Pruning of limbs necessary to repair damage or provide clearance for work shall

be done by the MU Landscape Services Department. 10. SUBSTITUTIONS and EQUALS

a. Substitutions are defined in General Conditions article 3.11.8 for and Equals are defined General Conditions Article 3.12.

b. Use of materials, products or equipment other than those named and described in the

Contract Documents are substitutions and/or equal. Substitutions and/or equals submitted during the bidding period shall be received by both the Architect and the Owner at least ten calendar days prior to the date for receipt of bids. To be considered, bidder’s proposal shall include a complete description of the proposed substitution and/or equal and a comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution and/or equal with those specified including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. The Architect's decision on the approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution and/or equal shall be final.

c. If the Architect and Owner approve a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such

approval will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approval made in any other manner.

11. CODES AND STANDARDS

The Contractor shall comply with applicable codes and standards as listed in General Conditions. The following codes and standards shall also apply:

a. City of Columbia - Sewer Line Installation Standards - Department of Public Works

“All sanitary sewer construction shall be in accordance with the City of Columbia Specifications and Standards and in conformance with the rules and regulations of the Missouri Clean Water Commission.”

12. PERMITS (not applicable)

13. SPECIALTIES (not applicable)

14. PRE-BID INSPECTION

All pre-bid inspections of work areas shall be scheduled with pre-bid inspection guide, as directed by the Project Manager, at (573) 882-2228.


15. ROOF WARRANTY REQUIREMENT (not applicable) 16. MODIFICATIONS TO INFORMATION TO BIDDERS

a. Information to Bidders:

(1) Referenced Information to Bidders, Page IFB/6. Add new Article 15.9.2 as follows:

15.9.2.1 Within 48 hours of the receipt of bids, the apparent low bidder shall submit to the Director of Facilities Planning and Development an “Affidavit of Supplier Diversity Participation” for every diverse subcontractor or supplier the bidder intends to award work to on the contract. The affidavit will be signed by both the bidder and the diverse firm.

17. MODIFICATIONS TO INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS: BIDDERS STATEMENT OF

QUALIFICATIONS (not applicable) 18. MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS (not applicable) 19. PROJECT SCHEDULING

The project scheduling specification for the project are included immediately after the Special Conditions. For this project the Contractor shall meet the following scheduling requirements. a. Option #1 - Contractor Schedule: Contractor is responsible for the schedule and must

comply with the Owner’s requirements. See Contractor Schedule Specification included in these documents.

20. PROJECT COORDINATION

a. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

(1) Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best

results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

(2) Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility

for required maintenance, service, and repair. (3) Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

b. Coordination Drawings for Lottes Library Fire Pump Room HSL142: Within 60 days of

Notice to Proceed provide coordination drawings for the integration of the Work, including work first shown in detail on shop drawings or product data. Show sequencing and relationship of separate units of work which must interface in a restricted manner to fit in the space provided, or function as indicated.

(1) Show the interrelationship of components shown on separate shop drawings. (2) Indicate required installation sequences. (3) Call attention in advance to Architect of any dimensional or detail information

needed to complete the coordination drawings.


21. PROJECT PARTNERING (not applicable) 22. VALUE ENGINEERING (not applicable) 23. BUILDING SYSTEM COMMISSIONING

a. The Contractor shall provide all personnel and equipment required to complete the commissioning activities referenced in the Commissioning Plan. The requirements of the commissioning plan shall be completed in their entirety before substantial completion and submitted as referenced in the Closeout Log.

b. The contractor shall designate a competent person, separate from the superintendent or

Project Manager, to act as the contractor’s commissioning coordinator. The commissioning coordinator is responsible for planning, scheduling, coordinating, conducting and verifying all commissioning activities required by the commissioning plan and ensuring all building systems are complete, operable and ready for use by the Owner. At a minimum, building ventilation systems, chilled/hot water generation systems, hydronic distribution systems, power distributions systems and fire detection and alarm systems, as applicable. The Contractor shall refer to the requirements in the Commissioning Plan.

24. MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION (MEPFP) PRE-INSTALLATION

MEETING(S)

a. Before the start of MEP installation, the Owner’s Representative will convene an MEPFP pre-installation meeting. Meeting participants to include contractor (including MEPFP subcontractors), Owner’s Representative and additional contractor and University operational staff invited by the Owner’s Representative. Topics will include underground rough-ins, steam piping, chilled water piping, sprinkler piping, hot water piping, electrical system, duct, telephone/data wiring, control wiring. Additional meetings will be conducted as required for the review of coordination drawings and scope specific installations. Cross section drawings of corridor ceilings and other congested areas will be of highest priority and will be reviewed prior to the start of installations in the affected areas. Meeting minutes and sign-up sheet will be transcribed by contractor and distributed to attendees.

25. COST BREAKOUT FOR OWNER’S ACCOUNTING PURPOSES (not applicable) 26. PROJECT MANAGEMENT/COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS

a. The Contractor shall be represented at the site by both a competent full-time Project Manager and a full-time, competent superintendent with no other assigned duties or responsibilities from the beginning of the work until its final acceptance, unless otherwise permitted by the Owner’s Representative. The superintendent for the Contractor for the general building work shall exercise general supervision over all subcontractors of any tier engaged on the work with decision-making authority of the Contractor.

b. The Contractor shall use a current industry standard (Primavera, Microsoft Project, etc.)

project scheduling software which provides as a minimum: Critical paths, milestones, estimated and actual start and completion dates, scheduled vs. actual progress, and detailed task and subtask breakdown. The following schedules shall be provided as a minimum and kept current: Overall project schedule, four- (4-) week look-ahead, and two- (2-) week look-ahead.

c. The Contractor shall furnish on-site Internet access for use by his Project Manager and

superintendent. The University is providing an on-line, secure project communications web site which will be used as a major method of communicating and storing project information. This web site will be used to communicate directed and group email, RFIs, change order requests and authorizations, and general correspondence. It will serve as a project message board, file storage and retrieval system, and will provide access to and storage of digital photos and contract documents and revisions.


d. The Contractor shall provide at least two (2) job site FM handheld communication radios

(walkie-talkies) for use by the on-site superintendent and the Owner’s Representative or the Contractor shall provide his on-site superintendent with a handheld cellular telephone.

27. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS

a. The Bidder’s Statement of Qualifications includes a requirement that the Bidder provide its Worker’s Compensation Experience Modification Rates (EMR) and Incidence Rates for the three recent years. The Bidder shall also include the EMR and Incidence Rates of listed major subcontractors on the Bid for Lump Sum Contract. If the EMR exceeds 1 or the Incidence Rate exceeds 13, the Contractor or major subcontractor shall take additional safety measures including, but not limited to, developing a site specific safety plan and assigning a Safety Manager to the Project to perform inspections on a schedule as determined acceptable by the Owner with written reports to be submitted to the Owner. The Owner reserves the right to reject a Bidder or major subcontractor whose rates exceed these stated rates.

b. The contractor shall provide Emergency Contact Information for the Contractor’s on-site

staff and home office management as well as contact information for all major subcontractor personnel. This information shall contain business and personal phone numbers for each individual for contact during or after hours in case of an emergency. This information shall be submitted within 15 days of the Notice to Proceed.

28. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

a. The goal of Construction Waste Management is to divert fifty-percent (50%) of the project’s construction waste from the sanitary landfill. This shall be accomplished through reuse, recycling and/or salvage of fifty-percent (50%) of the non-hazardous construction and demolition debris. Track and report all efforts related to reuse, recycling and/or salvage of materials from the project (including clean fill material). Report all material types and weights, where material was diverted, type of diversion, documentation (eg: waste tickets) of this diversion, and applicable dates. In order to calculate the diversion percentage, total weights of all landfill material (non-hazardous) must be reported.

b. This information shall be updated monthly utilizing the Owner’s information sharing website (Projex - Waste Management Log). Copies of all applicable receipts, tickets and tracking logs shall be uploaded to the website or reported as required by the project manager. This information shall be in tabular form utilizing the http://www.cf.missouri.edu/cf/pdc/contractor_information This information shall be updated monthly with final submission prior to substantial completion.

29. WARRANTY WALKTHROUGH

a. Contractor shall attend a walk-thru with the Owner at 11 months after acceptance to review and document any warranty items to be addressed as part of the 12-month warranty stated in article 3.1 of the General Conditions.

END OF SECTION

MU Project #CP160181 SS - 1

Option #1 – Contractor Schedule 1. GENERAL

a. Time is of the essence for this contract. The time frames spelled out in this contract are

essential to the success of this project. The University understands that effective schedule management, in accordance with the General Conditions and these Special Conditions is necessary to insure to that the critical milestone and end dates spelled out in the contract are achieved.

b. Related Documents

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions’ Article 3.17 shall apply to this Section.

c. Stakeholders A Stakeholder is anyone with a stake in the outcome of the Project, including the

University, the University Department utilizing the facility, the Design Professionals, the Contractor and subcontractors.

d. Weather

1) Contractor acknowledges that there will be days in which work cannot be completed due to the weather, and that a certain number of these lost days are to be expected under normal weather conditions in Missouri.

2) Rather than speculate as to what comprises “normal” weather at the location of the

project, Contractor agrees that it will assume a total of 44 lost days due to weather over the course of a calendar year, and include same in its as planned schedule. For projects of less than a calendar year, lost weather days should be prorated for the months of construction in accordance with the following schedule.

3) Anticipated weather days for allocation/proration only. For projects lasting 12 months

or longer, the 44 days per year plus whatever additional months are included will constitute normal weather. Jan – 5 days Feb – 5 days Mar – 4 days Apr – 4 days

May – 3 days Jun – 3 days Jul – 2 days Aug – 2 days

Sep – 3 days Oct – 4 days Nov – 4 days Dec – 5 days

2. SCHEDULING PROCESS

a. The intent of this section is to insure that a well-conceived plan, that addresses the milestone and

completion dates spelled out in these documents, is developed with input from all stakeholders in the project. Input is limited to all reasonable requests that are consistent with the requirements of the contract documents, and do not prejudice the Contractor’s ability to perform its work consistent with the contract documents. Further, the plan must be documented in an understandable format that allows for each stakeholder in the project to understand the plan for the construction and/or renovation contained in the Project.

b. Contractor Requirements 1) Schedule Development

Contractor shall prepare the Project Schedule using Primavera SureTrack or P3, Microsoft Project, Oracle P6, or other standard industry scheduling software, approved by the Owner’s Representative.


2) Schedule Development Within 2 weeks of the NTP, contractor shall prepare a schedule, preferably in CPM format, but in detailed bar chart format at a minimum, that reflects the contractor’s and each subcontractors plan for performing the contract work. Contractor shall review each major subcontractor’s schedule with the sub and obtain the subcontractor’s concurrence with the schedule, prior to submitting to the University.

3) Schedule Updates.

(a) Schedule Updates will be conducted once a month, at a minimum. Actual Start and Finish dates should be recorded regularly during the month. Percent Complete, or Remaining Duration shall be updated as of the data date, just prior to Contractor’s submittal of the update data.

(b) Contractor will copy the previous months schedule and will input update information into the new monthly update version.

(c) Contractor will meet with the Owner’s Representative to review the draft of the updated schedule. At this meeting, Owner’s Representative and Contractor will: (i) Review out of sequence progress, making adjustments as necessary, (ii) Add any fragnets necessary to describe changes or other impacts to the project

schedule and (iii) Review the resultant critical and near critical paths to determine any impact of the

occurrences encountered over the last month.

4) Schedule Narrative After finalization of the update, the Contractor will prepare a Narrative that describes progress for the month, impacts to the schedule and an assessment as to the Contractor’s entitlement to a time extension for occurrences beyond its control during the month and submit in accordance with this Section.

5) Progress Meetings (a) Review the updated schedule at each monthly progress meeting. Payments to the

Contractor may be suspended if the progress schedule is not adequately updated to reflect actual conditions.

(b) Submit progress schedules to subcontractors to permit coordinating their progress schedules to the general construction work. Include 4 week look ahead schedules to allow subs to focus on critical upcoming work.

3. CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM) a. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the critical path method

(CPM) of scheduling and reporting progress of the Work.

b. Refer to the General and Special Conditions and the Agreement for definitions and specific dates of Contract Time.

c. Critical Path Method (CPM): A method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships and network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of the Project.

d. Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall project duration.


e. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing the activities and activity relationships.

f. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling, the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

g. Critical activities are activities on the critical path.

h. Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given activity can be started.

i. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.

j. Float or Slack Time: The measure of leeway in activity performance. Accumulative float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of the Owner or Contractor, but is a project resource available to both parties as needed to meet contract milestones and the completion date.

k. Total float is herein defined as the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned project completion date.

l. Weather: Adverse weather that is normal for the area must be taken into account in the Contractor's Project Schedule. See 1.d.3, above.

m. Force Majeure Event: Any event that delays the project but is beyond the control and/or contractual responsibility of either party.

n. Schedule shall including the following, in addition to Contractor’s work.

1) Phasing: Provide notations on the schedule to show how the sequence of the Work is affected by the following: (a) Requirements for phased completion and milestone dates. (b) Work by separate contractors. (c) Work by the Owner. (d) Coordination with existing construction. (e) Limitations of continued occupancies. (f) Uninterruptible services. (g) Partial occupancy prior to Substantial Completion.

o. Area Separations: Use Activity Codes to identify each major area of construction for each major

portion of the Work. For the purposes of this Article, a "major area" is a story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element.

4. TIME EXTENSION REQUEST a. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Article 4.7 Claims for Additional

Time.

b. Changes or Other Impacts to the Contractor’s Work Plan The Owner will consider and evaluate requests for time extensions due to changes or other events beyond the control of the Contractor on a monthly basis only, with the submission of the Contractor’s updated schedule, in conjunction with the monthly application for payment. The Update must include:

1) An activity depicting the event(s) impacting the Contractors work plan shall be added to the CPM schedule, using the actual start date of the impact, along with actually required predecessors and successors.


2) After the addition of the impact activity(ies), the Contractor will identify subsequent activities on the critical path, with finish to start relationships that can be realistically adjusted to overlap using good, standard construction practice. (a) If the adjustments above result in the completion date being brought back within the

contract time period, no adjustment will be made in the contract time. (b) If the adjustments above still result in a completion date beyond the contract

completion date, the delay shall be deemed excusable and the contract completion date shall be extended by the number of days indicated by the analysis.

(c) Contractor agrees to continue to utilize its best efforts to make up the time caused by the delays. However the Contractor is not expected to expend costs not contemplated in its contract, in making those efforts.

c. Questions of compensability of any delays shall be held until the actual completion of the project. If the actual substantial completion date of the project based on excusable delays, excluding weather delays, exceeds the original contract completion date, AND there are no delays that are the responsibility of the contractor to consider, the delays days shall be considered compensable. The actual costs, if any, of the Contractor’s time sensitive jobsite supervision and general conditions costs, shall be quantified and a change order issued for these costs.

END SECTION

SH

OP

DR

AW

ING

AN

D S

UB

MIT

TA

L L

OG

AC

TIO

N

DA

TE

RE

C'D

SUBMITTAL #

DR

AW

ING

#

OR

SP

EC

.

SE

CT

ION

#

SP

EC

/ S

UB

MIT

TA

L D

ES

CR

IPT

ION

SU

BC

ON

TR

AC

TO

R

# REC'D.

TO

SOA Transmittal No.

Date

sent to

Consultant

# COPIES

Date

Rec'd

from

Consultant

APPROVED

APPROVED AS CORRECTED

REVISE & RESUBMIT

REJECTED

SUBMIT SPECIFIC ITEM

Date

Ret'd

to G

enera

l

Contr

acto

r

SOA Transmittal No.

CONTRACTOR

OWNER - SHAREPOINT

CONSULTANT

ARCHITECT

02

41

19

SE

LE

CT

IVE

ST

RU

CT

UR

E D

EM

OL

ITIO

N

Qu

alif

icat

ion

Dat

a

Pro

pose

d P

rote

ctio

n M

easu

res,

In

clu

din

g

Dra

win

gs:

Pro

tect

ing I

nd

ivid

ual

s an

d P

rop

erty

Pro

pose

d P

rote

ctio

n M

easu

res,

In

clu

din

g

Dra

win

gs:

En

vir

on

men

tal

Pro

tect

ion

Pro

pose

d P

rote

ctio

n M

easu

res,

In

clu

din

g

Dra

win

gs:

Du

st C

on

trol

Pro

pose

d P

rote

ctio

n M

easu

res,

In

clu

din

g

Dra

win

gs:

Nois

e C

on

trol

Sch

edu

le o

f S

elec

tive

Dem

oli

tion

Act

ivit

ies

Inven

tory

Pre

dem

oli

tion

Ph

oto

gra

ph

s or

Vid

eo

Sta

tem

ent

of

Ref

riger

ant

Rec

over

y

Lan

dfi

ll R

ecord

s

03

30

53

MIS

CE

LL

AN

EO

US

CA

ST

-IN

-PL

AC

E

CO

NC

RE

TE

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Des

ign

Mix

ture

s

07

84

13

PE

NE

TR

AT

ION

FIR

ES

TO

PP

ING

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Pro

du

ct S

ched

ule

Inst

alle

r C

erti

fica

tes

07

92

00

JO

INT

SE

AL

AN

TS

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Sam

ple

s fo

r In

itia

l S

elec

tion

Sam

ple

s fo

r V

erif

icat

ion

Pro

du

ct T

est

Rep

ort

s

Sam

ple

of

Sp

ecia

l W

arra

nti

es

08

11

13

HO

LL

OW

ME

TA

L D

OO

RS

AN

D F

RA

ME

S

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Sh

op

Dra

win

gs

Sch

edu

le

RE

FE

RR

ED

CO

PIE

S T

O

Medic

al S

cie

nce -

Sprinkle

r S

yste

m

Pro

ject C

P160181; S

OA

15089

SD

SL -

Page 1

of 5

SH

OP

DR

AW

ING

AN

D S

UB

MIT

TA

L L

OG

SH

OP

DR

AW

ING

AN

D S

UB

MIT

TA

L L

OG

AC

TIO

N

DA

TE

RE

C'D

SUBMITTAL #

DR

AW

ING

#

OR

SP

EC

.

SE

CT

ION

#

SP

EC

/ S

UB

MIT

TA

L D

ES

CR

IPT

ION

SU

BC

ON

TR

AC

TO

R

# REC'D.

TO

SOA Transmittal No.

Date

sent to

Consultant

# COPIES

Date

Rec'd

from

Consultant

APPROVED


REVISE & RESUBMIT

REJECTED


Date

Ret'd

to G

enera

l

Contr

acto

r

SOA Transmittal No.

CONTRACTOR

OWNER - SHAREPOINT

CONSULTANT

ARCHITECT

RE

FE

RR

ED

CO

PIE

S T

O

08

31

13

AC

CE

SS

DO

OR

S A

ND

FR

AM

ES

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Sh

op

Dra

win

gs

08

71

00

DO

OR

HA

RD

WA

RE

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Sh

op

Dra

win

gs

Door

Har

dw

are

Sch

edu

le

Pro

du

ct C

erti

fica

tes

09

22

16

NO

N-S

TR

UC

TU

RA

L M

ET

AL

FR

AM

ING

Pro

du

ct D

ata

09

23

00

GY

PS

UM

PL

AS

TE

RIN

G

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Sh

op

Dra

win

gs

09

26

13

GY

PS

UM

VE

NE

ER

PL

AS

TE

RIN

G

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Sh

op

Dra

win

gs

09

29

00

GY

PS

UM

BO

AR

D

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Pro

du

ct D

ata:

Sec

uri

ty F

aste

ner

s

Pro

du

ct D

ata:

Tools

09

51

13

AC

OU

ST

ICA

L P

AN

EL

CE

ILIN

GS

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Sam

ple

s fo

r V

erif

icat

ion

Mai

nte

nan

ce D

ata

Fu

rnis

h E

xtr

a M

ater

ials

: A

cou

stic

al C

eili

ng P

anel

s

09

91

23

INT

ER

IOR

PA

INT

ING

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Sam

ple

s fo

r V

erif

icat

ion

21

05

00

CO

MM

ON

WO

RK

RE

SU

LT

S

Pro

du

ct D

ata-

Mec

han

ical

Sle

eve

Sea

ls

Pro

du

ct D

ata-

Esc

utc

heo

ns

Medic

al S

cie

nce -

Sprinkle

r S

yste

m

Pro

ject C

P160181; S

OA

15089

SD

SL -

Page 2

of 5

SH

OP

DR

AW

ING

AN

D S

UB

MIT

TA

L L

OG

SH

OP

DR

AW

ING

AN

D S

UB

MIT

TA

L L

OG

AC

TIO

N

DA

TE

RE

C'D

SUBMITTAL #

DR

AW

ING

#

OR

SP

EC

.

SE

CT

ION

#

SP

EC

/ S

UB

MIT

TA

L D

ES

CR

IPT

ION

SU

BC

ON

TR

AC

TO

R

# REC'D.

TO

SOA Transmittal No.

Date

sent to

Consultant

# COPIES

Date

Rec'd

from

Consultant

APPROVED


REVISE & RESUBMIT

REJECTED


Date

Ret'd

to G

enera

l

Contr

acto

r

SOA Transmittal No.

CONTRACTOR

OWNER - SHAREPOINT

CONSULTANT

ARCHITECT

RE

FE

RR

ED

CO

PIE

S T

O

21

05

48

.13

VIB

RA

TIO

NA

L S

EIS

MIC

CO

NT

RO

L F

OR

FIR

E S

UP

PR

ES

SIO

N A

ND

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Del

egat

ed D

esig

n S

ub

mit

tal

Coord

inat

ion

Dra

win

gs

Qu

alif

icat

ion

Dat

a

21

05

53

IDE

NT

IFIC

AT

ION

FO

R F

IRE

-

SU

PP

RE

SS

ION

PIP

ING

AN

D E

QU

IPM

EN

T

Non

e L

iste

d

21

12

00

FIR

E S

UP

PR

ES

SIO

N S

TA

ND

PIP

ES

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Sh

op

Dra

win

gs

Wir

ing D

iagra

ms:

Pow

er

Wir

ing D

iagra

ms:

Sig

nal

Wir

ing D

iagra

ms:

Con

trol

Wir

ing

Del

egat

ed D

esig

n S

ub

mit

tal

Qu

alif

icat

ion

Dat

a

Ap

pro

ved

Sta

nd

pip

e D

raw

ings

Fir

e-H

yd

ran

t F

low

Tes

t R

eport

Fie

ld T

est

Rep

ort

s an

d C

erti

fica

tes

Fie

ld Q

ual

ity-C

on

trol

Rep

ort

s

Op

erat

ion

an

d M

ain

ten

ance

Dat

a

21

13

13

WE

T-P

IPE

SP

RIN

KL

ER

SY

ST

EM

S

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Sh

op

Dra

win

gs

Wir

ing D

iagra

ms:

Pow

er

Wir

ing D

iagra

ms:

Sig

nal

Wir

ing D

iagra

ms:

Con

trol

Wir

ing

Del

egat

ed D

esig

n S

ub

mit

tal

Qu

alif

icat

ion

Dat

a

Op

erat

ion

an

d M

ain

ten

ance

Dat

a

Medic

al S

cie

nce -

Sprinkle

r S

yste

m

Pro

ject C

P160181; S

OA

15089

SD

SL -

Page 3

of 5

SH

OP

DR

AW

ING

AN

D S

UB

MIT

TA

L L

OG

SH

OP

DR

AW

ING

AN

D S

UB

MIT

TA

L L

OG

AC

TIO

N

DA

TE

RE

C'D

SUBMITTAL #

DR

AW

ING

#

OR

SP

EC

.

SE

CT

ION

#

SP

EC

/ S

UB

MIT

TA

L D

ES

CR

IPT

ION

SU

BC

ON

TR

AC

TO

R

# REC'D.

TO

SOA Transmittal No.

Date

sent to

Consultant

# COPIES

Date

Rec'd

from

Consultant

APPROVED


REVISE & RESUBMIT

REJECTED


Date

Ret'd

to G

enera

l

Contr

acto

r

SOA Transmittal No.

CONTRACTOR

OWNER - SHAREPOINT

CONSULTANT

ARCHITECT

RE

FE

RR

ED

CO

PIE

S T

O

21

31

13

EL

EC

TR

ICA

L-D

RIV

E C

EN

TR

IFU

GA

L

FIR

E P

UM

PS

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Sh

op

Dra

win

gs:

Fir

e P

um

ps

Sh

op

Dra

win

gs:

Moto

r D

river

s

Sh

op

Dra

win

gs:

Fir

e P

um

p A

cces

sori

es a

nd

Sp

ecia

ltie

s

Pro

du

ct C

erti

fica

tes

Op

erat

ion

an

d M

ain

ten

ance

Dat

a

21

34

00

PR

ES

SU

RE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

PU

MP

S

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Sh

op

Dra

win

gs:

Fir

e P

um

ps

Sh

op

Dra

win

gs:

Moto

r D

river

s

Sh

op

Dra

win

gs:

Fir

e P

um

p A

cces

sori

es a

nd

Sp

ecia

ltie

s

Pro

du

ct C

erti

fica

tes

Op

erat

ion

an

d M

ain

ten

ance

Dat

a

21

39

00

CO

NT

RO

LL

ER

S F

OR

FIR

E-P

UM

P

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Sh

op

Dra

win

gs

Qu

alif

icat

ion

Dat

a

Sei

smic

Qu

alif

icat

ion

Cer

tifi

cate

s

Pro

du

ct C

erti

fica

tes

Man

ufa

ctu

rer'

s F

acto

ry T

est

Rep

ort

s

Op

erat

ion

an

d M

ain

ten

ance

Dat

a

23

07

00

Mec

ha

nic

al

Insu

lati

on

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Sh

op

Dra

win

gs

23

21

13

Hy

dro

nic

Pip

ing

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Sh

op

Dra

win

gs

26

05

73

PO

WE

R S

YS

TE

M S

TU

DIE

S

Qu

alif

icat

ion

Dat

a

Pre

lim

inar

y A

rc F

lash

Haz

ard

An

alysi

s

Pow

er S

yst

em S

tud

y

Cal

cula

tion

s an

d A

nal

ysi

s

Medic

al S

cie

nce -

Sprinkle

r S

yste

m

Pro

ject C

P160181; S

OA

15089

SD

SL -

Page 4

of 5

SH

OP

DR

AW

ING

AN

D S

UB

MIT

TA

L L

OG

SH

OP

DR

AW

ING

AN

D S

UB

MIT

TA

L L

OG

AC

TIO

N

DA

TE

RE

C'D

SUBMITTAL #

DR

AW

ING

#

OR

SP

EC

.

SE

CT

ION

#

SP

EC

/ S

UB

MIT

TA

L D

ES

CR

IPT

ION

SU

BC

ON

TR

AC

TO

R

# REC'D.

TO

SOA Transmittal No.

Date

sent to

Consultant

# COPIES

Date

Rec'd

from

Consultant

APPROVED


REVISE & RESUBMIT

REJECTED


Date

Ret'd

to G

enera

l

Contr

acto

r

SOA Transmittal No.

CONTRACTOR

OWNER - SHAREPOINT

CONSULTANT

ARCHITECT

RE

FE

RR

ED

CO

PIE

S T

O

28

31

11

DIG

ITA

L, A

DD

RE

SS

AB

LE

FIR

E-A

LA

RM

SY

ST

EM

Pro

du

ct D

ata

Sh

op

Dra

win

gs

Op

erat

ion

an

d M

ain

ten

ance

Dat

a

Pro

ject

Rec

ord

Docu

men

ts

Medic

al S

cie

nce -

Sprinkle

r S

yste

m

Pro

ject C

P160181; S

OA

15089

SD

SL -

Page 5

of 5

SH

OP

DR

AW

ING

AN

D S

UB

MIT

TA

L L

OG

OP

ERA

TIN

G IN

STR

UC

TIO

NS

AN

D S

ERV

ICE

MA

NU

AL

LOG

Pro

ject

:

Tate

Hal

l Ren

ova

tio

nU

niv

ersi

ty o

f M

isso

uri

- C

olu

mb

ia -

Med

ical

Sci

en

ce -

Sp

rin

kler

Sys

tem

Pro

ject

Nu

mb

er:

CP

16

01

81

Co

nst

ruct

ion

Man

ager

:

Sect

ion

Des

crip

tio

nC

atal

og

Dat

a

Wir

ing

Dia

gram

s

Inst

alla

tio

n

Inst

ruct

ion

s

Serv

ice

&

Mai

nte

nan

ce

Inst

ruct

ion

s

Par

ts L

ist

&

Ava

ilab

ility

Per

form

ance

Cu

rves

Star

tup

&

Op

erat

ing

Inst

ruct

ion

s

08

11

13

Ho

llow

Met

al D

oo

rs a

nd

Fra

mes

X

08

71

00

Do

or

Har

dw

are

XX

X

09

51

13

Aco

ust

ical

Pan

el C

eilin

gsX

X

09

91

23

Inte

rio

r P

ain

tin

gX

10

44

13

Fire

Pro

tect

ion

Cab

inet

sX

10

44

16

Fire

Ext

ingu

ish

ers

X

21

05

00

Co

mm

on

Wo

rk R

esu

lts

21

05

48

Vib

rati

on

al C

on

tro

l fo

r Fi

re P

rote

ctio

nX

X

21

05

53

Iden

tifi

cati

on

fo

r Fi

re-S

up

pre

ssio

n P

ipin

g an

d

Equ

ipm

ent

21

12

00

Fire

Su

pp

ress

ion

Sta

nd

pip

esX

XX

21

13

13

Wet

-Pip

e Sp

rin

kler

Sys

tem

sX

XX

21

31

13

El

ectr

ical

-Dri

ve C

entr

ifu

gal F

ire

Pu

mp

sX

XX

XX

XX

21

34

00

Pre

ssu

re M

ain

ten

ance

Pu

mp

sX

XX

XX

XX

21

39

00

Co

ntr

olle

rs f

or

Fire

-Pu

mp

Dri

vers

XX

XX

Med

ical

Sci

ence

- S

pri

nkl

er S

yste

m

Pro

ject

CP

16

01

81

; SO

A 1

50

89

OM

ML

- 1

of

2O

PER

ATI

NG

INST

RU

CTI

ON

S A

ND

SER

VIC

E M

AN

UA

L LO

G

OP

ERA

TIN

G IN

STR

UC

TIO

NS

AN

D S

ERV

ICE

MA

NU

AL

LOG

Pro

ject

:

Tate

Hal

l Ren

ova

tio

nU

niv

ersi

ty o

f M

isso

uri

- C

olu

mb

ia -

Med

ical

Sci

en

ce -

Sp

rin

kler

Sys

tem

Pro

ject

Nu

mb

er:

CP

16

01

81

Co

nst

ruct

ion

Man

ager

:

Sect

ion

Des

crip

tio

nC

atal

og

Dat

a

Wir

ing

Dia

gram

s

Inst

alla

tio

n

Inst

ruct

ion

s

Serv

ice

&

Mai

nte

nan

ce

Inst

ruct

ion

s

Par

ts L

ist

&

Ava

ilab

ility

Per

form

ance

Cu

rves

Star

tup

&

Op

erat

ing

Inst

ruct

ion

s

23

07

00

Mec

han

ical

Insu

lati

on

X

23

21

13

Hyd

ron

ic P

ipin

gX

28

31

11

Dig

ital

, Ad

dre

ssab

le F

ire-

Ala

rm S

yste

mX

XX

X

Med

ical

Sci

ence

- S

pri

nkl

er S

yste

m

Pro

ject

CP

16

01

81

; SO

A 1

50

89

OM

ML

- 2

of

2O

PER

ATI

NG

INST

RU

CTI

ON

S A

ND

SER

VIC

E M

AN

UA

L LO

G

CLO

SEO

UT

LOG

Pro

ject

:

Tate

Hal

l Ren

ova

tio

nU

niv

ersi

ty o

f M

isso

uri

- C

olu

mb

ia -

Med

ical

Sci

en

ce -

Sp

rin

kler

Sys

tem

Pro

ject

Nu

mb

er:

CP

16

01

81

Co

ntr

acto

r:

Sect

ion

Des

crip

tio

nC

on

trac

tor/

Sub

con

trac

tor

Dat

e

Rec

'd

# o

f

Co

pie

s

CP

M

Init

ials

Rem

arks

GC

/3.1

1A

s-B

uilt

Dra

win

gs

SC/2

0Ex

ecu

ted

Co

mm

issi

on

ing

Pla

n w

ith

Req

uir

ed

Do

cum

enta

tio

n

01

74

19

W

aste

Man

agem

ent

Fin

al R

epo

rt

07

92

00

Join

t Se

alan

ts -

Sp

ecia

l In

stal

ler'

s W

arra

nty

07

92

00

Join

t Se

alan

ts -

Sp

ecia

l War

ran

ties

08

71

00

Do

or

Har

dw

are

- Sp

ecia

l War

ran

ty

21

05

00

Co

mm

on

Wo

rk R

esu

lts

21

05

53

Iden

tifi

cati

on

fo

r Fi

re-S

up

pre

ssio

n P

ipin

g an

d

Equ

ipm

ent

21

12

00

Fire

Su

pp

ress

ion

Sta

nd

pip

es

21

13

13

Wet

-Pip

e Sp

rin

kler

Sys

tem

s

21

31

13

El

ectr

ical

-Dri

ve C

entr

ifu

gal F

ire

Pu

mp

s

21

34

00

Pre

ssu

re M

ain

ten

ance

Pu

mp

s

21

39

00

Co

ntr

olle

rs f

or

Fire

-Pu

mp

Dri

vers

23

07

00

Mec

han

ical

Insu

lati

on

MU

HC

Ho

spit

al a

nd

Clin

ics

- SP

MB

Pro

ject

CP

12

09

91

; SO

A 1

20

4C

LOSL

- 1

of

2C

LOSE

OU

T LO

G

CLO

SEO

UT

LOG

Pro

ject

:

Tate

Hal

l Ren

ova

tio

nU

niv

ersi

ty o

f M

isso

uri

- C

olu

mb

ia -

Med

ical

Sci

en

ce -

Sp

rin

kler

Sys

tem

Pro

ject

Nu

mb

er:

CP

16

01

81

Co

ntr

acto

r:

Sect

ion

Des

crip

tio

nC

on

trac

tor/

Sub

con

trac

tor

Dat

e

Rec

'd

# o

f

Co

pie

s

CP

M

Init

ials

Rem

arks

23

21

13

Hyd

ron

ic P

ipin

g

26

05

73

Po

wer

Sys

tem

Stu

die

s

28

31

11

Dig

ital

, Ad

dre

ssab

le F

ire-

Ala

rm S

yste

m

MU

HC

Ho

spit

al a

nd

Clin

ics

- SP

MB

Pro

ject

CP

12

09

91

; SO

A 1

20

4C

LOSL

- 2

of

2C

LOSE

OU

T LO

G

CP1

6018

1 M

edic

al S

cien

ce S

prin

kler

Sys

tem

Com

mis

sion

ing

Che

ck L

ist

Com

mis

sion

ing

Item

s by

CSI

Div

isio

nD

ocum

enta

tion

Re q

uire

dO

wne

r W

itnes

s R

equi

red

Ver

ified

by: N

ame

Fi

rmD

ate

com

plC

oord

In

itial

1 Bui

ldin

g Sy

stem

Com

mis

sion

ing

Com

mis

sion

ing

Age

nt -

Con

duct

pre

-inst

alla

tion

mee

tings

per

spec

ifica

tions

.M

eetin

g M

inut

es

2411

9Se

lect

ive

Stru

ctur

e D

emol

ition

Do

not s

tart

dem

oliti

on u

ntil

utili

ty d

isco

nnec

t and

se

alin

g ha

s bee

n ve

rifie

d in

wri

ting

Hol

d Pr

eins

talla

tion

Mee

ting

as sp

ecifi

edM

eetin

g M

inut

es

Ret

urn

adja

cent

are

as to

con

ditio

n ex

istin

g be

fore

de

mol

ition

ope

ratio

ns b

egan

Pre-

cons

truct

ion

vide

o or

di

gita

l pho

tos

7841

3Pe

netr

atio

n Fi

rest

oppi

ngD

o no

t enc

lose

fire

stop

ping

with

oth

er c

onst

ruct

ion

until

insp

ectio

n ha

s bee

n co

mpl

eted

.

7920

0Jo

int S

eala

nts

Cle

an o

ut jo

ints

imm

edia

tely

bef

ore

inst

allin

g jo

int

seal

ant

8111

3H

ollo

w M

etal

Doo

rs &

Fra

mes

Che

ck a

nd r

eadj

ust a

ll op

erat

ing

finis

h ha

rdw

are

and

door

site

miz

ed li

st o

f doo

rs

Che

ck fo

r fir

e la

bels

on

door

s and

fram

es.

Ens

ure

they

mee

t spe

cs a

nd d

raw

ings

.fie

ld re

port

CO

M 1

of 6

6/14

/201

7

Com

mis

sion

ing

Item

s by

CSI

Div

isio

nD

ocum

enta

tion

Re q

uire

dO

wne

r W

itnes

s R

equi

red

Ver

ified

by: N

ame

Fi

rmD

ate

com

plC

oord

In

itial

8710

0D

oor

Har

dwar

eV

erify

doo

r cl

osur

es c

ompl

y w

ith A

DA

req

uire

men

ts

Ver

ify th

at a

ll fir

e do

ors c

lose

and

latc

h po

sitiv

ely

test

repo

rt

9511

3A

cous

tical

Pan

el C

eilin

gsC

ompl

ete

all a

bove

cei

ling

insp

ectio

ns p

rior

to

inst

alla

tion

of ti

les

Ens

ure

that

all

debr

is is

rem

oved

from

abo

ve c

eilin

g til

es d

urin

g fin

al a

bove

cei

ling

insp

ectio

n.

Prov

ide

extr

a m

ater

ial a

s spe

cifie

dTr

ansm

ittal

2112

00Fi

re S

uppr

essi

on S

tand

pipe

sPe

rfor

m D

emon

stra

tion

sect

ion

of sp

ecifi

catio

nsSi

gn-u

p Sh

eet

Perf

orm

Fie

ld Q

ualit

y C

ontr

ol se

ctio

n of

sp

ecifi

catio

nsN

FPA

Cer

tific

atio

n

2113

13W

et-P

ipe

Spri

nkle

r Sy

stem

sFl

ush

unde

rgro

und

pipe

for

5 m

inut

es a

t ful

l flo

w o

r N

FPA

req

uire

d flo

wN

FPA

Doc

uem

enta

tion

Perf

orm

Fie

ld Q

ualit

y C

ontr

ol se

ctio

n of

sp

ecifi

catio

nsN

FPA

Cer

tific

atio

n

CO

M 2

of 6

6/14

/201

7

Com

mis

sion

ing

Item

s by

CSI

Div

isio

nD

ocum

enta

tion

Re q

uire

dO

wne

r W

itnes

s R

equi

red

Ver

ified

by: N

ame

Fi

rmD

ate

com

plC

oord

In

itial

Prov

ide

Ext

ra M

ater

ial a

s spe

cifie

dTr

ansm

ittal

Ver

ify a

ll la

belin

g

2131

13E

lect

rica

l-Dri

ve C

entr

ifuga

l Fir

e Pu

mps

Perf

orm

Dem

onst

ratio

n se

ctio

n of

spec

ifica

tions

Sign

-up

Shee

t

Perf

orm

Fie

ld Q

ualit

y C

ontr

ol se

ctio

n of

sp

ecifi

catio

nsN

FPA

Cer

tific

atio

n

Perf

orm

Sta

rtup

Ser

vice

sect

ion

of sp

ecifi

catio

nsSt

artu

p R

epor

t

2134

00Pr

essu

re M

aint

enan

ce P

umps

Perf

orm

Fie

ld Q

ualit

y C

ontr

ol se

ctio

n of

sp

ecifi

catio

nsN

FPA

Cer

tific

atio

n

2139

00C

ontr

olle

rs fo

r Fi

re-P

ump

Dri

vers

Perf

orm

Dem

onst

ratio

n se

ctio

n of

spec

ifica

tions

Sign

-up

Shee

t

Perf

orm

Fie

ld Q

ualit

y C

ontr

ol se

ctio

n of

sp

ecifi

catio

nsN

FPA

Cer

tific

atio

n

Perf

orm

Sta

rtup

Ser

vice

sect

ion

of sp

ecifi

catio

nsSt

artu

p R

epor

t

CO

M 3

of 6

6/14

/201

7

Com

mis

sion

ing

Item

s by

CSI

Div

isio

nD

ocum

enta

tion

Re q

uire

dO

wne

r W

itnes

s R

equi

red

Ver

ified

by: N

ame

Fi

rmD

ate

com

plC

oord

In

itial

2305

00B

asic

Mec

hani

cal M

ater

ials

and

Met

hods

Hol

d M

EP

pre-

inst

alla

tion

mee

ting(

s).

Mee

ting

Min

utes

Insp

ect p

repa

ratio

n an

d al

l wel

d pa

sses

of a

t lea

st

first

wel

d fo

r ea

ch q

ualif

ied

wel

der

Ver

ify sh

ippi

ng b

lock

s rem

oved

, iso

lato

rs p

rope

rly

rest

rain

ed, b

ases

gro

uted

2307

00M

echa

nica

l Ins

ulat

ion

Ver

ify a

ll va

lves

& d

ampe

r co

ntro

ls a

re e

xten

ded

and

acce

ssib

le

Ver

ify p

rope

r in

sula

tion

used

for

pipi

ng a

nd d

uct

wor

k

2321

13H

ydro

nic

Pipi

ngPe

rfor

m F

ield

Qua

lity

Con

trol

sect

ion

of

spec

ifica

tions

Test

Rep

ort

Tes

t, ad

just

and

cle

an p

er sp

ecifi

catio

nsTe

st re

ports

Ver

ify a

ir v

ents

at h

igh

poin

ts to

det

erm

ine

if al

l are

in

stal

led

and

oper

atin

g pr

oper

ly.

2321

23H

ydro

nic

Pum

psA

lign

Pum

ps a

s spe

cifie

dA

lignm

ent R

epor

ts

CO

M 4

of 6

6/14

/201

7

Com

mis

sion

ing

Item

s by

CSI

Div

isio

nD

ocum

enta

tion

Re q

uire

dO

wne

r W

itnes

s R

equi

red

Ver

ified

by: N

ame

Fi

rmD

ate

com

plC

oord

In

itial

Flus

h sy

stem

and

rep

lace

stra

iner

s

Perf

orm

Sta

rtup

Ser

vice

sect

ion

of sp

ecifi

catio

nsSt

artu

p R

epor

t

2605

00C

omm

on W

ork

Res

ults

for

Ele

ctri

cal

Perf

orm

Fie

ld Q

ualit

y C

ontr

ol se

ctio

n of

sp

ecifi

catio

nsTe

st R

epor

t

Perf

orm

Sys

tem

Com

mis

sion

ing

sect

ion

of

spec

ifica

tions

Com

mis

sion

ing

Rep

ort

Ver

ify th

at e

very

pen

etra

tion

thro

ugh

fire

wal

ls (r

e:

life

safe

ty p

lans

) has

bee

n pr

oper

ly fi

rest

oppe

dce

rtific

atio

n

2605

19C

ondu

ctor

s and

Cab

les

Ens

ure

wir

es a

re c

olor

cod

ed p

er sp

ecifi

catio

ns

Perf

orm

inde

pend

ent t

ests

per

"Fi

eld

Qua

lity

Con

trol

" se

ctio

n of

spec

, inc

ludi

ng m

egoh

m/h

igh

pot

test

s

test

repo

rt

2605

26G

roun

ding

and

Bon

ding

for

Ele

ctri

cal

Syst

ems

Perf

orm

res

ista

nce

test

as d

escr

ibed

in "

Fiel

d Q

ualit

y C

ontr

ol"

sect

ion

of sp

ecte

st re

port

2605

43U

nder

grou

nd D

ucts

and

Rac

eway

s for

E

lect

rica

l Sys

tem

sC

lean

and

cap

all

cond

uits

CO

M 5

of 6

6/14

/201

7

Com

mis

sion

ing

Item

s by

CSI

Div

isio

nD

ocum

enta

tion

Re q

uire

dO

wne

r W

itnes

s R

equi

red

Ver

ified

by: N

ame

Fi

rmD

ate

com

plC

oord

In

itial

2605

53Id

entif

icat

ion

for

Ele

ctri

cal S

yste

ms

Ens

ure

iden

tific

atio

n de

vice

s are

app

lied

per

spec

ifica

tions

Ver

ify a

ll eq

uipm

ent,

pane

ls, c

ondu

its a

nd

cond

ucto

rs a

re c

orre

ctly

labe

led.

2605

73Po

wer

Sys

tem

Stu

dies

Fact

ory

cert

ified

tech

nici

an to

set e

lect

roni

c ov

ercu

rren

t dev

ices

to a

ppro

ved

coor

dina

tion

stud

y se

tpoi

nts

Insp

ectio

n R

epor

t

Tra

in o

wne

rs r

epre

sent

ativ

es in

setti

ng o

f ov

ercu

rren

t dev

ices

Sign

-up

Shee

t

2605

93Po

wer

Sys

tem

Stu

dies

Plac

e ar

cfla

sh la

bels

on

equi

pmen

t as s

peci

fied

Insp

ectio

n R

epor

t

2624

13Sw

itchb

oard

sPe

rfor

m c

heck

s per

"Fi

eld

Qua

lity

Con

trol

" se

ctio

n of

spec

Test

Rep

ort

2831

11D

igita

l, A

ddre

ssab

le F

ire-

Ala

rm S

yste

mT

est s

yste

m o

pera

tion

of p

ull s

tatio

ns h

orns

/str

obes

by

fact

ory

trai

ned

repr

esen

tativ

e pe

r Fi

eld

Qua

lity

Con

trol

sect

ion

of sp

ecifi

catio

ns

Writ

ten

certi

ficat

ion

of fi

re

alar

m sy

stem

per

NFP

CO

M 6

of 6

6/14

/201

7

4/13/2010

Construction Management Checklist for Energizing Utilities (Contractor to initial each item upon completion and provide completed

form to the Owner’s Representative prior to energizing utility)

Water – turned on to the first valve past Energy Management’s last valve.

___ Review all piping and equipment being turned on for proper installation and completed testing. ___ Insulation installed (preferred but not required) ___ Meter properly installed, working, and in readable location. ___ Contractor has swabbed out with chlorine all piping from the backflow preventer to the source while installing. ___ All bacteriological tests have been completed and passed. ___ Backflow preventer installed and tested. (will need water pressure to test) ___ Pressure test completed in piping being turned on. ___ Contractor has method to communicate “Services On” to other contractor personnel and Owner’s personnel.

Steam – turned on to the first valve past Energy Management’s last valve. ___ Review all piping, equipment, valves, reducing stations, relief valves, etc. for proper installation

and complete testing. ___ Piping protected from the weather. ___ Insulation must be installed. ___ All hangers and bolts have been installed. ___ Meter installed, working and in readable location. (Don’t need metasys to turn on.) ___ All needed traps are installed and able to be tested as they are turned on. ___ Condensate system is installed and operating including the pumping system. ___ Pressure test completed in piping being turned on. ___ Contractor has method to communicate “Services On” to other contractor personnel and Owner’s personnel.

Condensate – turned on to the first valve past Energy Management’s last valve. ___ Review all piping and equipment being turned on for proper installation and completed testing. ___ Piping protected from the weather. ___ Insulation installed (preferred but not required) ___ Pressure test completed in piping being turned on. ___ Contractor has method to communicate “Services On” to other contractor personnel and Owner’s personnel.

Electric – turned on to the first breaker past 13.8kV transformer. ___ Review all wiring and equipment being turned on for proper installation and completed testing ___ GFCI set and tested. ___ Breakers set and tested. ___ All needed permanent grounds are installed. ___ Meter installed, working and in readable location. ___ Main switchgear protected from the weather. ___ Contractor has method to communicate “Services On” to other contractor personnel and Owner’s personnel. Chilled Water – turned on to the first valve inside of building. ___ Review all piping and equipment being turned on for proper installation and completed testing. ___ Pressure test completed in piping being turned on. ___ Insulation must be installed. ___ Meter installed, working and connected to Metasys. ___ Building pump and automatic isolation/control valve must be installed and under control. ___ If chillers are installed, automatic loop pump isolation must be installed. ___ Control valves must be installed and automatically controlled on all loads.

___ Contractor has method to communicate “Services On” to other contractor personnel and Owner’s personnel.

Please se

e following web

site for suggested

com

missioning

form

s:

http://w

ww.cf.m

issouri.e

du/pdc/com

mission

ing‐form

s.html

MU Project #CP160181 SUS/1

Sustainability Report

Material Description Ticket No. Date Material Type Weight Notes

Total weight of all demolition material: ____________ Percentage of total material diverted: ____________

GENERAL

Sheet 1 of 40 G000.0 COVER SHEET - BID DOCUMENTS

Sheet 2 of 40 G001 GENERAL NOTES & KEY PLANS

Sheet 3 of 40 G002 EXISTING SPRINKLER COVERAGE DIAGRAMS

Sheet 4 of 40 G003 EXISTING SPRINKLER COVERAGE DIAGRAMS

CODE PLANS

Sheet 5 of 40 CP100 BASEMENT FLOOR - CODE PLAN

Sheet 6 of 40 CP101 FIRST FLOOR - CODE PLAN

Sheet 7 of 40 CP102 SECOND FLOOR - CODE PLAN

Sheet 8 of 40 CP103 THIRD FLOOR - CODE PLAN

Sheet 9 of 40 CP104 FOURTH FLOOR - CODE PLAN

Sheet 10 of 40 CP105 FIFTH FLOOR - CODE PLAN

Sheet 11 of 40 CP106 SIXTH FLOOR - CODE PLAN

Sheet 12 of 40 CP107 SEVENTH FLOOR - CODE PLAN

Sheet 13 of 40 CP108 ROOF - CODE PLAN

Sheet 14 of 40 CP109 HEALTH SCIENCES LIBRARY HSL 142 - VARIANCE

ARCHITECTURAL

Sheet 15 of 40 A100.A BASEMENT - DEMO & RENO PLANS

Sheet 16 of 40 A101.A FIRST FLOOR - LOTTES NORTH DEMO & RENO PLANS

Sheet 17 of 40 A101.B FIRST FLOOR - LOTTES SOUTH DEMO & RENO PLANS

Sheet 18 of 40 A101.C FIRST FLOOR EAST - DEMO & RENO PLANS

Sheet 19 of 40 A101.D FIRST FLOOR WEST - DEMO & RENO PLANS

Sheet 20 of 40 A101.E FIRST FLOOR CENTRAL - DEMO & RENO PLANS

Sheet 21 of 40 A501.A ENLARGED FLOOR PLANS

Sheet 22 of 40 A501.B ENLARGED FLOOR PLANS

Sheet 23 of 40 A701.A SCHEDULES & DETAILS

MECHANICAL

Sheet 24 of 40 M301 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION AND NEW WORK PLANS

SECTION 1.F

Drawings referred to in and accompanying Project Manual consist of the following sheets dated June 26, 2017.

INDEX OF DRAWINGS

INDEX ‐ 1

FIRE PROTECTION

Sheet 25 of 40 FP000.1 FIRE PROTECTION SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Sheet 26 of 40 FP100 FIRE PROTECTION BASEMENT DEMO & NEW WORK

Sheet 27 of 40 FP101.A FIRE PROTECTION FIRST FLOOR LOTTES NORTH DEMO & NEW WORK

Sheet 28 of 40 FP101.B FIRE PROTECTION FIRST FLOOR LOTTES SOUTH DEMO & NEW WORK

Sheet 29 of 40 FP101.C FIRE PROTECTION FIRST FLOOR EAST DEMO & NEW WORK

Sheet 30 of 40 FP101.D FIRE PROTECTION FIRST FLOOR WEST DEMO & NEW WORK

Sheet 31 of 40 FP101.E FIRE PROTECTION FIRST FLOOR CENTRAL DEMO & NEW WORK

Sheet 32 of 40 FP201 STAIRWELLS

Sheet 33 of 40 FP202 STAIRWELLS

Sheet 34 of 40 FP301 FIRE PUMP ENLARGED PLAN

Sheet 35 of 40 FP401 RISERS & DETAILS

ELECTRICAL

Sheet 36 of 40 E000.1 ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Sheet 37 of 40 E001 ELECTRIAL SITE PLAN

Sheet 38 of 40 E101 ELECTRIAL DEMO & NEW WORK

Sheet 39 of 40 E401 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE AND DETAILS

Sheet 40 of 40 E402 ELECTRICAL DETAILS

END OF SECTION

INDEX ‐ 2

Missouri Division of Labor Standards

WAGE AND HOUR SECTION

ERIC R. GREITENS, Governor

Annual Wage Order No. 24 Section 010

BOONE COUNTY

In accordance with Section 290.262 RSMo 2000, within thirty (30) days after a certified copy of this Annual Wage Order has been filed with the Secretary of State as indicated below, any person who may be affected by this Annual Wage Order may object by filing an objection in triplicate with the Labor and Industrial Relations Commission, P.O. Box 599, Jefferson City, MO 65102-0599. Such objections must set forth in writing the specific grounds of objection. Each objection shall certify that a copy has been furnished to the Division of Labor Standards, P.O. Box 449, Jefferson City, MO 65102-0449 pursuant to 8 CSR 20-5.010(1). A certified copy of the Annual Wage Order has been filed with the Secretary of State of Missouri.

Original Signed by Tammy Cavender

Acting Department Director Division of Labor Standards

This Is A True And Accurate Copy Which Was Filed With The Secretary of State: March 10, 2017

Last Date Objections May Be Filed: April 10, 2017

Prepared by Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations

Building Construction Rates for BOONE County

Section 010

OCCUPATIONAL TITLE

** Date of Increase

*

Basic Hourly Rates

Over- Time

Schedule

Holiday

Schedule

Total Fringe Benefits

Asbestos Worker (H & F) Insulator $32.42 55 60 $22.40 Boilermaker $35.93 57 7 $28.33 Bricklayer and Stone Mason $29.76 59 7 $17.44 Carpenter $25.16 60 15 $16.10 Cement Mason $27.82 9 3 $12.92 Communication Technician $31.80 28 7 $12.90 + 13% Electrician (Inside Wireman) $31.80 28 7 $12.90 + 13% Electrician (Outside-Line Construction\Lineman) $43.50 43 45 $5.50 + 36%

Lineman Operator $37.48 43 45 $5.50 + 36% Groundman $28.86 43 45 $5.50 + 36%

Elevator Constructor a $46.04 26 54 $31.645 Glazier $26.87 122 76 $11.78 Ironworker $28.96 11 8 $24.99 Laborer (Building):

General $23.01 42 44 $13.54 First Semi-Skilled $25.01 42 44 $13.54 Second Semi-Skilled $24.01 42 44 $13.54

Lather USE CARPENTER RATE Linoleum Layer and Cutter $25.04 60 15 $16.10 Marble Mason $22.08 124 74 $12.86 Marble Finisher $14.29 124 74 $9.09 Millwright $26.16 60 15 $16.10 Operating Engineer

Group I $28.86 86 66 $24.98 Group II $28.86 86 66 $24.98 Group III $27.61 86 66 $24.98 Group III-A $28.86 86 66 $24.98 Group IV $26.63 86 66 $24.98 Group V $29.56 86 66 $24.98

Painter $23.24 18 7 $11.78 Pile Driver $26.16 60 15 $16.10 Pipe Fitter b $38.00 91 69 $26.93 Plasterer $26.33 94 5 $12.97 Plumber b $38.00 91 69 $26.93 Roofer \ Waterproofer $29.30 12 4 $15.19 Sheet Metal Worker $31.34 40 23 $17.04 Sprinkler Fitter - Fire Protection $34.79 33 19 $20.17 Terrazzo Worker $29.31 124 74 $14.56 Terrazzo Finisher $19.08 124 74 $14.56 Tile Setter $22.08 124 74 $12.86 Tile Finisher $14.29 124 74 $9.09 Traffic Control Service Driver $26.415 22 55 $9.045 Truck Driver-Teamster

Group I $25.30 101 5 $10.70 Group II $25.95 101 5 $10.70 Group III $25.45 101 5 $10.70 Group IV $25.95 101 5 $10.70

Fringe Benefit Percentage is of the Basic Hourly Rate

**Annual Incremental Increase

*SEE FOOTNOTE PAGE ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 24 3/17

Building Construction Rates for BOONE County Footnotes

Section 010

Basic Over- OCCUPATIONAL TITLE ** Date of Hourly Time Holiday Total Fringe Benefits

Increase Rates Schedule Schedule * Welders receive rate prescribed for the occupational title performing operation to which welding is incidental.

Use Building Construction Rates on Building construction in accordance with the classifications of construction work established in 8 CSR 30-3.040(2).

Use Heavy Construction Rates on Highway and Heavy construction in accordance with the classifications of construction work established in 8 CSR 30-3.040(3).

a - Vacation: Employees over 5 years - 8%; Employees under 5 years - 6% b - All work over $7 Mil. Total Mech. Contract - $38.00, Fringes - $26.93

All work under $7 Mil. Total Mech. Contract - $36.66, Fringes - $21.49 c - Vacation: Employees after 1 year - 2%; Employees after 2 years - 4%; Employees after 10 years - 6%

**Annual Incremental Increase ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 24 3/17

BOONE COUNTY BUILDING CONSTRUCTION - OVERTIME SCHEDULE

ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 24 AWO24 010 OT.doc Page 1 of 5

FED: Minimum requirement per Fair Labor Standards Act means time and one-half (1 ½) shall be paid for all work in excess of forty (40) hours per work week.

NO. 9: Means the regular workday starting time of 8:00 a.m. (and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.) may be moved forward to 6:00 a.m. or delayed one hour to 9:00 a.m. All work performed in excess of the regular work day and on Saturday shall be compensated at one and one-half (1½) times the regular pay. In the event time is lost during the work week due to weather conditions, the Employer may schedule work on the following Saturday at straight time. All work accomplished on Sunday and holidays shall be compensated for at double the regular rate of wages. The work week shall be Monday through Friday, except for midweek holidays.

NO. 11: Means eight (8) hours shall constitute a day's work, with the starting time to be established between 6:00 a.m. and 8:00 a.m. from Monday to Friday. Time and one-half (1½) shall be paid for first two (2) hours of overtime Monday through Friday and the first eight (8) hours on Saturday. All other overtime hours Monday through Saturday shall be paid at double (2) time rate. Double (2) time shall be paid for all time on Sunday and recognized holidays or the days observed in lieu of these holidays.

NO. 12: Means the work week shall commence on Monday at 12:01 a.m. and shall continue through the following Friday, inclusive of each week. All work performed by employees anywhere in excess of forty (40) hours in one (1) work week, shall be paid for at the rate of one and one-half (1½) times the regular hourly wage scale. All work performed within the regular working hours which shall consist of a ten (10) hour work day except in emergency situations. Overtime work and Saturday work shall be paid at one and one-half (1½) times the regular hourly rate. Work on recognized holidays and Sundays shall be paid at two (2) times the regular hourly rate.

NO. 18: Means the regular work day shall be eight (8) hours. Working hours are from six (6) hours before Noon (12:00) to six (6) hours after Noon (12:00). The regular work week shall be forty (40) hours, beginning between 6:00 a.m. and 12:00 Noon on Monday and ending between 1:00 p.m. and 6:00 p.m. on Friday. Saturday will be paid at time and one- half (1½). Sunday and Holidays shall be paid at double (2) time. Saturday can be a make-up day if the weather has forced a day off, but only in the week of the day being lost. Any time before six (6) hours before Noon or six (6) hours after Noon will be paid at time and one-half (1½).

NO. 22: Means a regular work week of forty (40) hours will start on Monday and end on Friday. The regular work day shall be either eight (8) or ten (10) hours. If a crew is prevented from working forty (40) hours Monday through Friday, or any part thereof by reason of inclement weather, Saturday or any part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate. Employees who are part of a regular crew on a make-up day, notwithstanding the fact that they may not have been employed the entire week, shall work Saturday at the straight time rate. A workday is to begin between 6:00 a.m. and 9:00 a.m. However, the project starting time may be advanced or delayed if mutually agreed to by the interest parties. For all time worked on recognized holidays, or days observed as such, double (2) time shall be paid.



NO. 26: Means that the regular working day shall consist of eight (8) hours worked between 6:00 a.m., and 5:00 p.m., five (5) days per week, Monday to Friday, inclusive. Hours of work at each jobsite shall be those established by the general contractor and worked by the majority of trades. (The above working hours may be changed by mutual agreement). Work performed on Construction Work on Saturdays, Sundays and before and after the regular working day on Monday to Friday, inclusive, shall be classified as overtime, and paid for at double (2) the rate of single time. The employer may establish hours worked on a jobsite for a four (4) ten (10) hour day work week at straight time pay for construction work; the regular working day shall consist of ten (10) hours worked consecutively, between 6:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m., four (4) days per week, Monday to Thursday, inclusive. Any work performed on Friday, Saturday, Sunday and holidays, and before and after the regular working day on Monday to Thursday where a four (4) ten (10) hour day workweek has been established, will be paid at two times (2) the single time rate of pay. The rate of pay for all work performed on holidays shall be at two times (2) the single time rate of pay.

NO. 28: Means a regular workday shall consist of eight (8) hours between 7:00 a.m. and 5:30 p.m., with at least a thirty (30) minute period to be taken for lunch. Five (5) days a week, Monday through Friday inclusive, shall constitute a work week. The Employer has the option for a workday/workweek of four (4) ten (10) hour days (4-10's) provided:

-The project must be for a minimum of four (4) consecutive days. -Starting time may be within one (1) hour either side of 8:00 a.m. -Work week must begin on either a Monday or Tuesday: If a holiday falls within that week it shall be a consecutive work day. (Alternate: If a holiday falls in the middle of a week, then the regular eight (8) hour schedule may be implemented). -Any time worked in excess of any ten (10) hour work day (in a 4-10 hour work week) shall be at the appropriate overtime rate.

All work outside of the regular working hours as provided, Monday through Saturday, shall be paid at one & one-half (1½) times the employee's regular rate of pay. All work performed from 12:00 a.m. Sunday through 8:00 a.m. Monday and recognized holidays shall be paid at double (2) the straight time hourly rate of pay. Should employees work in excess of twelve (12) consecutive hours they shall be paid double time (2X) for all time after twelve (12) hours. Shift work performed between the hours of 4:30 p.m. and 12:30 a.m. (second shift) shall receive eight (8) hours pay at the regular hourly rate of pay plus ten (10%) percent for seven and one-half (7½) hours work. Shift work performed between the hours of 12:30 a.m. and 8:00 a.m. (third shift) shall receive eight (8) hours pay at the regular hourly rate of pay plus fifteen (15%) percent for seven (7) hours work. A lunch period of thirty (30) minutes shall be allowed on each shift. All overtime work required after the completion of a regular shift shall be paid at one and one-half (1½) times the shift hourly rate.

NO. 33: Means the standard work day and week shall be eight (8) consecutive hours of work between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m., excluding the lunch period Monday through Friday, or shall conform to the practice on the job site. Four (4) days at ten (10) hours a day may be worked at straight time, Monday through Friday and need not be consecutive. All overtime, except for Sundays and holidays shall be at the rate of time and one-half (1½). Overtime worked on Sundays and holidays shall be at double (2) time.

NO. 40: Means the regular working week shall consist of five (5) consecutive (8) hour days' labor on the job beginning with Monday and ending with Friday of each week. Four (4) 10-hour days may constitute the regular work week. The regular working day shall consist of eight (8) hours labor on the job beginning as early as 6:00 a.m. and ending as late as 5:30 p.m. All full or part time labor performed during such hours shall be recognized as regular working hours and paid for at the regular hourly rate. All hours worked on Saturday and all hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours but not more than twelve (12) hours during the regular working week shall be paid for at time and one-half (1½) the regular hourly rate. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays and all hours worked in excess of twelve (12) hours during the regular working day shall be paid at two (2) times the regular hourly rate. In the event of rain, snow, cold or excessively windy weather on a regular working day, Saturday may be designated as a "make-up" day. Saturday may also be designated as a "make-up" day, for an employee who has missed a day of work for personal or other reasons. Pay for "make-up" days shall be at regular rates.



NO. 42: Means eight (8) hours between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and 4:30 p.m. shall constitute a work day. The starting time may be advanced one (1) or two (2) hours. Employees shall have a lunch period of thirty (30) minutes. The Employer may provide a lunch period of one (1) hour, and in that event, the workday shall commence at 8:00 a.m. and end at 5:00 p.m. The workweek shall commence at 8:00 a.m. on Monday and shall end at 4:30 p.m. on Friday (or 5:00 p.m. on Friday if the Employer grants a lunch period of one (1) hour), or as adjusted by starting time change as stated above. All work performed before 8:00 a.m. and after 4:30 p.m. (or 5:00 p.m. where one (1) hour lunch is granted for lunch) or as adjusted by starting time change as stated above or on Saturday, except as herein provided, shall be compensated at one and one-half (1½) times the regular hourly rate of pay for the work performed. All work performed on Sunday and on recognized holidays shall be compensated at double (2) the regular hourly rate of pay for the work performed. When working a five 8-hour day schedule and an Employer is prevented from working forty (40) hours, Monday through Friday, or any part thereof by reason of inclement weather (rain or mud), Saturday or any part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate. The Employer shall have the option of working five eight (8) hour days or four ten (10) hour days Monday through Friday. If an Employer elects to work five (5) eight (8) hour days during any work week, hours worked more than eight (8) per day or forty (40) hours per week shall be paid at time and one-half (1½) the hourly rate Monday through Friday. If an Employer elects to work four (4) ten (10) hour days in any week, work performed more than ten (10) hours per day or forty (40) hours per week shall be paid at time and one-half (1½) the hourly rate Monday through Friday. If an Employer is working ten (10) hour days and loses a day due to inclement weather, they may work ten (10) hours Friday at straight time. All hours worked over the forty (40) hours Monday through Friday will be paid at time and one-half (1½) overtime rate. Overtime shall be computed at half-hour intervals. Shift Work: Two (2) or three (3) shifts shall be permitted, provided such shifts are scheduled for a minimum of three (3) consecutive days. The second shift shall begin at 4:30 p.m. and end at 12:30 a.m. with one-half (1/2) hour for lunch between 7:30 p.m. and 9:00 p.m. and shall received eighty (8) hours’ pay. The third shift shall begin at 12:30 a.m. and end at 8:00 a.m. with one-half (1/2) hour for lunch between 3:30 a.m. and 5:00 a.m. and shall received (8) hour’s; pay. There shall be at least one (1) foreman on each shift on jobs where more than one shift is employed, provided that there are two (2) or more employees on second and on the third shifts. All shifts shall arrange to interchange working hours at the end of each week. When three shifts are used, the applicable rate must be paid from Saturday at 8:00 a.m. until the following Monday at 8:00 a.m. When three shifts are employed, the second and third shifts shall contain at least one-half (1/2) as many employees as the first shift.

NO. 43: Eight (8) hours shall constitute a work day between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 4:30 p.m. Forty (40) hours within five (5) days, Monday through Friday inclusive, shall constitute the work week. Work performed in the 9th and 10th hour, Monday through Friday, shall be paid at time and one-half (1½) the regular straight time rate of pay. Contractor has the option to pay two (2) hours per day at the time and one-half (1½) the regular straight time rate of pay between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 5:30 p.m., Monday through Friday. Work performed outside the regularly scheduled working hours and on Saturdays, Sundays and recognized legal holidays, or days celebrated as such, shall be paid for at the rate of double (2) time.

NO. 55: Means the regular work day shall be eight (8) hours between 6:00 a.m. and 4:30 p.m. The first two (2) hours of work performed in excess of the eight (8) hour work day, Monday through Friday, and the first ten (10) hours of work on Saturday, shall be paid at one & one-half (1½) times the straight time rate. All work performed on Sunday, observed holidays and in excess of ten (10) hours a day, Monday through Saturday, shall be paid at double (2) the straight time rate.

NO. 57: Means eight (8) hours per day shall constitute a day's work and forty (40) hours per week, Monday through Friday, shall constitute a week's work. The regular starting time shall be 8:00 a.m. If a second or third shift is used, the regular starting time of the second shift shall be 4:30 p.m. and the regular starting period for the third shift shall be 12:30 a.m. These times may be adjusted by the employer. The day shift shall work a regular eight (8) hours shift as outlined above. Employees working a second shift shall receive an additional $0.25 above the regular hourly rate and perform seven and one-half (7½) hours work for eight (8) hours pay. Third shift employees shall be paid an additional $0.50 above the regular hourly rate and work seven (7) hours for eight (8) hours pay. When circumstances warrant, the Employer may change the regular workweek to four (4) ten-hour days at the regular time rate of pay. All time worked before and after the established workday of eight (8) hours, Monday through Friday, and all time worked on Saturday shall be paid at the rate of time and one-half (1½) except in cases where work is part of an employee's regular Friday shift. All time worked on Sunday and recognized holidays shall be paid at the double (2) time rate of pay except in cases where work is part of an employee's previous day’s shift. For all overtime hours worked $27.09 of the fringe benefits portion of the prevailing wage shall be paid at the same overtime rate at which the cash portion of the prevailing wage is to be paid. The remaining $1.24 of the fringe benefit portion of the prevailing wage may be paid at straight time.



NO. 59: Means that except as herein provided, eight (8) hours a day shall constitute a standard work day, and forty (40) hours per week shall constitute a week's work. All time worked outside of the standard eight (8) hour work day and on Saturday shall be classified as overtime and paid the rate of time and one-half (1½). All time worked on Sunday and holidays shall be classified as overtime and paid at the rate of double (2) time. The Employer has the option of working either five (5) eight hour days or four (4) ten hour days to constitute a normal forty (40) hour work week. When the four (4) ten-hour work week is in effect, the standard work day shall be consecutive ten (10) hour periods between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 6:30 p.m. Forty (40) hours per week shall constitute a week’s work, Monday through Thursday, inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason beyond the Employer's control, then Friday and/or Saturday may, at the option of the Employer, be worked as a make-up day; straight time not to exceed ten (10) hours or forty (40) hours per week. When the five day eight (8) hour work week is in effect, forty (40) hours per week shall constitute a week's work, Monday through Friday, inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason beyond the Employer's control, then Saturday may, at the option of the Employer, be worked as a make-up day; straight time not to exceed eight (8) hours or forty (40) hours per week. The regular starting time (and resulting quitting time) may be moved to 6:00 a.m. or delayed to 9:00 a.m. Make-up days shall not be utilized for days lost due to holidays.

NO. 60: Means the Employer shall have the option of working five 8-hour days or four 10-hour days Monday through Friday. If an Employer elects to work five 8-hour days during any work week, hours worked more than eight (8) per day or forty (40) per week shall be paid at time and one-half (1½) the hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits Monday through Friday. SATURDAY MAKE-UP DAY: If an Employer is prevented from working forty (40) hours, Monday through Friday, or any part thereof by reason of inclement weather (rain or mud), Saturday or any part thereof may be worked as a make- up day at the straight time rate. It is agreed by the parties that the make-up day is not to be used to make up time lost due to recognized holidays. If an Employer elects to work four 10-hour days, between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 6:30 p.m. in any week, work performed more than ten (10) hours per day or forty (40) hours per week shall be paid at time and one half (1½) the hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits Monday through Friday. If an Employer is working 10-hour days and loses a day due to inclement weather, the Employer may work ten (10) hours on Friday at straight time. All hours worked over the forty (40) hours Monday through Friday will be paid at time and one-half (1½) the hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits. All Millwright work performed in excess of the regular work day and on Saturday shall be compensated for at time and one-half (1½) the regular Millwright hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits. The regular work day starting at 8:00 a.m. (and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.) may be moved forward to 6:00 a.m. or delayed one (1) hour to 9:00 a.m. All work accomplished on Sundays and recognized holidays, or days observed as recognized holidays, shall be compensated for at double (2) the regular hourly rate of wages plus fringe benefits. NOTE: All overtime is computed on the hourly wage rate plus an amount equal to the fringe benefits.

NO. 86: The regular workday shall consist of eight (8) consecutive hours, exclusive of a thirty (30) minute lunch period, with pay at the straight time rate with all hours in excess of eight (8) hours in any one day to be paid at the applicable overtime rate at time and one-half (1½). The regular workday shall begin between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 8:00 a.m. The Employer may have the option to schedule the work week from Monday through Thursday at ten (10) hours per day at the straight time rate of pay with all hours in excess of ten (10) hours in any one day to be paid at the applicable overtime rate at time and one-half (1½). If the Employer elects to work from Monday through Thursday and is stopped due to inclement weather, holiday or other conditions beyond the control of the Employer, they shall have the option to work Friday at the straight time rate of pay to complete the forty (40) hours for the workweek. All overtime work performed on Monday through Saturday shall be paid at time and one-half (1½) the hourly rate. Fringe benefits shall be paid at the one and one half the hourly rate. All work performed on Sundays and recognized holidays shall be paid at double (2) the hourly rate. Fringe benefits shall be paid at double the hourly rate. Shifts may be established when considered necessary by the Employer. Shift hours and rates will be as follows. If shifts are established, work on the First Shift will begin between 6:00 a.m. and 9:00 a.m. and consist of eight (8) hours of work plus one-half hour unpaid lunch. Hours worked during the first shift will be paid at the straight time rate of pay. The second shift shall start eight hours after the start of the first shift and consist of eight (8) hours of work plus one-half hour unpaid lunch. Work on the second shift will begin between 2:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m. and be paid the straight time rate plus $2.50 per hour. The third shift shall start eight hours after the start of the second shift and consist of eight (8) hours plus one-half hour unpaid lunch. Work on the third shift will begin between 10:00 p.m. and 1:00 a.m. and be paid the straight time rate plus $3.50 per hour. The additional amounts that are to be paid are only applicable when working shifts. Shifts that begin on Saturday morning through those shifts which end on Sunday morning will be paid at time and one-half these rates. Shifts that begin on Sunday morning through those shifts which end on Monday morning will be paid at double time these rates.



NO. 91: Means eight (8) hours shall constitute a day’s work commencing at 7:00 a.m. and ending at 3:30 p.m., allowing one-half (½) hour for lunch. The option exists for the Employer to use a flexible starting time between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 9:00 a.m. The regular workweek shall consist of forty (40) hours of five (5) workdays, Monday through Friday. The workweek may consist of four (4) ten (10) hour days from Monday through Thursday, with Friday as a make-up day. If the make-up day is a holiday, the employee shall be paid at the double (2) time rate. The employees shall be paid time and one-half (1½) for work performed on Saturdays, before the regular starting time or after the regular quitting time or over eight (8) hours per work day (unless working a 10-hour work day, then time and one-half (1½) is paid for work performed over ten (10) hours a day) or over forty (40) hours per work week. Work performed on Sundays and recognized holidays shall be paid at the double (2) time rate of pay. SHIFT WORK: When it is necessary for the project to operate in shifts, there will be three (3) eight (8) hour shifts commencing at 8:00 a.m. Shift work must continue for a period of not less than three (3) consecutive work days, two (2) days which must be regular work days (Monday through Friday). In the event the second or third shift of any regular work day shall fall into a Saturday or a holiday, such extension into a Saturday or holiday shall be considered as part of the previous workday and employees shall be paid at the regular shift rate. The first day shift shall work a regular eight (8) hour day at regular rates. The second shift shall be eight (8) hours regular time pay plus $2.50 per hour premium for eight (8) hours work. Third shift will be for eight (8) hours regular time pay plus $3.00 per hour premium for eight (8) hours work.

NO. 94: Means eight (8) hours shall constitute a day’s work between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. The regular workday starting time of 8:00 a.m. (and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.) may be moved forward to 6:00 a.m. or delayed one (1) hour to 9:00 a.m. All work performed in excess of the regular work day and on Saturday shall be compensated at one and one-half (1½) times the regular pay. In the event time is lost during the work week due to weather conditions, the Employer may schedule work on the following Saturday at straight time. All work accomplished on Sunday and holidays shall be compensated at double the regular rate of wages.

NO. 101: Means that except as provided below, eight (8) hours a day shall constitute a standard work day, and forty (40) hours per week shall constitute a week's work, which shall begin on Monday and end on Friday. All time worked outside of the standard work day and on Saturday shall be classified as overtime and paid the rate of time and one-half (1½) (except as herein provided). All time worked on Sunday and recognized holidays shall be classified as overtime and paid at the rate of double (2) time. The regular starting time of 8:00 a.m. (and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.) may be moved forward to 6:00 a.m. or delayed one (1) hour to 9:00 a.m. The Employer has the option of working either five (5) eight-hour days or four (4) ten-hour days to constitute a normal forty (40) hour work week. When a four (4) ten-hour day work week is in effect, the standard work day shall be consecutive ten (10) hour periods between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 6:30 p.m. Forty (40) hours per week shall constitute a week's work Monday through Thursday, inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason beyond the Employer's control, then Friday and/or Saturday may, at the option of the Employer, be worked as a make-up day; straight time not to exceed ten (10) hours per day or forty (40) hours per week. Starting time will be designated by the employer. When the five (5) day eight (8) hour work week is in effect, forty (40) hours per week shall constitute a week’s work, Monday through Friday, inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason beyond the Employer's control, then Saturday may, at the option of the Employer, be worked as a make-up day; straight time not to exceed eight (8) hours per day or forty (40) hours per week. Make-up days shall not be utilized for days lost due to holidays.

NO. 122: Means the regular workday shall be (8) hours. The regular work week shall be forty (40) hours, beginning 6:00 a.m. on Monday and ending 6:00 p.m. on Friday. Saturday will be time and one-half (1½). Sunday and Holidays shall be double (2) time. Saturday can be a make-up day if weather has forced a day off.

NO. 124: Means eight (8) hours shall constitute a day’s work on all classes of work between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 5:30 p.m., Monday through Friday. The pay for time worked during these hours shall be at the regular wage rate. The regular workweek shall be Monday through Friday. Employment from 4:30 p.m. to 12:00 midnight, Monday through Friday, shall be paid for at one and one-half (1½) times the regular hourly rate. From 12:00 midnight until 8:00 a.m. on any day shall be paid for at twice the regular hourly rate. All time worked on Sundays and the recognized holidays shall be paid at the rate of double (2) time. It is understood that forty (40) hours shall constitute a regular workweek, (5-8’s) Sunday Midnight through Friday Midnight, understanding anything over eight (8) hours is one and one-half (1½) times the hourly wage rate.

BOONE COUNTY HOLIDAY SCHEDULE – BUILDING CONSTRUCTION

ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 24 AWO24 010 BHol.doc Page 1 of 2 Pages

NO. 3: All work done on New Year's Day, Decoration Day, July 4th, Labor Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving and Christmas shall be compensated at the double (2) time rate of pay. When any of these holidays fall on a Sunday, the following Monday shall be observed.

NO. 4: All work done on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. If any of the above holidays fall on Sunday, Monday will be observed as the recognized holiday. If any of the above holidays fall on Saturday, Friday will be observed as the recognized holiday and holidays falling on Sunday will be observed on the following Monday.

NO. 5: All work that shall be done on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran’s Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day shall be paid twice the amount of his or her regular hourly wage rate for each hour or fraction thereof worked on any such day .

NO. 7: The following days are assigned days and are recognized as holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, it shall be observed on the following Monday. If a holiday falls on a Saturday, it shall be observed on the preceding Friday. No work shall be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under construction. This is applied to protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal workweek, Monday through Friday, it shall be counted as eight (8) hours toward the forty (40) hour week. However, no reimbursement for these eight (8) hours is to be paid to the workman unless worked. If workman are required to work the above enumerated holidays or days observed as such, or on Sunday, they shall receive double (2) the regular rate of pay for such work.

NO. 8: All work performed on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day, or the days observed in lieu of these holidays, shall be paid at the double time rate of pay.

NO. 15: All work accomplished on the recognized holidays of New Year's Day, Decoration Day (Memorial Day), Independence Day (Fourth of July), Labor Day, Veteran’s Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day, or days observed as these named holidays, shall be compensated for at double (2) the regular hourly rate of wages plus fringe benefits. If a holiday falls on Saturday, it shall be observed on the preceding Friday. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, it shall be observed on the following Monday. No work shall be performed on Labor Day, Christmas Day, Decoration Day or Independence Day except to preserve life or property.

NO. 19: All work done on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, July 4th, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. The employee may take off Friday following Thanksgiving Day. However, the employee shall notify his or her Foreman, General Foreman or Superintendent on the Wednesday preceding Thanksgiving Day. When one of the above holidays falls on Sunday, the following Monday shall be considered a holiday and all work performed on either day shall be at the double (2) time rate. When one of the holidays falls on Saturday, the preceding Friday shall be considered a holiday and all work performed on either day shall be at the double (2) time rate.

NO. 23: All work done on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day and Sundays shall be recognized holidays and shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When a holiday falls on Sunday, the following Monday shall be considered a holiday. When a holiday falls on Saturday, Friday is recognized as a holiday.

NO. 44: All work done on New Year's Day, Decoration Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran’s Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, it shall be observed on the Monday following. If a holiday falls on a Saturday, it shall be observed on the proceeding Friday. No work shall be performed on these days except in emergency to protect life or property. All work performed on these holidays shall be compensated at double the regular hourly rate for the work performed. Overtime shall be computed at half-hour intervals.

NO. 45: All work performed on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day, the day after Thanksgiving, the day before Christmas, and Christmas Day, shall be paid at the double time rate of pay.

BOONE COUNTY HOLIDAY SCHEDULE – BUILDING CONSTRUCTION

ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 24 AWO24 010 BHol.doc Page 2 of 2 Pages

NO. 54: All work performed on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran’s Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double (2) time rate of pay. When a holiday falls on Saturday, it shall be observed on Friday. When a holiday falls on Sunday, it shall be observed on Monday.

NO. 55: The following days are recognized as holidays: New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, it shall be observed on the following Monday. No work shall be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under construction. This rule is applied to protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal work week, Monday through Friday, it shall be counted as eight (8) hours toward the forty (40) hour week; however, no reimbursement for this eight (8) hours is to be paid the workmen unless worked. An Employer working a four (4) day, ten (10) hour schedule may use Friday as a make up day when an observed holiday occurs during the work week. Employees have the option to work that make up day. If workmen are required to work the above enumerated holidays, or days observed as such, they shall receive double (2) the regular rate of pay for such work.

NO. 60: All work performed on New Year's Day, Armistice Day (Veteran's Day), Decoration Day (Memorial Day), Independence Day (Fourth of July), Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. No work shall be performed on Labor Day except when triple (3) time is paid. When a holiday falls on Saturday, Friday will be observed as the holiday. When a holiday falls on Sunday, the following Monday shall be observed as the holiday.

NO. 66: All work performed on Sundays and the following recognized holidays, or the days observed as such, of New Year’s Day, Decoration Day, Fourth of July, Labor Day, Veteran’s Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day, shall be paid at double (2) the hourly rate plus an amount equal to the hourly Total Indicated Fringe Benefits. Whenever any such holidays fall on a Sunday, the following Monday shall be observed as a holiday.

NO. 69: All work performed on New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, July Fourth, Labor Day, Veteran’s Day, Thanksgiving Day or Christmas Day shall be compensated at double (2) their straight-time hourly rate of pay. Friday after Thanksgiving and the day before Christmas are also holidays, however, if the employer chooses to work the normal work hours on these days, the employee will be paid at straight -time rate of pay. If a holiday falls on a Saturday, the holiday will be observed on Saturday; if a holiday falls on a Sunday, the holiday will be observed on the following Monday.

NO. 74: All work performed on New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Fourth of July, Labor Day, Veteran’s Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day, shall be paid at double (2) time of the hourly rate of pay. In the event one of the above holiday’s falls on Saturday, the holiday shall be celebrated on Saturday. If the holiday falls on Sunday, the holiday will be celebrated on Monday.

NO. 76: The following days are recognized as holidays: New Years Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas. No work of any pretense shall be performed on Charismas Day or Independence Day. Any work performed on the other holidays shall be paid for at least two (2) times the regular rate of pay. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, the following Monday will be observed. If a holiday falls on a Saturday, the preceding Friday will be observed.

Heavy Construction Rates for BOONE County

Section 010

Basic Over-

OCCUPATIONAL TITLE * Date of Hourly Time Holiday Total Fringe Benefits Increase Rates Schedule Schedule Carpenter $30.83 23 16 $16.10 Electrician (Outside-Line Construction\Lineman) $43.50 9 12 $5.50 + 36%

Lineman Operator $37.48 9 12 $5.50 + 36% Lineman - Tree Trimmer $24.53 32 31 $9.98 + 3% Groundman $28.86 9 12 $5.50 + 36% Groundman - Tree Trimmer $18.14 32 31 $7.19 + 3%

Laborer General Laborer $27.96 2 4 $13.17 Skilled Laborer $27.96 2 4 $13.17

Millwright $30.83 23 16 $16.10 Operating Engineer

Group I $27.94 21 5 $24.87 Group II $27.59 21 5 $24.87 Group III $27.39 21 5 $24.87 Group IV $23.74 21 5 $24.87 Oiler-Driver $23.74 21 5 $24.87

Pile Driver $30.83 23 16 $16.10 Traffic Control Service Driver $26.415 28 27 $9.045 Truck Driver-Teamster

Group I $29.27 25 21 $12.45 Group II $29.43 25 21 $12.45 Group III $29.42 25 21 $12.45 Group IV $29.54 25 21 $12.45

Use Heavy Construction Rates on Highway and Heavy construction in accordance with the classifications of construction work established in 8 CSR 30-3.040(3).

Use Building Construction Rates on Building construction in accordance with the classifications of construction work established in 8 CSR 30-3.040(2).

If a worker is performing work on a heavy construction project within an occupational title that is not listed on the Heavy Construction Rate Sheet, use the rate for that occupational title as shown on the Building Construction Rate sheet.

*Annual Incremental Increase ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 24 3/17

BOONE COUNTY OVERTIME SCHEDULE - HEAVY CONSTRUCTION

ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 24 AWO24 010 HOT Page 1 of 2 Pages

FED: Minimum requirement per Fair Labor Standards Act means time and one-half (1 ½) shall be paid for all work in excess of forty (40) hours per work week.

NO. 2: Means a regular workweek shall be forty (40) hours and will start on Monday and end on Friday. The Employer shall have the option of working five 8-hour days or four 10-hour days Monday through Friday. If an Employer elects to work five 8-hour days during any workweek, hours worked more than eight (8) per day or 40 per week shall be paid at time and one-half the hourly rate Monday through Friday. If an Employer elects to work four 10-hour days in a week, work performed more than ten (10) hours per day or 40 hours per week shall be paid at time and one-half the hourly rate Monday through Friday. When working a five 8-hour day schedule and an Employer is prevented from working forty (40) hours Monday through Friday, or any part thereof, by reason of inclement weather, Saturday or any part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate. If an Employer is working a four 10-hour day schedule and loses a day due to inclement weather, he may work 10 hours Friday at straight time. All hours worked over the 40 hours Monday through Friday will be paid at 1 ½ overtime rate. A workday shift is to begin at the option of the Employer, between 6:00 a.m. and not later than 9:00 a.m. However, the project starting time may be advanced or delayed if required. If workmen are required to work the enumerated holidays or days observed as such or Sundays, they shall receive double (2) the regular rate of pay for such work. Overtime shall be computed at one-half (1/2) hour intervals. Shift: The Contractor may elect to work one, two or three shifts on any work. When operating on more than one shift, the shifts shall be known as the day shift, swing shift, and graveyard shift as such terms are recognized in the industry. When two shifts are worked on any operation, the shifts will consist of eight (8) or ten (10) hours exclusive of lunchtime. When three shifts are worked the first day or day shift will consist of eight (8) hours exclusive of lunchtime. The second or swing shift shall consist of seven and one-half (7 1/2) hours work for eight hours pay, exclusive of lunchtime, and the third or the graveyard shift shall consist of seven (7) hours work for eight (8) hours pay, exclusive of the lunchtime. All time in excess of normal shifts shall be considered overtime. Multiple shift (the two or three shift) operation will not be construed on the entire project if at anytime it is deemed advisable and necessary for the Employer to multiple shift a specific operation. However, no shift shall be started between midnight and six a.m. except the graveyard shift on a three-shift operation, or except in an unusual or emergency situation. If an Employer starts a shift between midnight and 6 a.m. except the graveyard shift on a three-shift operation, he shall reimburse all employees for the entire shift at the double time rate. Completion of the second shift on a two-shift operation or completion of the graveyard shift on a three-shift operation that carries over into Saturday morning, shall be at the straight time rate. Overtime shall be computed at ½ hour intervals.

NO. 9: Eight (8) hours shall constitute a work day between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 4:30 p.m. Forty (40) hours within five (5) days, Monday through Friday inclusive, shall constitute the work week. Work performed in the 9th and 10th hour, Monday through Friday, shall be paid at time and one-half (1½) the regular straight time rate of pay. Contractor has the option to pay two (2) hours per day at the time and one-half (1½) the regular straight time rate of pay between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 5:30 p.m., Monday through Friday. Worked performed in the first eight (8) hours on Saturday shall be paid at the rate of one and eight tenths (1.8) the regular straight time rate. Work performed outside these hours and on Sundays and recognized legal holidays, or days celebrated as such, shall be paid for at the rate of double (2) time.

NO. 21: Means the regular workday for which employees shall be compensated at straight time hourly rate of pay shall, unless otherwise provided for, begin at 8:00 a.m. and end at 4:30 p.m. However, the project starting time may be advanced or delayed at the discretion of the Employer. At the discretion of the Employer, when working a five (5) day eight (8) hour schedule, Saturday may be used for a make-up day. If an Employer is prohibited from working on a holiday, that employer may work the following Saturday at the straight time rate. However, the Employer may have the option to schedule his work from Monday through Thursday at ten (10) hours per day at the straight time rate of pay with all hours in excess of ten (10) hours in any one day to be paid at the applicable overtime rate. If the Employer elects to work from Monday through Thursday and is stopped due to circumstances beyond his control, he shall have the option to work Friday or Saturday at the straight time rate of pay to complete his forty (40) hours. If an Employer is prohibited from working on a holiday, that Employer may work the following Friday or Saturday at the straight time rate. Overtime will be at one and one-half (1½) times the regular rate. If workmen are required to work the enumerated holidays or days observed as such, or Sundays, they shall receive double (2) the regular rate of pay for such work.

BOONE COUNTY OVERTIME SCHEDULE - HEAVY CONSTRUCTION

ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 24 AWO24 010 HOT Page 2 of 2 Pages

NO. 23: Means the regular workweek shall start on Monday and end on Friday, except where the Employer elects to work Monday through Thursday, (10) hours per day. All work over ten (10) hours in a day or forty (40) hours in a week shall be at the overtime rate of one and one-half (1½) times the regular hourly rate. The regular workday shall be either eight (8) or ten (10) hours. If a job can’t work forty (40) hours Monday through Friday because of inclement weather or other conditions beyond the control of the Employer, Friday or Saturday may be worked as a make-up day at straight time (if working 4-10’s). Saturday may be worked as a make-up day at straight time (if working 5-8’s). An Employer, who is working a four (4) ten (10) hour day work schedule may use Friday as a make-up day when a workday is lost due to a holiday. A workday is to begin at the option of the Employer but not later than 11:00 a.m. except when inclement weather, requirements of the owner or other conditions beyond the reasonable control of the Employer prevent work. Except as worked as a make-up day, time on Saturday shall be worked at one and one-half (1½) times the regular rate. Work performed on Sunday shall be paid at two (2) times the regular rate. Work performed on recognized holidays or days observed as such, shall also be paid at the double (2) time rate of pay. For all overtime hours worked during the week or on Saturday $15.55 of the fringe benefits portion of the prevailing wage shall be paid at time and one-half (1½). For all overtime hours worked on Sundays or recognized holidays $15.55 of the fringe benefits portion of the prevailing wage shall be paid double time. The remaining $.55 of the fringe benefit portion of the prevailing wage shall be paid at straight time.

NO. 25: Means a regular work week of forty (40) hours, starting on Monday and ending on Friday. The regular work day shall be either eight (8) or ten (10) hours. If a crew is prevented from working forty (40) hours Monday through Friday, or any part thereof by reason of inclement weather, Saturday or any part thereof maybe worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate. Employees who are part of a regular crew on a make-up day, notwithstanding the fact that they may not have been employed the entire week, shall work Saturday at the straight time rate. A work day is to begin between 6:00 a.m. and 9:00 a.m. However, the project starting time maybe advanced or delayed if mutually agreed to by the interest parties. All hours worked on recognized holidays, or days observed as such, double (2) time shall be paid.

NO. 28: Means a regular work week of forty (40) hours will start on Monday and end on Friday. The regular work day shall be either eight (8) or ten (10) hours. If a crew is prevented from working forty (40) hours Monday through Friday, or any part thereof by reason of inclement weather, Saturday or any part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate. Employees who are part of a regular crew on a make-up day, notwithstanding the fact that they may not have been employed the entire week, shall work Saturday at the straight time rate. A workday is to begin between 6:00 a.m. and 9:00 a.m. However, the project starting time may be advanced or delayed if mutually agreed to by the interest parties. For all time worked on recognized holidays, or days observed as such, double (2) time shall be paid.

NO. 32: Means the overtime rate shall be time and one-half the regular rate for work over forty (40) hours per week. Sundays and Holidays shall be paid at double the straight time rate.

BOONE COUNTY HOLIDAY SCHEDULE – HEAVY CONSTRUCTION

NO. 4: All work performed on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, or observed as such, shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When a Holiday falls on a Sunday, Monday shall be observed. No work shall be performed on Labor Day, except in case of jeopardy to life or property. This is applied to protect Labor Day.

NO. 5: The following days are recognized as holidays: New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Fourth of July, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, it shall be observed on the following Monday. If a holiday falls on a Saturday, it shall be observed on the preceding Friday. No work shall be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under construction. This rule is applied to protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal work week, Monday through Friday, it shall be counted as eight (8) hours toward a forty (40) hour week; however, no reimbursement for this eight (8) hours is to be paid the workman unless worked. If workmen are required to work the above recognized holidays or days observed as such, or Sundays, they shall receive double (2) the regular rate of pay for such work. The above shall apply to the four 10’s Monday through Friday work week. The ten (10) hours shall be applied to the forty (40) hour work week.

NO. 12: All work performed on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Fourth of July, Labor Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, or days celebrated as such, shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When one of the foregoing holidays falls on Sunday, it shall be celebrated on the following Monday. When one of the foregoing holidays falls on Saturday, it shall be celebrated on the Friday before the holiday.

NO. 16: The following days are recognized as holidays: New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Fourth of July, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on Sunday, it shall be observed on the following Monday. If a holiday falls on Saturday, it shall be observed on the preceding Friday. No work shall be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under construction. This rule is applied to protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal work week, Monday through Friday, it shall be counted as eight (8) hours toward the forty (40) hour week; however, no reimbursement for this eight (8) hours is to be paid to the worker unless worked. If workers are required to work the above recognized holidays or days observed as such, they shall receive double (2) the regular rate of pay for such work.

NO. 21: The following days are recognized as holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, it shall be observed on the following Monday. No work shall be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under construction. This rule is applied to protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal work week, Monday through Friday, it shall be counted as eight (8) hours toward the forty (40) hour week; however, no reimbursement for this eight (8) hours is to be paid the workman unless worked. An Employer working a four (4) day, ten (10) hour schedule may use Friday as a make-up day when an observed holiday occurs during the work week. Employees have the option to work that make-up day. If workmen are required to work the above enumerated holidays, or days observed as such, they shall receive double (2) the regular rate of pay for such work.

NO. 27: The following days are recognized as holidays: New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, it shall be observed on the following Monday. No work shall be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under construction. This rule is applied to protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal work week, Monday through Friday, it shall be counted as eight (8) hours toward the forty (40) hour week; however, no reimbursement for this eight (8) hours is to be paid the workmen unless worked. An Employer working a four (4) day, ten (10) hour schedule may use Friday as a make up day when an observed holiday occurs during the work week. Employees have the option to work that make up day. If workmen are required to work the above enumerated holidays, or days observed as such, they shall receive double (2) the regular rate of pay for such work.

NO. 31: All work performed on New Year's Day, Presidents’ Day, Veterans’ Day, Good Friday, Decoration Day, Fourth of July, Labor Day, Christmas Eve Day, Christmas Day, Thanksgiving Day and Day after Thanksgiving or days celebrated for the same.

AWO24 010 HHol.doc ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 24 Page 1 of 1

Medical Science - Sprinkler System Project CP160181; SOA 15089

02 4119 - 1 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

SECTION 02 4119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection , for dust control and , for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager' and other tenants' on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of

Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

D. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition.

E. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.

F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.



1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:

a. All security cameras

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.

1. Hazardous material remediation will be performed by Owner under separate contract. Coordinate selective demolition operations with abatement contractor and Owner..

2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties:

1. Obtain list of existing warranties from Owner. 2. Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during

selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

E. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.

1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or preconstruction videotapes.

1. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Front End Section.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.



a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

3. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 4. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling

specified in Division 1.

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.



2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site, designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.

B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.

C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and



remove.

D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings."

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will

convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's property.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

END OF SECTION 02 4119


03 3053 - 1 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 03 3053 - MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Other Action Submittal:

1. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.


A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

B. Comply with the following sections of ACI 301, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. "General Requirements." 2. "Formwork and Formwork Accessories." 3. "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports." 4. "Concrete Mixtures." 5. "Handling, Placing, and Constructing."

C. Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMWORK

A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.



2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, [Type I/II].

B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded, [1-1/2-inch] nominal maximum aggregate size.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.

2.4 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth or cotton mats.

B. Water: Potable.

2.5 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures.

B. Normal-Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air content of

trowel-finished floor slabs to exceed 3 percent.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.



3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Locate and install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Comply with ACI 301for placing concrete.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.

C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment.

D. Equipment Bases and Foundations:

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct concrete bases 6 inches high unless otherwise indicated; and extend base not

less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support.

3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise

indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete substrate.

6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces.

B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.



3.7 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface.

1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.

C. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, fluid-applied or direct-to-deck-applied membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

D. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set methods. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

F. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

C. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

3.9 REPAIRS

A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section.



07 8413 - 1 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

SECTION 07 8413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.



B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.


A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements:

1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the following:

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. Grace Construction Products. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Johns Manville. 5. Nelson Firestop Products. 6. NUCO Inc. 7. Passive Fire Protection Partners. 8. RectorSeal Corporation. 9. Specified Technologies Inc. 10. 3M Fire Protection Products. 11. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 12. USG Corporation.



2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls fire-barrier walls smoke-barrier wallsand fire partitions.

2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. Horizontal assemblies include floors floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.

2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479.

E. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.

B. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

C. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.



D. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

F. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

G. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.

H. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

I. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

2.4 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.



3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.



B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.



07 9200 - 1 JOINT SEALANTS

SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 4. Acoustical joint sealants.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints. 2. Section 09 5113 "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters with

acoustical sealant.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

B. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.




A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS. d. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. e. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.



B. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.


a. Pecora Corporation; 898.

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.


a. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 15LM. b. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic FC.

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex 600. d. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.



B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type O (open-cell material) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:



a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure

8C in ASTM C 1193.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.



F. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls and partitions. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors

windows and elevator entrances.

2. Joint Sealant: Latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant Location:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Silicone. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Location:

a. Acoustical joints where indicated.



2. Joint Sealant: Acoustical. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



08 1113 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal work.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details.


A. Product test reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Apex Industries, Inc. 2. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY. 3. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY. 4. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 5. Republic Doors and Frames. 6. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=5744&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456969964&mf=&src=wd








2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2.

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness:1-3/4 inches. c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Frames:

a. Materials: Uncoated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. b. Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door frame. c. Construction: Face welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.4 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated.



C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 2) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.

4. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers.

a. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

2.7 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: SDI A250.10.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. c. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured.



d. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

2. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 3. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according

to manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist,

and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. c. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.



08 3113 - 1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

SECTION 08 3113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.



B. Product Schedule: For access doors and frames.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Acudor Products, Inc. b. Cendrex Inc. c. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. d. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

2. Description: Face of door flush with frame, with exposed flange and concealed hinge. 3. Locations: Ceiling. 4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gage, factory finished. 5. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 6. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, hex-head wrench operated.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

C. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456997716&mf=04&src=wd





08 3113 - 2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

2. Factory Finished: Apply manufacturer's standard baked-enamel or powder-coat finish immediately after cleaning and pretreating, with minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat.

a. Color: manufacturer's standard white.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

B. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.



08 7100 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE

SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Other Action Submittals:

1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents.

b. Content: Include the following information:

1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame.

2) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.

3) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 4) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 5) Mounting locations for door hardware.


A. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.



B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use.

2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1.8 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article to comply with requirements in this Section.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article.

2. References to BHMA Designations: Provide products complying with these designations and requirements for description, quality, and function.

1.9 HINGES



A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Designer Hardware, Inc. b. Hager Companies. c. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. d. Lawrence Hardware Inc. e. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. f. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.

1.10 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows:

1. Bored Locks: Minimum1/2-inch latchbolt throw. 2. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw.

C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.

E. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1 and 2; Series 4000.


a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; n ASSA ABLOY Group Company. b. Designer Hardware, Inc. c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company. e. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

1.11 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.

4. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locking devices.

B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1 and 2; permanent cores that are interchangeable; face finished to match lockset.

1.12 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28.

5. Key per MU keying standards. Coordinate with Owner’s Representative.



B. Keys: Brass.

6. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation:

a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner.

7. Quantity: one extra key blank for each lock.

1.13 SURFACE CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.


a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Designer Hardware, Inc. c. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand company. d. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. f. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

1.14 DOOR GASKETING

A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.


a. Hager Companies. b. National Guard Products. c. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. e. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated. f. Zero International.

1.15 THRESHOLDS

A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.


a. Hager Companies. b. National Guard Products. c. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.



e. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated. f. Zero International.

1.16 FABRICATION

A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18.

B. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

11. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.

12. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 13. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and

elsewhere as indicated.

1.17 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

1.18 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.


1.19 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.



1.20 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

2. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

3. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent.

D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."

E. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

F. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.

1.21 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

4. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1.23 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

Group 1 (Doors 191)



3 pr Butts BB5-HW x 4 ½ x 4 ½ x 626 Designer

2 ea. Closer 416 x alum Designer

1 ea. Storeroom X-86-C (Curved Lever) x 626 Designer

1 ea. Locking Astragal 3494-S x SN Pemko

1 set Sound Seal 312R x C Pemko

2 ea. Door Bottom 434RL Pemko

1 ea. Threshold 151 x A Pemko



09 2216 - 1 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

SECTION 09 2216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

C. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.025 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:



1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

E. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.


a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip. b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System. c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.

F. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.

G. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.

H. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

I. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum

uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter

wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

B. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.


a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS



A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:

1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.



B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of

overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 5. Curved Partitions:

a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along

arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c.

D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.



3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts

that extend through forms. 5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.



09 2300 - 1 GYPSUM PLASTERING

SECTION 09 2300 - GYPSUM PLASTERING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Gypsum plasterwork on existing expanded-metal lath.


1. Section 09 2216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-load-bearing steel framing and

furring that support lath and gypsum plaster. 2. Section 09 2613 "Gypsum Veneer Plastering" for gypsum-based veneer plaster applied

on gypsum base for veneer plaster, unit masonry, and monolithic concrete.



B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.


A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide gypsum plaster assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide gypsum plaster assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for STC ratings per ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified testing agency.


A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.




A. Comply with ASTM C 842 requirements or gypsum plaster manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Room Temperatures: Maintain temperatures at not less than 55 deg F or greater than 80 deg F for at least seven days before application of gypsum plaster, continuously during application, and for seven days after plaster has set or until plaster has dried.

C. Avoid conditions that result in gypsum plaster drying out too quickly.

1. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on plaster. 2. Maintain relative humidity levels for prevailing ambient temperature that produce normal

drying conditions. 3. Ventilate building spaces in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces

during plaster application and until plaster is dry.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 841 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.

B. Metal Accessories:

C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company. 2. CEMCO. 3. Clark Western Building Systems. 4. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. 5. MarinoWARE. 6. Phillips Manufacturing Co. 7. Cornerite: Fabricated from expanded-metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip

galvanized zinc coating. 8. Striplath: Fabricated from expanded-metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip

galvanized zinc coating. 9. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc or.

a. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated. b. Small nose cornerbead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners. c. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening

rib; use on columns and for finishing unit masonry corners. d. Bull nose cornerbead, radius 3/4 inch minimum, with expanded flanges; use at

locations indicated on Drawings.

10. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with expanded flanges.

11. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc or; one-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.

D. Plastic Accessories: Fabricated from high-impact PVC.



E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company. 2. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. 3. Phillips Manufacturing Co. 4. Plastic Components, Inc. 5. Vinyl Corp. 6. Cornerbeads: With perforated flanges.

a. Small nose cornerbead; use unless otherwise indicated. b. Bull nose cornerbead, radius 3/4 inch minimum; use at locations indicated on

Drawings.

7. Casing Beads: With perforated flanges in depth required to suit plaster bases indicated and flange length required to suit applications indicated.

a. Square-edge style; use unless otherwise indicated. b. Bull-nose style, radius 3/4 inch minimum; use at locations indicated on Drawings.

8. Control Joints: One-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.


A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.

B. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 631.

C. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."

1. Sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.3 BASE-COAT PLASTER MATERIALS

A. Base-Coat Plasters, General: ASTM C 28/C 28M.

B. High-Strength Gypsum Neat Plaster: With a minimum, average, dry compressive strength of 2800 psi per ASTM C 472 for a mix of 100 lb of plaster and 2 cu. ft. of sand.


a. USG Corporation; Structo-Base.

C. Aggregates for Base-Coat Plasters: ASTM C 35, .

2.4 FINISH-COAT PLASTER MATERIALS

A. High-Strength Gypsum Gaging Plaster: ASTM C 28/C 28M, with a minimum, average, dry compressive strength of 5000 psi per ASTM C 472 for a neat mix.




a. USG Corporation; Structo-Gauge.

B. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S, special finishing hydrated lime.


a. USG Corporation; Ivory Snowdrift Finish Lime.

C. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type N, normal finishing hydrated lime.


a. USG Corporation; Grand Prize Finish Lime.

2.5 PLASTER MIXES

A. Mixing: Comply with ASTM C 842 and manufacturer's written instructions for applications indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine nonstructural and structural metal framing, substrates, and hollow-metal frames, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.

1. Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations.

2. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

C. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting construction with acoustical sealant.



3.4 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES

A. General: Install according to ASTM C 841.

B. Cornerbeads: Install at external corners.

C. Casing Beads: Install at terminations of plasterwork, except where plaster passes behind and is concealed by other work and where metal screeds, bases, or frames act as casing beads.

D. Control Joints: Install control joints with spacing between joints in either direction not exceeding the following and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect:

1. Partitions: 30 feet. 2. Ceilings: 30 feet.

3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 842.

1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed on surface.

2. Grout hollow-metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with base-coat plaster material, before lathing where necessary. Except where full grouting is indicated or required for fire-resistance rating, grout at least 6 inches at each jamb anchor.

3. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal.

4. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated.

B. Bonding Compound: Apply on plaster bases.

C. Base Coats:

1. Base Coats over Expanded-Metal Lath: High-strength gypsum plaster with job-mixed sand for scratch and brown coats.

D. Finish Coats:

1. Finish-Coat Mix for Smooth-Troweled Finishes: High-strength gypsum gaging plaster.

E. Plaster Finishes:

1. Provide troweled finish unless otherwise indicated.

F. Concealed Plaster:

1. Where plaster application will be concealed behind built-in cabinets, similar furnishings, and equipment, apply finish coat.

2. Where plaster application will be concealed above suspended ceilings and in similar locations, finish coat may be omitted.

3. Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhesive application of tile and similar finishes, finish coat may be omitted.



3.6 PLASTER REPAIRS

A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed.


A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.



09 2613 - 1 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING

SECTION 09 2613 - GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Gypsum veneer plaster skimcoat and patching.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 09 2216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-load-bearing steel framing.

2. Section 09 2300 “Gypsum Plastering”



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show locations, fabrication, and installation of control joints, reveals, and trim; include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.

C. Stack panels flat on leveled supports off floor or slab to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 843 requirements or gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Room Temperatures: Maintain not less than 55 deg F or more than 80 deg F for seven days before application of gypsum veneer plaster, continuously during application, and after application until veneer plaster is dry.



C. Avoid conditions that result in gypsum veneer plaster drying too rapidly.

1. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on veneer plaster. 2. Maintain relative humidity levels, for prevailing ambient temperature, that produce normal

drying conditions. 3. Ventilate building spaces in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces

during veneer plaster application until it is dry.

D. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain gypsum veneer plaster products, including gypsum base for veneer plaster, joint reinforcing tape, and embedding material, from single manufacturer.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Low-Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.3 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER

A. High-Strength, One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587, ready-mixed, smooth, finish-coat veneer plaster containing mill-mixed, fine silica sand; with a compressive strength of 3000 psi when tested according to ASTM C 472; and formulated for application directly over substrate without use of separate base-coat material.


a. USG Corporation; Imperial Finish Plaster.

B. High-Strength, Two-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587, ready-mixed, base-coat plaster and smooth finish-coat veneer plaster containing mill-mixed, fine silica sand; with a compressive strength of 3000 psi when tested according to ASTM C 472.




a. USG Corporation:

1) Base Coat: Imperial Basecoat Plaster. 2) Smooth Finish Coat: Imperial Finish Plaster.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Standard Trim: ASTM C 1047, provided or approved by manufacturer for use in gypsum veneer plaster applications indicated.

1. Material: Galvanized-steel sheet or aluminum-coated steel sheet; rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Control joints.

B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.


a. Fry Reglet Corporation. b. Gordon Inc. c. Pittcon Industriesk.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.

3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with veneer plaster.

2.5 JOINT REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with joint strength requirements in ASTM C 587 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations for each application indicated.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: As recommended by gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. Embedding Material for Joint Tape:

1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: As recommended by gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer for use with joint-tape material and gypsum veneer plaster applications indicated.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 843. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through



perimeter joints and openings in building construction, as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, and attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install according to ASTM C 844 and in specific locations approved by Architect.

C. Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

D. Aluminum Trim:

1. Install aluminum trim according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 2. Apply and embed joint tape over flanges of aluminum trim accessories if recommended

by trim manufacturer.

3.3 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING

A. Bonding Agent: Apply bonding agent on dry existing plaster locations according to gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Mixing: Mechanically mix gypsum veneer plaster materials to comply with ASTM C 843 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations.

C. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Application: Comply with ASTM C 843 and with veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations.

1. One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: Trowel apply base coat over substrate to uniform thickness. Fill all voids and imperfections. Immediately double back with same mixer batch of plaster to a uniform total thickness of 1/16 to 3/32 inch.

2. Two-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster:

a. Base Coat: Hand trowel or machine apply base coat over substrate to a uniform thickness of 1/16 to 3/32 inch. Fill all voids and imperfections.

b. Finish Coat: Trowel apply finish-coat plaster over base-coat plaster to a uniform



thickness of 1/16 to 3/32 inch.

3. Where gypsum veneer plaster abuts only metal door frames, windows, and other units, groove finish coat to eliminate spalling.

D. Concealed Surfaces: Do not omit gypsum veneer plaster behind cabinets, furniture, furnishings, and similar removable items. Omit veneer plaster in the following areas where it will be concealed from view in the completed Work unless otherwise indicated or required to maintain fire-resistance and STC ratings:

1. Above suspended ceilings. 2. Behind wood paneling.

E. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Finish: Smooth-troweled finish unless otherwise indicated or to match existing adjacent finished surface.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed gypsum veneer plaster from damage from weather, condensation, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace gypsum veneer plaster and gypsum base panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that gypsum base panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.

2. Indications that gypsum base panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



09 2900 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD

SECTION 09 2900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 09 2216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.

2. Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" for paint systems to be used for painting wall and other assembly ratings on gypsum board.



1. Include product data on fasteners used in work. Fasteners must all be tamperproof at patient areas and where indicated and must use the same heads as other tamperproof fasteners used on the project to the extent possible to minimize types of maintenance tools required.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Security Fasteners: Furnish not less than 1 box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type and size of security fastener installed.

2. Tools: General Contractor to provide the Owner with two sets of tools for installing and removing each type of security fastener used in project.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.




A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD


1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. PABCO Gypsum. 7. Temple-Inland. 8. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.




D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.


E. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, Level 3.

1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

F. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.4 SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD

A. Acoustically Enhanced Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Multilayer products constructed of two layers of gypsum boards sandwiching a viscoelastic sound-absorbing polymer core.


a. National Gypsum Company; Sound Break. b. Quiet Solution, Quiet Rock.

2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer.

2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:



a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion (control) joint.

3. Mullion closure piece: Equal to Gordon Trim Mullion Mate

2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.

2. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.



E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR AIS-919. d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

2.9 SECURITY FASTENERS

A. Operable only by tools produced by fastener manufacturer or other licensed fabricator for use on specific type of fastener. Drive-system type, head style, material, and protective coating as required for assembly, installation, and strength, and as follows:


a. Camcar Textron, Inc. b. Holo-Krome; a Danaher Corporation. c. Safety Socket Screw Corporation. d. Tamper-Pru Screws, Inc.

2. Drive-System Type: Pinned Torx-Plus or Pinned Torx. 3. Fastener Strength: 120,000 psi. 4. General Contractor to coordinate with this installer and other installers to assure one type

of security fastener is used in project to minimize tools required to be maintained by Owner. Provide stainless steel, ASTM F 879 (ASTM F 879M), Group 1 CW fasteners of one of the following types as coordinated by General Contractor:

a. Socket Button Head Fasteners b. Socket Flat Countersunk Head Fasteners c. Socket Head Cap Fasteners

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.




3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 3. Abuse-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: In all toilets/showers/wetwall areas and additionally

as indicated on Drawings. 5. Acoustically Enhanced Type: As indicated on Drawings.



B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

2. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

1. Partitions: Provide control joints spaced such that no partition extends, uninterrupted, more than 30 feet horizontally.



2. Ceilings: Provide control joints spaced such that no interior ceiling surface extends, uninterrupted, more than 30 feet in any direction or exceeds 900 square feet in uninterrupted area.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 4. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." Level 5 is suitable for surfaces receiving gloss and semigloss enamels and other surfaces subject to severe lighting. It is considered a high-quality gypsum board finish.

E. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. At rated walls, provide identification of rating on wall surface, above ceiling. Use stencils and paint. Provide identification at intervals indicated on drawings, but no greater than every 8 feet along length of wall.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.


09 5113 - 1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

SECTION 09 5113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.

C. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS


1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: 4 full boxes of full-size panels.


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations:

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus on-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 32 percent.

C. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

D. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.

E. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.

1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products from the following manufacturer or approved equal:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. USG Corporation

B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows:



1. Type and Form: See Appendix A “Interior Finish Key” for type of Lay-in ceiling tile.

C. Color: As indicated in appendix A.

D. Thickness: As indicated by product listed in appendix A.

E. Modular Size: As indicated by in appendix A.

F. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.

1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated.

B. Recycled Content Postconsumer recycled content not less than 50%.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load

(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135-inch- diameter wire.

E. Hanger Rods and Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- diameter bolts.

G. All hanging system components at the MRI room shall be compatible with the requirements of the MRI equipment.

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following or approved equal:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. USG Corporation

B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System all areas except for MRI Room: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; pre-painted, electrolytically zinc



coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted to match color of acoustical unit

C. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Extruded Aluminum Suspension System at MRI Room: Main and cross runners roll formed from extruded aluminum sheet;

1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Extruded Aluminum sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted to match color of acoustical unit

2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following or approved equal:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.

3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.

B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 7. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from

hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.

8. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or post-installed anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.

1. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.



3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.



09 9123 - 1 INTERIOR PAINTING

SECTION 09 9123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Steel. 2. Gypsum board. 3. Concrete Masonry Units. (CMU)

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.




A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Pratt & Lambert. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and for interior paints applied at Project site, the following VOC limits exclusive of colorants added to a tint base when calculated according to 40 CFR 59 Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Flat paints and coatings: 50g/L. 2. Nonflat paints and coatings: 150 g/L.

D. Colors: As listed in Appendix A, Interior Finish Key.

2.3 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Block Filler, Latex Interior/Exterior: MPI #4.



2.4 METAL PRIMERS

A. Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive, for Metal: MPI #79.

2.5 WATER-BASED PAINTS

A. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #147.

B. Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143.

2.6 SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS

A. Alkyd, Interior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #47.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials

being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (CMU): 12 percent

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer’s written instructions.

F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.



E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Equipment, including panelboards.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Other items as directed by Architect.

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.

F. Exposed, Interior Steel Columns and Beams: Columns and Beams shall be sanded smooth and re-primed prior to painting, Architect to review finish prior to intermediate coat application.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. CMU Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50 b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5),

MPI #147.



B. Steel Substrates:

1. Alkyd System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79 or primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76.

b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #47.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #147.


Medical Science - Sprinkler SystemProject CP160181; SOA 15089

21 0500 - 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS

SECTION 21 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.2. Sleeves.3. Escutcheons.4. Grout.5. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.6. Painting and finishing.7. Concrete bases.8. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Mechanical sleeve seals.2. Escutcheons.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for fire-suppression installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire-suppression items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8 inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239 inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.



2.5 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

1. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw and chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

2.6 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28 day compressive strength.3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.



K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep-pattern type.b. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece,

stamped-steel type.c. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast-brass

type with polished chrome-plated finish.d. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, stamped-steel type with

concealed hinge and set screw.e. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, stamped-steel type with set screw.f. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One piece, floor-plate

type.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide NFPA #13/14 annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: Edit pipe size range in first two subparagraphs below to suit Project. Confirm that PVC materials are allowed for sleeves by fire authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble



mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

R. Underground, Exterior Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.3 PAINTING

A. Painting of fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."



B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.4 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.5 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for fire-suppression equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout around anchors.

F. Cure placed grout.


THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK


21 0548.13 - 1 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

SECTION 21 0548.13 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.2. Elastomeric hangers.



1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of vibration isolation device type required.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation device.

1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation for fire-suppression piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and restraints, if any.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."



EQUIPMENT

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS

A. Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Isolation Technology, Inc.b. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.c. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.d. Vibration Isolatione. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Mounting Plates:

a. Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and threaded with threaded studs or bolts.

b. Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to support structure.

3. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material.

2.2 RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS

A. Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Isolation Technology, Inc.b. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.c. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.d. Vibration Isolatione. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Description: All-directional isolator with restraints containing two separate and opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

a. Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel.b. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric

material.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS

A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Isolation Technology, Inc.b. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.



EQUIPMENT

c. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.d. Vibration Isolatione. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

3. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel contact.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.


3.2 VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete”.

B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.

END OF SECTION 21 0548.13


21 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING & EQUIPMENT

SECTION 21 0553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING & EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.2. Pipe labels.3. Valve tags.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: anodized aluminum, 0.032 inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White.3. Background Color: Red.4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,

1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

6. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment-Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.

B. Self-adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.



C. Pipe-Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

D. Pipe-Label Colors:

1. Background Color: Safety Red.2. Letter Color: White.

2.3 VALVE TAGS

A. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping-system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: anodized aluminum, 0.032 inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass beaded chain.3. Valve-Tag Color: Safety Red.4. Letter Color: White.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in fire-suppression piping systems. List tagged valves in a valve-tag schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and with captions similar to those indicated in "Valve-Tag Size and Shape" Subparagraph below:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Fire-Suppression Standpipe: 2 inches, round.b. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: 2 inches, round

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, as well as dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and other substances that could impair bond of identification devices.



3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be installed.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping: Painting of piping is specified in architectural specifications.

B. Pipe-Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch connection excluding short takeoffs. Where flow pattern is not obvious,

mark each pipe at branch.3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures.4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit a view of concealed

piping.5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in fire-suppression piping systems. List tagged valves in a valve-tag schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and with captions similar to those indicated in "Valve-Tag Size and Shape" Subparagraph below:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:



a. Fire-Suppression Standpipe: 2 inches round.b. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: 2 inches round.



21 1200 - 1 FIRE SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES

SECTION 21 1200 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.2. Fire-protection valves.3. Hose connections.4. Alarm devices.5. Pressure gages.


1. Division 21 Section "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for wet-pipe sprinkler piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard-Pressure Standpipe Piping: Fire-suppression standpipe piping designed to operate at working pressure 175 psig maximum.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Automatic Wet-Type, Class I Standpipe System: Includes NPS 2-1/2 hose connections. Has open water-supply valve with pressure maintained and is capable of supplying water demand.


A. Standard-Pressure, Fire-Suppression Standpipe System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

B. Delegated Design: Design fire-suppression standpipes, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and flow criteria from this contractors performed fire hydrant test.

C. Fire-suppression standpipe design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. System will be designed as a “Manual Wet System”.2. Maximum residual pressure at required flow at each hose-connection outlet is as follows

unless otherwise indicated:

a. NPS 2-1/2 Hose Connections: 175 psig.



1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product included in this specification. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire-suppression standpipes. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For standpipe systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.

F. Approved Standpipe Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 14, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.

G. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

H. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 14. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."

I. Field quality-control reports.

J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-suppression standpipes specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

K. Welder and weld procedure qualifications shall be submitted with the sprinkler shop drawings. All welders and welding procedures shall meet or exceed AWS standard D10.9, level AR-3.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing fire-suppression standpipes and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression standpipe equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with NFPA 14, "Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems."



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Standard Weight, Schedule 40 Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Standard-Weight, Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

C. Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.

D. Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

E. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

F. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.

G. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:


a. Anvil International, Inc.b. Corcoran Piping System Co.c. National Fittings, Inc.d. Shurjoint Piping Products.e. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.f. Victaulic Company.

2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.3. Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron

casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern,

unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.



2.4 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES

A. General Requirements:

1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved.2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig.

B. Check Valves:


a. Anvil International, Inc.b. NIBCO INC.c. Potter Roemer.d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.e. Victaulic Company.f. Viking Corporation.g. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Standard: UL 312.3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.4. Type: Swing check.5. Body Material: Cast iron.6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

C. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:


a. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.b. NIBCO INC.c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Standard: UL 262.3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

D. Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves:


a. Anvil International, Inc.b. NIBCO INC.c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.d. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 1091.3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.4. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller:



a. Valve Type: Ball or butterfly.b. Body Material: Bronze.c. End Connections: Threaded.

5. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

a. Valve Type: Butterfly.b. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.c. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer.

2.5 DRAIN VALVES


1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory” lists or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.

2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.

B. Angle Valves:


a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.b. United Brass Works, Inc.

C. Ball Valves:


a. Anvil International, Inc.b. NIBCO INC.c. Potter Roemer.d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.e. Victaulic Company.f. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2.6 HOSE CONNECTIONS

A. Adjustable-Valve Hose Connections:


a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.b. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.c. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.d. Potter Roemer.e. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

2. Standard: UL 668 hose valve, with integral UL 1468 reducing or restricting pressure-control device, for connecting fire hose.



3. Pressure Rating: 300 psig minimum.4. Material: Brass or bronze.5. Size: NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2-1/2, as indicated.6. Inlet: Female pipe threads.7. Outlet: Male hose threads with lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include hose valve

threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department threads.8. Pattern: Angle.9. Finish: Polished brass or bronze.

2.7 FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Storz-Type, Fire-Department Connection:


a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.b. GMR International Equipment Corporation.c. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.d. Potter Roemer.

2. Type: 30 degree pattern 4 inches Storz.3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.4. Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal.5. Cap: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain.6. Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular, brass, wall type.7. Outlet: Storz.8. Number of Inlets: One.9. FDC Plate Marking: "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE (LOTTES BLDG & MEDICAL

SCIENCE BLDG)

a. A separate placard adjacent to FDC to list sprinklered floors of Medical Science Building protected by new FDC. Floors will be added to placard as renovations ensue until entire building is protected, at which point, this placard will be removed.

b. Plate and Placard to be red background with white letters.

10. Finish: Rough brass or bronze.11. Outlet Size: NPS 4.

2.8 ALARM DEVICES

A. Water-Flow Indicators:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell company.b. Potter Electric Signal Company.c. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.

2. Standard: UL 346.3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and

auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-



adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.

5. Type: Paddle operated.6. Pressure Rating: 250 psig.7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.

B. Pressure Switches:


2. Standard: UL 346.3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.

C. Valve Supervisory Switches:



2. Standard: UL 346.3. Type: Electrically supervised.4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.

2.9 PRESSURE GAGES


1. AMETEK; U.S. Gauge Division.2. Ashcroft Inc.3. Brecco Corporation.4. WIKA Instrument Corporation.

B. Standard: UL 393.

C. Dial Size: 3-1/2 to 4-1/2 inch diameter.

D. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig minimum.

E. Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" label on dial face.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 14 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations of piping connections before installation.

B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thickness, fire and smoke rated construction, framing for hose-station cabinets, and other conditions where hose connections and stations are to be installed.


3.3 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING

A. Connect fire-suppression standpipe piping to water-service piping at service entrance into building. Comply with requirements for exterior piping in Division 33 Section "Water Distribution."

B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories at connection to fire-suppression water-service piping. Comply with requirements for backflow preventers in Division 21 Section "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System."

C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water service.

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 14 for installation of fire-suppression standpipe piping.

C. Install listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.

D. Install drain valves on standpipes. Extend drain piping to outside of building.

E. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valves to drain piping between fire-department connections and check valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building.



F. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

G. Install hangers and supports for standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14. Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for hanger materials.

H. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft-metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.

I. Fill wet-type standpipe system piping with water.

J. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 21 Section "Common Work Results."

K. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 21 Section "Common Work Results."

L. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 21 Section "Common Work Results."

3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

H. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

I. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.

J. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

K. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.



3.6 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 14 and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 14.

B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System Acceptance" Chapter.

4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.6. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment.

C. Fire-suppression standpipe system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.



3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Piping between Fire-Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.

B. Standard-pressure, wet-type, fire-suppression standpipe piping, NPS 4 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Standard-weight Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

2. Standard-weight Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

a. Grooved joint fittings are acceptable, except tee fittings serving small branches or single sprinkler heads shall be secured with a 2 bolt, cast iron strap. Branch fittings secured with wire straps are not permitted.

C. Standard-pressure, wet-type, fire-suppression standpipe piping, NPS 5 to NPS 8, shall be one of the following:

1. Standard-weight Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

2. Standard-weight Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with cut or roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

a. Grooved joint fittings are acceptable, except tee fittings serving small branches or single sprinkler heads shall be secured with a 2 bolt, cast iron strap. Branch fittings secured with wire straps are not permitted.



21 1313 - 1 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

SECTION 21 1313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.2. Fire-protection valves.3. Sprinklers.4. Alarm devices.5. Pressure gages.


1. Division 21 Section "Fire-Suppression Standpipes" for standpipe piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175 psig maximum.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated.


A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

B. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:

a. Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.b. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.



c. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.d. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.e. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.f. Lab Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.

3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:

a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500 sq. ft. area.b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500 sq. ft area.c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500 sq. ft area.

4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:

a. Office Spaces: 225 sq. ft.b. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft.c. Lab Areas: 130 sq. ft.d. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.e. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.f. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

5. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: 250 gpm for 60 to minutes.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Coordinate first paragraph below with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" and as supplemented in "Quality Assurance" Article.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.

E. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.

F. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

G. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

H. Field quality-control reports.



I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.


D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."2. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.


A. Standard Weight, Schedule 40 Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.



C. Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.

D. Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

E. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

F. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.

G. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.

H. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.

I. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:


a. Anvil International, Inc.b. Victaulic Company.

2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.3. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern,

unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

4. Grooved joint fittings are acceptable, except tee fittings serving small branches or single sprinkler heads shall be secured with a 2 bolt, cast iron strap. Branch fittings secured with wire straps are not permitted.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.

1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES


1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved.2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig.

B. ASME Compliance:



1. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.2. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves.3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections.

D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for valves.

E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

F. Ball Valves:


a. Anvil International, Inc.b. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc and FM Global standard for indicating valves (butterfly or ball type), Class Number 1112.

3. Body Design: Two piece.4. Body Material: Forged brass or bronze.5. Valves NPS 3: Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.6. Port Size: Full.7. Seats: PTFE.8. Stem: Stainless steel.9. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.10. Actuator: Worm gear or traveling nut.11. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external.12. End Connections for Valves NPS 1 through NPS 2: Threaded ends.13. End Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2: Grooved ends.

G. Iron Butterfly Valves:


a. Anvil International, Inc.b. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.c. NIBCO INC.d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.e. Victaulic Company.

H. Description:

1. Standard: UL 1091 and FM Global standard for indicating valves, (butterfly or ball type), Class Number 112.

2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig.3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron with nylon, EPDM, epoxy, or polyamide coating.4. Seat Material: EPDM.5. Stem: Stainless steel.6. Disc: Ductile iron, and EPDM or SBR coated.7. Actuator: Worm gear or traveling nut.8. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external.9. Body Design: Grooved-end connections.








I. Check Valves:

1. Anvil International, Inc.2. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.3. NIBCO INC.4. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.5. Victaulic Company.

J. Description:

1. Standard: UL 1091 and FM Global standard for indicating valves, (butterfly or ball type), Class Number 112.

2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig.3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron with nylon, EPDM, epoxy, or polyamide coating.4. Seat Material: EPDM.5. Stem: Stainless steel.6. Disc: Ductile iron, and EPDM or SBR coated.7. Actuator: Worm gear or traveling nut.8. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external.9. Body Design: Grooved-end connections.

K. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:

L. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. NIBCO INC.2. Victaulic Company.3. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

M. Description:

1. Standard: UL 262 and FM Global standard for fire-service water control valves (OS&Y- and NRS-type gate valves).

2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig.3. Body and Bonnet Material: Cast or ductile iron.4. Wedge: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze.5. Wedge Seat: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze.6. Stem: Brass or bronze.7. Packing: Non-asbestos PTFE.8. Supervisory Switch: External.9. End Connections: Flanged.

N. Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves:


a. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.b. Milwaukee Valve Company.c. NIBCO INC.d. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 1091.3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.











4. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller:

a. Valve Type: Ball or butterfly.b. Body Material: Bronze.c. End Connections: Threaded.

5. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

a. Valve Type: Butterfly.b. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.c. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer.

2.5 DRAIN VALVES



2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.

B. Angle Valves:



C. Ball Valves:


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.b. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.c. Milwaukee Valve Company.d. NIBCO INC.e. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.f. Victaulic Company.

D. Globe Valves:



2.6 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:




a. AGF Manufacturing Inc.b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.d. Victaulic Company.


3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.4. Body Material: Cast or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test

valve.5. Size: Same as connected piping.6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

B. Branch Line Testers:


a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.b. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.c. Potter Roemer.

2. Standard: UL 199.3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.4. Body Material: Brass.5. Size: Same as connected piping.6. Inlet: Threaded.7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.

C. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:


a. AGF Manufacturing Inc.b. Triple R Specialty.c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.d. Victaulic Company.e. Viking Corporation.


3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.4. Body Material: Cast or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.5. Size: Same as connected piping.6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.



2.7 SPRINKLERS


1. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.2. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.3. Victaulic Company.4. Viking Corporation.

B. General Requirements:


2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.

C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:

1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.2. Characteristics: Nominal ½ inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for

"Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

D. Sprinkler Finishes:

1. Chrome plated.2. Bronze.3. Painted.

E. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.

F. Sprinkler Guards:


a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.c. Victaulic Company.d. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 199.3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.8 ALARM DEVICES

A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.

B. Electrically Operated Alarm Bell:




a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell company.b. Notifier; a Honeywell company.c. Potter Electric Signal Company.

2. Standard: UL 464.3. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell.4. Size: 8 inch minimum diameter.5. Finish: Red-enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use.

C. Water-Flow Indicators:


a. ADT Security Services, Inc.b. McDonnell & Miller; ITT Industries.c. Potter Electric Signal Company.d. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.e. Viking Corporation.f. Watts Industries (Canada) Inc.

2. Standard: UL 346.3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and

auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.

5. Type: Paddle operated.6. Pressure Rating: 250 psig.7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.

D. Pressure Switches:


a. AFAC Inc.b. Barksdale, Inc.c. Detroit Switch, Inc.d. Potter Electric Signal Company.e. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.f. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.g. United Electric Controls Co.h. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 346.3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.

E. Valve Supervisory Switches:




a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell company.b. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.c. Potter Electric Signal Company.d. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.

2. Standard: UL 346.3. Type: Electrically supervised.4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.

F. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches:


a. Potter Electric Signal Company.b. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.

2. Standard: UL 346.3. Type: Electrically supervised.4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.5. Design: Signals that controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully open position.

2.9 PRESSURE GAGES


1. Brecco Corporation.2. WIKA Instrument Corporation.3. Viking Corporation.

B. Standard: UL 393.

C. Dial Size: 3-1/2 to 4-1/2 inch diameter.

D. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig minimum.

E. Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.



3.2 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING

A. Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping for service entrance to building.

B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at connection to water-service piping.

C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water service.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.

C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint device materials and installation in NFPA 13.

D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.

E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13.

H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

I. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.

J. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and spill over floor drain or to outside building.

K. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

L. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.

M. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.

N. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.



O. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 21 Section "Common Work Results."

P. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 21 Section "Common Work Results."

Q. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 21 Section "Common Work Results."

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

1. Shop-weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.

I. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

3.5 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.



B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.

D. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

E. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

F. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

G. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

H. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels and center or quarter pointed in the long dimension.

B. Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.

C. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.

B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.


3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.



4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.6. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.

C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.

3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified fittings.

B. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Standard-weight schedule 40, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

2. Standard-weight schedule 40, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints.

C. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger, shall be one of the following:

1. Standard-weight, schedule 40 black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

2. Standard-weight, schedule 40 black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.a. Grooved joint fittings are acceptable, except tee fittings serving small branches or

single sprinkler heads shall be secured with a 2 bolt, cast iron strap. Branch fittings secured with sire straps are not permitted.

3. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints.

3.11 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers (wet/dry).3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers, Concealed.4. Rooms with Solid Surface Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers.

B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.



1. Upright Sprinklers: White in finished, public and occupied spaces to view; rough bronze in maintenance, loading dock and mechanical rooms spaces not exposed to public view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.

2. Ceiling Mounting in color (non-white) painted ceilings: Concealed Brass-finish, two piece, with 1 inch vertical adjustment.

3. Ceiling Mounting in white ceiling: Concealed White-plated steel, two piece, with 1 inch vertical adjustment.

4. Sidewall Mounting in white painted hard surfaces: Concealed Brass-finish two piece.5. Sidewall Mounting in color (non-white) painted hard surfaces: Concealed White-plated

steel two piece.

The contractor shall review the Architectural drawings for the scope of the color scheme and shall submit drawings clearly defining the color and installation type of the sprinkler heads on the documents. A sample of the color of heads and/or cover plates shall be submitted for approval.



21 3113 - 1 ELECTRICAL-DRIVE CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS

SECTION 21 3113 – ELECTRICAL-DRIVE CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Horizontal split-case fire pumps.2. Fire-pump accessories and specialties.


A. Seismic Performance: Fire pumps shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

B. Pump Equipment, Accessory, and Specialty Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum unless higher pressure rating is indicated.

C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 20.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, performance curves, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire pumps, motor drivers, and fire-pump accessories and specialties.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire pumps, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.



3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of fire pump, from manufacturer.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire pumps to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested fire-pump and driver unit.

B. Base: Fabricated and attached to fire-pump and driver unit with reinforcement to resist movement of pump during seismic events when base is anchored to building substrate.

C. Finish: Red paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested unit before shipping.

2.2 HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED, SINGLE-STAGE, SPLIT-CASE FIRE PUMPS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1. A-C Fire Pump Systems; a business of ITT Industries. (See schedule on plans)2. Peerless Pump Co.

B. Pump:

1. Standard: UL 448, for split-case pumps for fire service.2. Casing: Axially split case, cast iron with ASME B16.1 pipe-flange connections.3. Impeller: Cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft.4. Wear Rings: Replaceable bronze.5. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.

a. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing.b. Seals: Stuffing box with minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided

yarn and bronze packing gland.

6. Mounting: Pump and driver shafts are horizontal, with pump and driver on same base.

C. Coupling: Flexible and capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment. Include metal coupling guard.

D. Driver:

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1612&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd




1. Standard: UL 1004A.2. Type: Electric motor; NEMA MG 1, polyphase Design B.

2.3 FIRE-PUMP ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Inlet Fitting: Eccentric tapered reducer at pump suction inlet.

B. Outlet Fitting: Concentric tapered reducer at pump discharge outlet.

2.4 FIRE-PUMP ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Automatic Air-Release Valves: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation in fire-pump casing.

B. Circulation Relief Valves: UL 1478, brass, spring loaded; for installation in pump discharge piping.

C. Relief Valves:

1. Description: UL 1478, bronze or cast iron, spring loaded; for installation in fire-suppression water-supply piping.

D. Inlet Fitting: Eccentric tapered reducer at pump suction inlet.

E. Outlet Fitting: Concentric tapered reducer at pump discharge outlet.

F. Hose Valve Manifold Assembly:

1. Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 20.2. Header Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, with ends threaded

according to ASME B1.20.1.3. Header Pipe Fittings: ASME B16.4, galvanized cast-iron threaded fittings.4. Automatic Drain Valve: UL 1726.5. Manifold:

a. Test Connections: Comply with UL 405; however, provide outlets without clappers instead of inlets.

b. Body: Flush type, brass or ductile iron, with number of outlets required by NFPA 20.

c. Nipples: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe, with ends threaded according to ASME B1.20.1.

d. Adapters and Caps with Chain: Brass or bronze, with outlet threaded according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department threads. See plans for configuration.

e. Escutcheon Plate: Brass or bronze; rectangular.f. Hose Valves: UL 668, bronze, with outlet threaded according to NFPA 1963 and

matching local fire-department threads.g. Exposed Parts Finish: Polished brass or chrome plated.h. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Equivalent to "FIRE PUMP TEST."



2.5 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.


A. Testing: Test and inspect fire pumps according to UL 448 requirements for "Operation Test" and "Manufacturing and Production Tests."

1. Verification of Performance: Rate fire pumps according to UL 448.

B. Fire pumps will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment bases and anchorage provisions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of fire pumps.

B. Examine roughing-in for fire-suppression piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before fire-pump installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Fire-Pump Installation Standard: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation of fire pumps, relief valves, and related components.

B. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install fire pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic-control devices specified in

Section 21 0548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment."

C. Install fire-pump suction and discharge piping equal to or larger than sizes required by NFPA 20.

D. Support piping and pumps separately, so weight of piping does not rest on pumps.



E. Install valves that are same size as connecting piping

F. Install pressure gages on fire-pump suction and discharge flange pressure-gage tappings. Install piping hangers and supports, anchors, valves, gages, and equipment supports according to NFPA 20.

G. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not factory mounted. Furnish copies of manufacturers' wiring diagram submittals to electrical Installer.

H. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

3.3 ALIGNMENT

A. Align split-case pump and driver shafts after complete unit has been leveled on concrete base, grout has set, and anchor bolts have been tightened.

B. After alignment is correct, tighten anchor bolts evenly. Fill baseplate completely with grout, with metal blocks and shims or wedges in place. Tighten anchor bolts after grout has hardened. Check alignment and make required corrections.

C. Align piping connections.

D. Align pump and driver shafts for angular and parallel alignment according to HI 1.4 and to tolerances specified by manufacturer.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to pumps and equipment to allow service and maintenance.

B. Connect relief-valve discharge to drainage piping or point of discharge.

C. Connect flowmeter-system meters, sensors, and valves to tubing.

D. Connect fire pumps to their controllers.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for fire-pump marking according to NFPA 20.


A. Test each fire pump with its controller as a unit. Comply with requirements for electric-motor-driver fire-pump controllers specified in Section 26 2933 "Controllers for Fire-Pump Drivers."

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.



1. After installing components, assemblies, and equipment, including controller, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test according to NFPA 20 for acceptance and performance testing.3. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.4. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.5. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

D. Components, assemblies, and equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

F. Furnish fire hoses in number, size, and length required to reach storm drain or other acceptable location to dispose of fire-pump test water. Hoses are for tests only and do not convey to Owner.

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire pumps.



21 3400 - 1 PRESSURE MAINTENANCE PUMPS

SECTION 21 3400 – PRESSURE MAINTENANCE PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1. Multistage, pressure-maintenance pumps.


A. Pump Equipment, Accessory, and Specialty Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum unless higher pressure rating is indicated.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, performance curves, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire pumps, motor drivers, and fire-pump accessories and specialties.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire pumps, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




B. Product Certificates: For each type of fire pump, from manufacturer.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire pumps to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VERTICAL, MULTISTAGE, PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS

A. Manufacturers:

1. A-C Fire Pump; a Xylem Brand.2. Grundfos Pumps

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, multistage, barrel-type vertical pump as defined in HI 2.1-2.2 and HI 2.3; designed for surface installation with pump and motor direct coupled and mounted vertically.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Barrel: Stainless steel.2. Suction and Discharge Chamber: Cast iron with flanged inlet and outlet.3. Pump Head/Motor Mount: Cast iron.4. Impellers: Stainless steel, balanced, and keyed to shaft.5. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.6. Seal: Mechanical type with carbon rotating face and silicon-carbide stationary seat.7. Wear Rings: Teflon.8. Intermediate Chamber Bearings: Aluminum-oxide ceramic or bronze.9. Chamber-Base Bearing: Tungsten carbide.10. O-Rings: EPDM.


E. Motor: Single speed with permanently lubricated ball bearings and rigidly mounted to pump head. Comply with requirements in Section 210513 "Common Motor Requirements for Fire Suppression Equipment."

F. Power Cord: Factory-connected to motor for field connection to controller and at least 10 feet long.

G. Nameplate: Permanently attached to pump and indicating capacity and characteristics.

H. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Rated Capacity: See schedule on plans.2. Total Dynamic Head: See schedule on plans.3. Working Pressure: 175 psig minimum.4. Inlet and Outlet Size: NPS 1-1/4.5. Discharge and Suction Flanges: Class 250.6. Pump-Start, Pressure-Switch Setting: 130 PSI7. Pump-Stop, Pressure-Switch Setting: 145 PSI



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation of pressure-maintenance pumps.

B. Base-Mounted Pump Mounting: Install pumps on concrete bases. Comply with requirements for concrete bases specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.5. Attach pumps to equipment base using anchor bolts.

C. Install regenerative-turbine, pressure-maintenance pumps according to HI 1.4.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.


D. Pressure-maintenance pumps will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Lubricate pumps as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable pressure-switch ranges as indicated.



21 3900 - 1 CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE-PUMP DRIVERS

SECTION 21 3900 - CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE-PUMP DRIVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Full-service, full voltage controllers rated 600 V and less.2. Controllers for pressure-maintenance pumps.3. Remote alarm panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Automatic transfer switch(es).

B. ECM: Electronic control module.

C. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

D. N.O.: Normally open.


A. Seismic Performance: Fire-pump controllers and alarm panels shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.

1. Show tabulations of the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details.b. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 2.



c. Nameplate legends.d. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of integrated unit.e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices.f. Specified modifications.

2. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Schematic and Connection Diagrams: For power, signal, alarm, and control wiring and for pressure-sensing tubing.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For each type of product indicated, from manufacturer.




E. Product Certificates: For each type of product indicated, from manufacturer.

F. Manufacturer's factory test reports of fully assembled and tested equipment.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product indicated to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming microprocessor-based logic controls.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of an NRTL.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-pump controllers and all associated equipment from single source or producer.


D. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction pertaining to materials and installation.

E. Comply with NFPA 20 and NFPA 70.




A. Store controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

B. If stored in areas subject to weather, protect controllers from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers;


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 40 degrees F and not exceeding 122 degrees F unless otherwise indicated.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than fourteen (14) days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service, and comply with NFPA 70E.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, fire-pump equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required clearances for workspace and equipment access doors and panels. Ensure that controllers are within sight of fire-pump drivers.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FULL-SERVICE CONTROLLERS


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by one of the following:

1. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Firetrol Products.2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.3. Joslyn Clark Corporation.4. Metron, Inc.

C. General Requirements for Full-Service Controllers:

1. Comply with NFPA 20 and UL 218.2. Listed by an NRTL for electric-motor driver for fire-pump service.3. Combined automatic and nonautomatic operation.4. Factory assembled, wired, and tested; continuous-duty rated.5. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment.



D. Method of Starting:

1. Pressure-switch actuated.

a. Water-pressure-actuated switch and pressure transducer with independent high- and low-calibrated adjustments responsive to water pressure in fire-suppression piping.

b. System pressure recorder, electric ac driven, with spring backup.c. Programmable minimum-run-time relay to prevent short cycling.

2. Magnetic Controller: Across-the-line.3. Emergency Start: Mechanically operated start handle that closes and retains the motor

RUN contactor independent of all electric or pressure actuators.

E. Method of Stopping: Nonautomatic.

F. Capacity: Rated for fire-pump-driver horsepower and short-circuit-current (withstand) rating equal to or greater than short-circuit current available at controller location.

G. Method of Isolation and Overcurrent Protection: Interlocked isolating switch and nonthermal MCCB; with a common, externally mounted operating handle, and providing locked-rotor protection.

H. Door-Mounted Operator Interface and Controls:

1. Monitor, display, and control the devices, alarms, functions, and operations listed in NFPA 20 as required for drivers and controller types used.

2. Method of Control and Indication:

a. Microprocessor-based logic controller, with multiline digital readout.b. Membrane keypad.c. LED alarm and status indicating lights.

3. Local and Remote Alarm and Status Indications:

a. Controller power on.b. Motor running condition.c. Loss-of-line power.d. Line-power phase reversal.e. Line-power single-phase condition.

4. Audible alarm, with silence push button.5. Nonautomatic START and STOP push buttons or switches.

I. Optional Features:

1. Operator Interface Communications Ports: USB, Ethernet, and RS485.

2.2 CONTROLLERS FOR PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS


1. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Firetrol Products.



2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.3. Joslyn Clark Corporation.4. Metron, Inc.

B. General Requirements for Pressure-Maintenance-Pump Controllers:

1. Type: UL 508 factory assembled, -wired, and tested, across-the-line; for combined automatic and manual operation.

2. Enclosure: UL 508 and NEMA 250, Type 2 for wall-mounting.3. Factory assembled, wired, and tested.4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint.

C. Rate controller for scheduled horsepower and include the following:

1. Fusible disconnect switch.2. Pressure switch.3. Hand-off-auto selector switch.4. Pilot light.5. Running period timer.


A. Testing: Test and inspect fire-pump controllers according to requirements in NFPA 20 and UL 218.

1. Verification of Performance: Rate controllers according to operation of functions and features specified.

B. Fire-pump controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive equipment, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine equipment before installation. Reject equipment that is wet or damaged by moisture or mold.


3.2 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION

A. Install controllers within sight of their respective drivers.

B. Connect controllers to their dedicated pressure-sensing lines.



C. Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install controllers on walls with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor, and bottom of enclosure not less than 12 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. Bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

D. Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install controllers on 4-inch nominal-thickness concrete bases, using floor stands high enough so that the bottom of enclosure cabinet is not less than 12 inches above finished floor. Comply with requirements for concrete bases specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.


4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

F. Comply with NEMA ICS 15.

3.3 POWER WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install power wiring between controllers and their services or sources, and between controllers and their drivers. Comply with requirements in NFPA 20 and NFPA 70.

3.4 CONTROL AND ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between controllers and remote devices and facility's central monitoring system. Comply with requirements in NFPA 20, NFPA 70, and Division 26.

B. Install wiring between controllers and the building's fire-alarm system. Comply with requirements specified in Division 28 Section "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System."

C. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

D. Connect remote manual and automatic activation devices where applicable.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in NFPA 20 for marking fire-pump controllers.

B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification in NFPA 20 and as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."




A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Inspect and Test Each Component:

a. Inspect wiring, components, connections, and equipment installations. Test and adjust components and equipment.

b. Test insulation resistance for each element, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits.

c. Test continuity of each circuit.

2. Verify and Test Each Electric-Driver Controller:

a. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus 10 or minus 1 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages, with motors off. If outside this range for any motor, notify Construction Manager and Owner before starting the motor(s).

b. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.


E. Field Acceptance Tests:

1. Do not begin field acceptance testing until suction piping has been flushed and hydrostatically tested and the certificate for flushing and testing has been submitted to Construction Manager and Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Prior to starting, notify authorities having jurisdiction of the time and place of the acceptance testing.

3. Engage manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative to be present during the testing.

4. Perform field acceptance tests as outlined in NFPA 20.

F. Controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.



1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust controllers to function smoothly and as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, and timers.

C. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion.

D. Set field-adjustable pressure switches.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain controllers to use and reprogram microprocessor-based controls within this equipment.



23 0500 - 1 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

SECTION 23 0500 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Division 1 “General Conditions” apply to the work of this Section as if fully repeated herein.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other Division 23 Sections.

1. Materials and installation instructions common to mechanical systems.2. Pipe joining materials and methods.3. Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment.4. Non-shrink grout for equipment installations.5. Concrete base construction requirements.6. Selective Demolition.7. Cutting and patching.

B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in individual Division 21- 23 piping system Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces (Laboratories) and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.


A. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.



B. Welding: Qualify welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code – Steel.”

C. Welding: Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME “Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,” Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications.”

1. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series “Code for Pressure Piping.”2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding processes

involved and that certification is current.3. Contactor shall retain all welding certificates on file and produce them for review upon

request by the Owner and/or Owner’s representative.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor or roof, if stored thereupon.

C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.

D. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components.

B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations.

C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning before closing in building.

E. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

F. Coordinate connection of electrical services.

G. Dielectric fittings are not allowed. Install bronze shutoff valve where dissimilar metals are joined. Valve must be installed in an accessible area or above an access panel.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Identifying Devices and Labels:

a. Brady USA, Inc., Signmark Div.b. Brimar Industries, Inc.c. Kolbi Industries, Inc.d. Panduit Corp.e. Seton Name Plate Co.

2.2 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Divisions 23 piping Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

C. Pipe-Flange Joining Gaskets: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness, unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

1. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.2. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

D. Pipe-Flange Joining Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32 lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS

A. General: Manufacturer’s standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 21-23 Sections. If more than one type is specified for application, selection is installer’s option, but provide one selection for each product category.



B. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer’s standard preprinted, permanent adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl, complying with ASME A13.1.

C. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechanical identification, with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, lettering, and wording indicated for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.

1. Multiple Systems: If multiple systems of same generic name are indicated, provide identification that indicates individual system number and service such as “Boiler No. 3,” “Air Supply No. 1H,” or “Standpipe F12.”

2.5 CONCRETE AND GROUT

A. Concrete: For all minor concrete work required for mechanical installations, such as concrete equipment bases and supports, refer to Division 03 Sections for specification of cast-in-place concrete and reinforcing materials, whose requirements apply to the work of Division 23 as if fully reproduced herein.

B. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: ASTM C1107, Grade B.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psig (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.6 PAINTING AND FINISHING

A. For all painting and finishing work required for mechanical installations, as described in Part 3 of this Section and/or on the Drawings, refer to Division 09 Sections for specification of paint and finishing materials, whose requirements apply to the work of Division 23 as if fully reproduced herein.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL MECHANICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements.

B. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components.

C. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

D. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work.



F. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

G. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

H. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.

I. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise. Individual Division 23 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements.

B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping at indicated slope.

D. Install and arrange piping to permit valve servicing.

E. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

F. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and service areas.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.

J. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route piping to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

K. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch (25-mm) clearance around insulation.

L. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.

M. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

N. Install couplings according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

O. Piping Support: As specified in Division 23 Section “Hangers and Supports.”



P. All flexible pipe connectors shall be installed in accessible locations. Shut-off valve shall be installed between pipe main and flexible connector.

3.3 PIPING JOINING REQUIREMENTS

A. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping specification Sections.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B828 or CDA’s “Copper Tube Handbook,” using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS’s “Brazing Handbook,” “Pipe and Tube” Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.

2. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry seal threading is specified.

3. Align threads at point of assembly.4. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded.5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, “Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe,” using qualified processes and welding operators according to “Quality Assurance” Article.

1. Apply one coat of self-priming, rust-inhibitor paint around the entire circumference of each welded pipe joint; regardless of whether or not the piping is specified to be painted. Paint may be brush-applied, roller-applied, or spray-applied at contractor’s option.

H. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench.

I. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS (DN50) or smaller threaded pipe connection.

2. Install flanges, in piping 2½-inch NPS (DN65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.



3. Dry Piping Systems: Install brass shutoff valve to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install brass shutoff valve to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

5. Valve Caps: Any valve that represents a termination or the end of a run (e.g., blowdown or drain valve, hose-end valve, etc.) shall be fitted with a permanent but removable cap, plug, or blind flange matching the valve construction, to minimize risk in the event the valve is accidentally opened under pressure.

6. Connect copper branch lines to steel or iron mains as follows: Install steel branch pipe off main with black iron nipple connected to bronze ball valve. Connect bronze ball valve to copper piping with threaded copper male adaptor, which is then soldered to the copper branch line.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to equipment specifications in Division 23 and Division 26 for rough-in requirements.

C. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights are not indicated.

D. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Positive attachment and anchorage of all equipment to the structure or floor is required. Do not rely on friction or gravity as a means of attachment.

F. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

G. Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope.

H. Install flexible pipe connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts if possible.

1. Inlet and outlet of each pump.2. Where indicated elsewhere in these specifications.3. Where detailed on the Drawings.

I. Support for Suspended Equipment: As specified in Division 23 Section “Hangers and Supports.”

3.5 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow. Use plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot, uninsulated piping.

B. Locate pipe markers as follows if piping is exposed in finished spaces, machine rooms, and accessible maintenance spaces, such as shafts, tunnels, plenums, and exterior non-concealed locations:



1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark each pipe

at branch, if flow pattern is not obvious.3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, or enter non-accessible

enclosures.4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.6. Spaced at maximum of 50-foot (15-m) intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 25

feet (7.5 m) in congested areas of piping and equipment.7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced

markers.8. Plastic tape pipe markers: Maximum VOC limit 50g/L.

C. Install continuous plastic underground warning tapes during back filling of trenches for underground piping. Locate 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade, directly over piping.

D. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices as necessary for unobstructed view in finished construction.

3.6 CONCRETE BASES

A. Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit.

C. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of the base.

D. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

E. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer’s setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

F. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

G. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer’s written instructions.

H. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03.

3.7 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical work as indicated on the Drawings, and as required for installation of new work shown.

1. Coordinate with Division 26 for disconnection of power to electrically-powered equipment prior to demolition.



B. Remove accessible work in its entirety. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. Abandon in place embedded or buried work, unless noted otherwise.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

C. Removal: Unless otherwise indicated, remove demolished pipe, duct and equipment from the Project site. Handle and dispose of in accordance with National, State, and Local regulations.

1. Relocation: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational all work indicated for relocation.

2. Salvage: Remove and deliver to Owner all work indicated for salvage.

D. Refer to Division 01 Sections “Selective Demolition” and/or “Selective Structure Demolition” for additional requirements.

3.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. Perform cutting and patching in accordance with the following:

B. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations.

C. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:

1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.2. Remove and replace defective Work.3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents.4. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.

D. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, pumps, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work.

E. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

F. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.

G. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

H. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent installations.

I. Repair any building insulation or building fireproofing materials, whether new or existing, that are removed or scraped away in order to make a mechanical installation, so as to maintain an equivalent insulation or fire rating as existed without said mechanical installation.



J. Refer to Division 01 Sections “Execution” and/or “Cutting and Patching” for additional requirements.

3.9 GROUTING

A. Install nonmetallic, non-shrink, grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Mix grout according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

D. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. Place grout around anchors.

F. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer’s written instructions.



23 0529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

SECTION 23 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Division 1 “General Conditions” and Section 230500 “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” apply to the work of this Section as if fully repeated herein.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment, including but not limited to the following:

1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.2. Trapeze pipe hangers.3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.4. Fastener systems.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 23 Section “Mechanical Vibration Isolation” for vibration isolation devices.2. Division 23 Section “Metal Ducts” for duct hangers and supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, “Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports.”


A. If contractor elects to apply channel support systems and/or heavy-duty steel trapezes to support multiple pipes, in lieu of individual supports, then contractor is responsible for design of same capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

1. Design trapeze pipe hangers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Do not suspend pipe hangers and supports from roof deck. Suspend such loads from structural steel only, and provide structural steel sub-framing as required.



C. Do not suspend piping loads exceeding 500 pounds within any 100 square feet of contiguous area from supported concrete floor slabs. Suspend such loads from structural members only, and provide structural steel sub-framing as required.

D. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural Welding Code – Steel.”

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Manufactured Pipe Hangers:

a. Anvil International, Inc.b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.c. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc.d. Erico International Corp.e. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.f. Tolco division of Cooper B-Line, Inc.

2. Metal Framing Systems:

a. Anvil International, Inc.b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.c. Erico / Michigan Hanger Co.d. Thomas & Betts Corporation.e. Tolco division of Cooper B-Line, Inc.f. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:

a. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.b. Erico International Corp.c. PHS Industries, Inc.d. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

4. Powder-Actuated Fastener Systems:

a. Hilti, Inc.b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.c. Simpson Manufacturing Co.; Strong-Tie Anchor Systems Div.



2.2 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Application: Refer to “Hanger and Support Applications” Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types.

B. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot dipped.3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel unless

noted otherwise.

C. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel unless noted otherwise.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes, according to Standard MFMA-4.

B. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.

C. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.

D. Hanger Rods: As specified for Metal Pipe Hangers and Supports above.

E. Coatings: Manufacturer’s standard finish, unless otherwise noted. All exposed systems shall be provided with a Paint Coating. Paint color will be selected by Architect during shop drawing review.

1. Metallic Coating: Hot-dipped galvanized.2. Paint Coating: Polyester Powder Finish 3. Plastic Coating: PVC.



2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Piping Below Ambient Temperature: ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig (688-kPa) or ASTM C591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862-kPa) minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Piping At or Above Ambient Temperature: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psig (688-kPa) ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig (688-kPa) or ASTM C591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862-kPa) minimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2-inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE OF APPLICATIONS

A. Contractor shall provide Mechanical Framing Systems from beam to beam to maintain hanger support maximum span distances described below.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger and trapeze selections and applications that are not specified in this Section.

C. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

D. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

E. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments, or use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection, where hangers are in direct contact with copper tubing.

F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports for the first three hangers/supports or the first 50-feet (whichever is greater) adjacent to Pumps: Use spring hangers and supports. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports shall include the following types:



1. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.2. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.3. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.4. Exception: Spring hangers are not required adjacent to inline pumps that are smaller than

5-horsepower. Use other types of hangers and supports as listed for service below.

G. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports for individual, insulated pipe runs which are both 2½-inch diameter or larger and 20 feet or longer: Unless otherwise indicated, choose among the following types:

1. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes from two rods.2. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes from single rod.3. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): Where vertical adjustment is not necessary.4. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For vertical and lateral adjustment.5. Exception: Piping whose normal operating temperature is less than 150ºF (e.g., chilled

water) may be supported with static hangers specified in the next paragraph.

H. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports for individual pipe runs less than 20 feet long and all piping 2-inch diameter or smaller, regardless of length: Unless otherwise indicated, choose among the following types:

1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1).2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For pipes NPS 4 and larger.3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3).4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4).

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports for individual uninsulated pipe runs of any size or length: Unless otherwise indicated, choose among the following types:

1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1).2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For pipes NPS 4 and larger.3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3).4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4).5. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For pipes up to NPS 2 only.6. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For pipes up to NPS 2 only.7. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24).

J. Vertical-Piping Hangers and Supports for individual, insulated pipe runs which are both 2½-inch diameter or larger and 20 feet or longer: Use spring hangers and supports. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports shall include the following types:

1. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.2. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.3. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

K. Vertical-Piping Hangers and Supports for individual pipe runs less than 20 feet long and all piping 2-inch diameter or smaller, regardless of length: Unless otherwise indicated, choose among the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8).2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): Where longer ends are required.

L. Vertical-Piping Hangers and Supports for individual uninsulated pipe runs of any size or length: Unless otherwise indicated, choose among the following types:



1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8).2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): Where longer ends are required.

M. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated, choose among the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13).2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14).3. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16).4. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17).

N. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated, choose among the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to concrete ceiling.

2. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.3. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams.4. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.5. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by

using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

6. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel beams.7. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT MAXIMUM SPACING AND MINIMUM ROD SIZE

A. Install hangers and supports with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes.

B. Threaded or Welded Steel Piping for any Liquid-service piping systems:

1. NPS ½ (DN 15): Maximum span, 5 feet (1.5 m); minimum rod size, 3/8-inch (10 mm).2. NPS ¾ (DN 20): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, 3/8-inch (10 mm).3. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, 3/8-inch (10 mm).4. NPS 1¼ (DN 32): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, 3/8-inch (10 mm).5. NPS 1½ (DN 40): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8-inch (10 mm).6. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8-inch (10 mm).7. NPS 2½ (DN 65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m); minimum rod size, 1/2-inch (13 mm).8. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod size, 1/2-inch (13 mm).9. NPS 4 (DN 100): Maximum span, 14 feet (4.3 m); minimum rod size, 5/8-inch (16 mm).10. NPS 6 (DN 150): Maximum span, 17 feet (5.2 m); minimum rod size, 3/4-inch (19 mm).

C. Drawn-Temper Copper Piping for any liquid-service piping systems:

1. NPS ½ (DN 15): Maximum span, 4 feet (1.2 m); minimum rod size, 3/8-inch (10 mm).2. NPS ¾ (DN 20): Maximum span, 5 feet (1.5 m); minimum rod size, 3/8-inch (10 mm).3. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 6 feet (1.8 m); minimum rod size, 3/8-inch (10 mm).4. NPS 1¼ (DN 32): Maximum span, 6 feet (1.8 m); minimum rod size, 3/8-inch (10 mm).5. NPS 1½ (DN 40): Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8-inch (10 mm).6. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8-inch (10 mm).



D. Rod diameters may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10 mm) minimum rods.

E. Hanger and support spacing for piping and tubing not listed above shall be according to MSS SP-69 and piping manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

F. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

G. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2½ (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping.

K. Repair any building insulation or building fireproofing materials, whether new or existing, that are removed or scraped away in order to attach hangers and supports, so as to maintain an equivalent insulation or fire rating as existed without said hanger or support attachment.

L. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4-inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.



Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer’s operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.4 PROTECTION OF INSULATED PIPING:

A. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

1. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.2. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with

clamp sized to match OD of insert.

B. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

C. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clevis- and clamp-type supports may project through insulation.

1. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Insert shall be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation and length shall be at least as long as the protective shield. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

2. For piping on roller-type supports, install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, and fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

3. For pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger, include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-

insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

D. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Clevis- and clamp-type supports shall be sized for the outside diameter of the insulation including jacket. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

1. Pipe Sizes NPS 4 and larger: Include thermal-hanger shield inserts. Insert shall be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation and length shall be at least as long as the protective shield. Include steel weight-distribution plate if pipe is installed on rollers.

E. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

1. NPS 3½ (DN 90) and smaller: 12-inches (300 mm) long and 0.048-inch (1.22 mm) thick.2. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12-inches (300 mm) long and 0.06-inch (1.52 mm) thick.3. NPS 6 (DN 125 & 150): 18-inches (450 mm) long and 0.06-inch (1.52 mm) thick.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1½-inches (40 mm).

3.6 PAINTING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.



B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.



23 0700 - 1 MECHANICAL INSULATION

SECTION 23 0700 - MECHANICAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. “Division 1 “General Conditions” and Section 230500 “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” apply to the work of this Section as if fully repeated herein.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes mechanical insulation for ductwork, equipment, piping, and other installations, including the following:

1. Insulation Materials:

a. Flexible elastomeric.

2. Insulating cements.3. Adhesives.4. Mastics.5. Sealants.6. Field-applied jackets.7. Tapes.8. Securements.9. Corner angles.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ASJ: All-service jacket.

B. FSK: Foil, scrim, kraft paper.

C. SSL: Self-sealing lap.

D. Thermal Resistivity: “R-values” represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-value). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1-inch thick. Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot of material, in one hour, at a given mean temperature.

E. Refer to Division 23 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” for definitions of finished, interior, exterior, exposed, and concealed locations.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23 Section “Hangers and Supports.”

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, and equipment installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers:

1. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation:



a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock® Seam-Seal.d. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.

2. Insulating Cements: Same as insulation manufacturer, or

a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company.

3. Sealants, Adhesives and Mastics: Same as insulation manufacturer, or

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW.b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company.c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works.d. Marathon Industries, Inc.e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.f. Vimasco Corporation.

4. Field-Applied Jackets: Same as insulation manufacturer, or

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW.b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.c. PABCO Metals Corporation.d. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.e. Polyguard.f. Proto PVC Corporation.g. RPR Products, Inc.h. Speedline Corporation.

5. Tapes: Same as insulation manufacturer, or

a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division.b. Compac Corp.c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company.d. Venture Tape.

6. Bands and Wire: Same as insulation manufacturer, or

a. ACS Industries, Inc.b. C & F Wire.c. Childers Products.d. PABCO Metals Corporation.e. RPR Products, Inc.

2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Refer to Schedule in Part 3 for requirements about where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.



D. Adhesives shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.28 average maximum at 75ºF mean temperature.2. Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

2.3 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C195.

B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C196.

C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C449/C 449M.

2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180ºF (Minus 29 to plus 82 C).3. Solids Content: ASTM D1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.4. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F1249, 3 perms (2 metric perms) at 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) dry film thickness.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200ºF (Minus 29 to plus 93 C).3. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.4. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300ºF (Minus 73 to plus 149 C).4. Color: White or gray.

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.



2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250ºF (Minus 40 to plus 121 C).4. Color: White.

2.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

1. Adhesive: Compatible with PVC, as recommended by jacket material manufacturer.2. Color: Finish color shall be selected by Owner during shop drawing review process and

shall be selected from manufacturer’s standard color chart which shall offer at a minimum eight (8) standard colors to include primary colors and white, beige, brown and black.

3. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.4. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions,

reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

5. Fire Ratings: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, per ASTM E 84.

2.7 TAPES

A. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Width: 2-inches (50 mm).2. Thickness: 6 mils (0.15 mm).3. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch (0.7 N/mm) in width.4. Elongation: 500 percent.5. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch (3.3 N/mm) in width.6. Maximum VOC limit of 50g/L.

2.8 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020-inch (0.51 mm) thick, ½-inch (13 mm) wide with wing or closed seal.

2.9 CORNER ANGLES

A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils (0.8 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1-inch (25 by 25 mm), PVC according to ASTM D1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.



3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4-inches (100 mm) o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1½-inches (38 mm). Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2-inches (50 mm) o.c.

4. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.5. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer

to maintain vapor seal.6. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and

at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4-inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. At the following locations, omit jacket and provide a separate cutaway removable segment of insulation clearly labeled “Access.” For below-ambient services, provide a design that allows access but maintains vapor barrier.

1. Vibration-control devices.2. Testing agency labels and stamps.3. Nameplates and data plates.4. Cleanouts.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Pumps:

1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch (150-mm) centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism.

2. Fabricate boxes from aluminum or stainless steel, at least 0.040-inch (1.0 mm) thick.



3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.

3.5 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with tape or bands and tighten without deforming insulation materials. If furnished in half sections, orient longitudinal joints at 3 and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe.

2. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints.3. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions

with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with

outward clinched staples at 6-inches (150 mm) o.c.5. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple

longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. Vapor barrier must be continuous.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation, not to exceed 1½-inch (38-mm) thickness.3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1-inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

3. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

E. Insulation Installation on Valves, Strainers, Unions, and Specials:

1. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.



2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation over valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

5. Insulate unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

6. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

7. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

8. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word “UNION.” Match size and color of pipe labels.

F. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

G. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2-inches (50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

H. Special Requirements for Flexible Elastomeric Insulation Installation: Seal all transverse seams, longitudinal seams, end joints, and section joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.



I. All interior piping, exposed to view in occupied areas, shall be provided with field applied jacket to match surroundings. Refer to Drawings for specific area requirements.

J. All interior piping that is exposed in mechanical rooms (attic mechanical room) and within 6’-0” of the finished floor, shall have an aluminum jacket installed.

K. Provide removable covers and insulation on strainers and manual or automatic flow control valves.

L. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with a single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.

M. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together and seal to ensure a complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

N. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage.

O. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer’s option) except where specific form or type is indicated.

P. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

Q. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts.

R. Replace insulation damaged during construction which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.

S. Insulation installer shall advice Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.

T. No wood insert for pipe hangers. Use only inert materials.

3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

3.7 FINISHES

A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.



3.8 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Insulate equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.

C. Chilled-water pump insulation shall be flexible elastomeric, 1-inch (25 mm) thick.

D. Chilled-water air-separator insulation shall be any of the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1-inch (25 mm) thick.

3.9 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Cold Surfaces: For piping surfaces operating below surrounding ambient temperature, all piping surfaces including but not limited to pipe, flanges, fittings, valves of every kind, strainers, unions, and other appurtenances shall be insulated and shall include uninterrupted vapor barrier to avoid potential condensation.

B. Provide removable covers and insulation on strainers and manual or automatic flow control valves.

3.10 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE, INDOORS

A. Chilled Water, above 40ºF (5 C):

1. NPS 1¼ (DN 30) and Smaller: Insulation shall be any of the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1-inch (25 mm) thick.

2. NPS 1½ (DN 40) and Larger: Insulation shall be any of the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric Type II: 1½-inches (38 mm) thick.

B. Blowdowns, and Vents: For all pipe sizes, insulation Flexible Elastomeric: ¾-inch (19 mm) thick.

3.11 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over all insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. Apply the following field jackets on all insulation:

1. Piping: PVC, 30 mils (0.8 mm) thick.

C. All piping at all levels shall be provided with PVC jacketing in exposed occupied areas. Third floor shell spaces shall be considered exposed occupied areas. All piping in all Mechanical Rooms installed from floor to 72 inches above the floor shall have an aluminum jacketing



23 2113 - 1 HYDRONIC PIPING

SECTION 23 2113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following:

1. Chilled-water piping.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 23 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” for general piping materials and installation requirements, and for labeling and identifying hydronic piping.

2. Division 23 Section “Hangers and Supports” for pipe supports, product descriptions, and installation requirements. Hanger and support spacing is specified in this Section.

3. Division 23 Section “Hydronic Pumps” for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure (formerly WOG – Water, Oil, Gas working pressure).

B. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS).

C. Class 125: Minimum 125-psig (860-kPa) SWP and minimum 200-psig (1380-kPa) CWP ratings.

D. Class 150: Minimum 150-psig (1035-kPa) SWP and minimum 300-psig (2070-kPa) CWP ratings.


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature:

1. Chilled-Water Piping: 150 psig (1030 kPa) at 200ºF (93 C).2. Blowdown-Drain Piping: 200ºF (93 C).3. Air-Vent Piping: 200ºF (93 C).




A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural Welding Code - Steel.”

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

1. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.

C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping,” for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air/dirt separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code. Do not route piping directly above electric panelboards and switchboards, or other prohibited locations.

E. Buy-American: All piping shall be furnished from domestic sources (USA).

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system components with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.

C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Refer to Part 3 “Piping Applications” Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials, including a schedule of which types of piping to use in which application.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L (ASTM B88M, Type B).

B. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B306, Type DWV.

C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

D. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32, 95-5 tin antimony.



F. Field or shop fabricated fittings are not allowed. Pulled-tees or pipe fittings using “T-Drill” are not allowed.


A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, black steel with plain ends; Type E (Electric-resistance welded), Grade B, Schedule 40; unless otherwise indicated in Part 3 “Piping Applications” Article.

B. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A53/A53M black steel, Grade B, Schedule 40; unless otherwise indicated in Part 3 “Piping Applications” Article.

C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150 or 300 as indicated in Part 3 “Piping Applications” Article.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Class 150, 250, or 300 as indicated in Part 3 “Piping Applications” Article.

E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125 or 250 as indicated in Part 3 “Piping Applications” Article; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.

F. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe. All elbows shall be long-radius type.

G. Wrought Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1.2. End Connections: Butt welding.3. Facings: Raised face.

H. Grooved Mechanical Joint Fittings and Couplings are not allowed.

2.4 SPECIALTIES

A. Refer to Division 23 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” for joining materials, transition fittings, and dielectric fittings. Those requirements apply to the work of this Section as if fully reproduced herein.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SCHEDULE OF APPLICATIONS

A. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2½ (DN 65) and larger, shall be Standard Weight steel pipe; wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints. All elbows shall be long-radius type.

B. Blowdown drain piping installed aboveground shall be Type L (B), drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

C. Air-Vent Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which air vent is installed.



3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. General: General piping installation is specified in Division 23 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods,” whose requirements apply to the work of this Section as if fully repeated herein.

B. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS ¾ (DN 20) ball valve, and short NPS ¾ (DN 20) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

C. In closed systems, install horizontal piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

D. Bull-head tees prohibited: Do not use tee fittings in such a way that the flow through the branch leg equals the sum of the flows through two main legs.

E. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

F. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the top of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.

G. Changes of direction, branches, tees, etc. shall be accomplished with the appropriate factory or foundry fitting meeting the requirements of these specifications. Mechanically-formed extruded tee outlets or field-fabricated tee branches and/or elbows are not acceptable.

H. All elbows shall be long-radius type.

I. Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.”

J. Hang, support, and anchor all piping as specified in Division 23 Section “Hangers and Supports.”

K. Connect copper branch lines to steel or iron mains as follows: Install steel branch pipe off main with black iron nipple connected to bronze ball valve. Connect bronze ball valve to copper piping with threaded copper male adaptor, which is then soldered to the copper branch line.

L. Branch connections shall be made with straight tees, reducing tees, threadolets, or weldoles.

M. Tap side of weldolet or threadolet to be no more than 1/3 of the sizes of tapped pipe.

N. Flanges shall be flat face when mating with 125 lb class cast iron valves.

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 23 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” for joint construction requirements for soldered joints in copper tubing; threaded, welded, and flanged joints in steel piping.

B. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, “Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe,” using qualified processes and welding operators according to “Quality Assurance” Article.



1. Apply one coat of self-priming, rust-inhibitor paint around the entire circumference of each welded pipe joint; regardless of whether or not the piping is specified to be painted. Paint may be brush-applied, roller-applied, or spray-applied at contractor’s option.

3.4 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

B. Install ¾ inch ball valve with hose bib connection at all locations were a manual air vent is installed as indicated on Drawings.


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Notify Owners Representative 72 hours before required testing. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner Representative.

2. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens.4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

6. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. Do not pressure test with air.

7. Pressure gauge shall be a minimum 4 inch dial face, 0-160 psig, and shall be calibrated within one year to test date.

8. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

9. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.10. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system’s working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times “SE” value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping.”

11. Minimum duration of test shall be four (4) hours. During the final hour of the hydrostatic test, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

12. Prepare written report of testing.13. Minimum test pressure shall be 100 PSIG.14. System shall be operated for a minimum of 24 hours to demonstrate to the Owner’s

Representative that system is complete and operational.

B. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully.2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation.3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure.



4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).

5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,

cooling towers, to specified values.7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.

C. System shall be operational for a minimum of 24 hours to demonstrate to the Owner’s Representative that system is complete and operational.

3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.



23 2123 - 1 HYDRONIC PUMPS

SECTION 23 2123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 26 Sections for power-supply wiring, field-installed disconnects, required electrical devices, and motor controllers.


A. Temporarily store pumps in dry location prior to installation in new location, as shown on the Drawings.

B. Cover open ends of pipes during storage. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer’s written rigging instructions.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Examine roughing-in



for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation. Examine foundations for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 CONCRETE BASES

A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps and controllers. Refer to Division 23 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.”

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.


4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

B. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 03.

3.3 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Install pumps according to manufacturer’s written installation and alignment instructions. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install pumps in locations indicated and arranged to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

D. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling before setting. Do not reconnect couplings until alignment procedure is complete.

1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal wedges with small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to 1½ inches (19 to 38 mm) between pump base and foundation for grouting.

2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check coupling faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level and plumb.

3.4 ALIGNMENT AND GROUTING

A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundation, grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and piping connections have been made.

B. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified in HI 1.1-1.5, “Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation.”

C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers’ written instructions. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly.



D. Completely fill baseplate with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts. Grout is specified in Division 23 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.”

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect piping to pumps. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles. Install valves, flexible pipe connectors, gages, and specialty fittings on suction and discharge side of pumps as indicated by details on the Drawings.

C. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices. Connect wiring and ground equipment according to Division 26 Sections.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Final Checks Before Startup: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and checks before startup:

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer’s written instructions.2. Check piping connections for tightness.3. Clean strainers on suction piping.4. Lubricate bearings.5. Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers, flush bearings with kerosene, and clean

thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer’s recommendations.6. Disconnect coupling and check motor for proper rotation that matches direction marked

on pump casing.7. Check that pumps are free to rotate by hand. Pumps for handling hot liquids shall be free

to rotate with pump hot and cold. Do not operate pump if it is bound or even drags slightly until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

8. Check that pump controls are correct for required application.9. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power.10. Prime pumps, opening suction valve, closing drains, and preparing pumps for operation.11. Start motors.12. Open discharge valves slowly.13. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.14. When pumps are to be started against closed check valves with discharge shutoff valves

open, steps are the same, except that discharge valves are opened sometime before motors are started.



26 0500 - 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELCTRICAL

SECTION 26 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical installations and includes requirements common to all sections of Division 26. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 00. This section is also applicable to Division 28 “Electronic Safety and Security”.

B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including general and supplementary conditions and specification sections Divisions 00 through 01, apply to this Section.

C. Codes and Standards: All equipment, material and installations shall comply with applicable codes, standards, and installation practices. Comply with the requirements of the applicable local building codes, the applicable NEC, all local rules and regulations including those of the fire authorities. Comply with all applicable NFPA standards. All material and equipment shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) standard that is applicable for the specific purpose of the material and equipment. The National Electrical Code, National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) Standards, and applicable ANSI and IEEE standards shall apply to the pertinent materials, equipment, and installation practices. Testing shall be in accordance with the applicable International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) standards.

1. These specifications include references to the 2014 edition of the NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code." Where a different edition of the NEC has been adopted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction, the references associated with that edition of the Code shall be applicable.

1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. The word “furnish” means supply for use, the word “install” means connect up complete and ready for operation, and the word “provide” means to supply for use and connect up complete and ready for operation.

B. Provide all new materials as indicated on the drawings and specifications and all items required to make the electrical system complete and in working order.

C. System descriptions included in scope of work are as follows:

1. Electrical power systems, including luminaires, distribution equipment, wiring devices, etc.

2. Electrical power distribution service from the PCCLC transformer.3. Grounding system.4. Fire alarm system.5. Wiring of equipment furnished by the Owner or other Divisions.6. Selective demolition work and modification of existing systems and equipment.



1.3 WORK SEQUENCE

A. All work that produces excessive noise or interference with normal building operations shall be coordinated and scheduled with the Owner. Such work may require scheduling of work after occupied hours or weekends. The Owner reserves the right to determine when such work is conducted.


A. Responsibility Prior to Submitting Pricing or Bid Data:

1. Thoroughly review the contract documents and specifications and visit the site prior to issuing bid. Resolve all reported deficiencies with the Engineer prior to awarding any subcontracts, ordering material, or starting any work.

B. Qualifications:

1. Only products of specified manufacturers, or approved equals as determined by the Engineer, are acceptable.

2. Employ only workmen who are skilled in their trades.

C. Compliance with Codes, Laws, and Ordinances:

1. Conform to all requirements of the state, city and local codes, laws and ordinances and other regulations having jurisdiction over this installation.

2. Conform to all written standards of the University of Missouri.3. If there are any discrepancies between the codes and regulations and these

specifications, the Engineer shall determine the method or equipment to be used.4. Inform the Engineer in writing, requesting a clarification at the time of the bidding, if any

parts of the drawings or specifications are found not to comply with the codes or regulations. Submit a separate price to make the system comply if there is insufficient time for this procedure.

5. Inform the Engineer in writing requesting a clarification if there is any discrepancy between a manufacturer’s recommendation and these specifications.

6. Follow the current issue of NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code” if there are no local codes having jurisdiction.

D. Examination of Drawings:

1. The drawings for the indicated work are diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the electrical work and to indicate the general arrangements and locations of equipment, wiring devices, etc., and the approximate sizes of equipment. Field verification of dimensions on plans is required. The actual conditions, including heights, lengths and orientation shall be the basis of the work.

2. The architectural, mechanical and electrical drawings and specifications shall be considered as mutually explanatory and complementary. Any electrical work called for by one and not by the other shall be performed as though required by all. All sections and subsections of the Electrical work shall be governed by and subject to the general and supplementary conditions. Report any discrepancies in or between the drawings and specifications, or between the drawings and actual field conditions to the Engineer in sufficient time to issue an addendum for clarification.

3. Determine the exact locations for equipment and rough-ins, and the exact routing of raceways.

4. Do not scale drawings to determine equipment and system locations.



5. Not all required components are shown on the documents, including junction boxes, pull boxes, conduit fittings, etc. Provide all components required for proper installation of the work.

6. Any item either shown on the drawings or called for in the specifications shall be included in this contract.

7. Determine quantities and quality of material and equipment required from the documents. Provide the more expensive or higher quality amount where discrepancies arise among drawings, schedules or specifications.

E. Electronic Media and Files:

1. Electronic media files of the contract drawings in AutoCAD or PDF format and copies of the specifications in PDF format may be requested.

2. Complete and return a signed “Electronic File Transmittal” form provided by Ross & Baruzzini upon request for electronic media,

3. Obtain approval from the appropriate Design Professional for use of their part of the documents if the information requested includes information prepared by other than Ross & Baruzzini.

4. The electronic contract documents may be used for preparation of shop drawings and record drawings only. The information may not be used in whole or in part for any other project.

5. The drawings prepared by Ross & Baruzzini for bidding purposes may not be used directly for raceway layout drawings or coordination drawings.

6. The use of these documents does not allow relief from the responsibility for coordination of work with other trades and verification of space available for the installation.

7. The information is provided to expedite the project with no guarantee by Ross & Baruzzini as to the accuracy or correctness of the information provided. Ross & Baruzzini accepts no responsibility or liability for the use of the provided information.

1.5 ROUGH-IN


B. Coordinate equipment rough-in requirements with Divisions 02 through 28.

1.6 SUBMITTAL REVIEW RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Ensure that all submittals have been reviewed for total completeness and accuracy as to the requirements of the specifications and drawings before being submitted to the Engineer for review. The Contractor’s approval stamp is required on all submittals before submittal to the Engineer. Approval will indicate the Contractor’s review of all material and a complete understanding of exactly what is to be furnished. Clearly mark all deviations from the contract documents on all submittals. The item shall be required to meet all drawing and specification requirements if deviations are not clearly marked.

1. The Engineer shall review each submittal no more than two times and return to the submitter with the appropriate disposition.

2. If the Engineer is required to review a submittal a second time, it will be limited to review of the changed information, which must clearly be highlighted by the submitter. The submittal will be returned to the submitter with the appropriate disposition.



3. If the submittal is required to be reviewed a third time, it shall be done at the expense of the submitter. Charges for this additional submittal review will be calculated based on the Engineer’s standard hourly rates, as defined in their contract with the Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT, DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage and handling. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage.

B. Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations. Review the site prior to bid for path locations and any required building modifications to allow movement of equipment.

C. Exercise care in transporting and handling to avoid damage to materials. Store materials on the site to prevent damage.

D. Keep all materials clean, dry and free from damaging environments.


A. Miscellaneous Materials Include:

1. Miscellaneous metals for support of electrical materials and equipment.2. Wood grounds, nailers, blocking, fasteners and anchorage for support of electrical

materials and equipment.3. Sealers for sealing around electrical materials and equipment; and for sealing

penetrations in floors and walls.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. All lumber shall be fire-treated.

B. Framing Materials: Standard Grade, light-framing-size lumber of any species. Number 3 Common or Standard Grade boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or Number 3 boards complying with SPIB rules. Lumber shall be preservative-treated in accordance with AWPB LP-2, and kiln-dried to a moisture content of not more than 19 percent.

2.2 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:



a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”

2.3 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Provide products by one of the following

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. GPT Link-Seald. Metraflex Co.e. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

5. Place head end of bolts on accessible side of wall to allow for future adjustments.

2.4 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounted items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.



D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right-of-Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

F. Jobsite Safety: The Contractor is the sole entity responsible for jobsite safety.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and application of sealants and access panels. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Install equipment and materials in accordance with manufacturer instructions and the requirements in Section 20 0800 "Seismic Protection."

3.3 ROUGH-IN


B. Coordinate equipment rough-in requirements with Divisions 02 through 28.

3.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components.

B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for electrical installations.

D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

E. Sequence, coordinate and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building.

F. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

G. Install systems, materials and equipment to conform to project requirements and approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Engineer.



H. Systems, materials and equipment which will be exposed in finished areas shall be installed level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components.

I. Install electrical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned.

J. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. Maintain code clearances in front of and about all electrical equipment. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting with minimum of interference with other installations.

K. Coordinate the installation of electrical materials and equipment above ceilings with suspension system, mechanical equipment and systems and structural components.

L. Include in the Work all labor, materials, equipment, services, apparatus and drawings (in addition to the Contract Documents) as required to complete the intended Work.

M. Control and interlock wiring shall be installed in a separate raceway and shall not be installed in the same raceway as power conductors.

N. Only new, clean and perfect equipment, apparatus, materials and supplies of latest design and manufacture shall be incorporated in the Work in order to assure an electrical system of high quality.

O. The Work required in order to obtain utility services such as telephone and electric, is delineated in these specifications and on the drawings. Unless otherwise noted, construction or connection charges (except for temporary power) by those companies shall be paid by the Owner.

P. Determine electrical utility elevations prior to installation and coordinate with other trades. Installation priorities at a minimum shall be as follows:

1. Luminaires.2. Gravity flow piping, including steam and condensate.3. Electrical bus duct.4. Sheet metal.5. Cable trays, including access space.6. Other piping.7. Conduits and wireway.

3.5 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT AND APPLIANCES

A. In many instances the drawings show an outlet box and power supply for specific equipment, be it Owner- or Contractor-furnished. It is to be understood, unless otherwise noted, that the Work includes a connection from the box to the equipment or appliance. Verify circuit conductor quantities and sizes and overcurrent device number of poles and rating as well as any special grounding requirements, for all Owner-furnished equipment and adjust the required work accordingly.

B. Owner Furnished Equipment:

1. Install and connect Owner-supplied items electrical items indicated on Architectural Equipment Plans and Schedules even if not shown on the electrical plans. Connect all



Owner-supplied items requiring electrical connections, whether or not shown on the electrical plans. Make all electrical system connections required for fully functional units.

2. The Owner will supply manufacturer’s installation data for new equipment purchased by owner for this project.

3. Repair all damage to Owner-furnished equipment caused during installation, to the satisfaction of the Owner.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 01 Section "Execution." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, the following requirements apply:

1. Perform cutting, fitting and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to:

a. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.b. Remove and replace defective Work.c. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract

Documents.d. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.e. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.f. Cut, remove, and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, components,

and materials as indicated, including but not limited to, removal of electrical items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by the new Work.

2. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of electrical equipment and materials.

a. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.

b. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code."

3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking and anchorage accurately in location, alignment and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.



3.9 APPLICATION OF SEALERS

A. General: Comply with sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

1. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric sealants.

B. Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

3.10 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.



M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.11 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve.

B. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

C. Install in concrete slabs and walls and all other fire-rated floors and walls for raceways and cable installations. Provide insulated bushings at each end of sleeve. For sleeves through fire rated-wall or floor construction, apply UL-listed firestopping sealant in gaps between sleeves and enclosed conduits and cables.

1. Conduit Seals: Install seals for conduit penetrations of slabs on grade and exterior walls below grade and where indicated. Tighten sleeve seal screws until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal.

3.12 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply rated firestopping sealants at all penetrations of fire and smoke walls; at all penetrations of floors and at other locations as noted on the drawings or where required by Code. Consider walls that are common to different abutting buildings, to different additions to buildings, and to fire and smoke separations within buildings as requiring firestopping sealant. Refer to architectural drawings. For existing buildings where fire separations are not noted on any drawings, use reasonable logic as to which separations are fire-rated. When in doubt, consult with Engineer or Architect.

B. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.13 PAINTING

A. Paint all electrical equipment that is marred or damaged prior to the Owner’s acceptance. Paint and color shall match original equipment paint and shall be obtained from the equipment supplier if available. All equipment shall have a finished coat of paint applied unless specifically allowed to be provided with a prime coat only.

3.14 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Thoroughly clean all equipment and systems prior to the Owner’s final acceptance of the project.

B. Clean all foreign paint, grease, oil, dirt, labels, stickers, etc., from all equipment.

C. Remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated during construction from the premises.



D. Refer to the Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general requirements for final cleaning.

3.15 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the installation of all equipment, controls, devices, etc., with other trades to maintain clear access area for servicing.

B. Install all equipment to maximize access to parts needing service or maintenance. Review the final location, placement and orientation of equipment with the Owner’s representative prior to setting equipment.

C. Include removal and reinstallation of equipment and devices if they were installed without regard to coordination of access requirements and without previous confirmation with the Owner’s representative.

3.16 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING

A. The electrical systems shall be complete and operating. Include system start-up, testing, balancing and satisfactory system performance. This includes all calibration and adjustment of electrical controls, balancing of loads, troubleshooting and verification of software, and final adjustments that may be needed.

B. All operating conditions and control sequences shall be tested during the start-up period. Testing all interlocks, safety shut-downs, controls and alarms.

1. Utilize only skilled technicians to ensure that all systems perform properly. Reimburse the Owner on a time and materials basis for services rendered at the Engineer’s standard hourly rates in effect when the services are requested if the Engineer is requested to visit the job site for troubleshooting, assisting in start-up, obtaining satisfactory equipment operation, resolving installation, workmanship problems, equipment substitution issues or unsatisfactory system performance, including call backs during the warranty period, through no fault of the design. Pay the Owner for services required that are project-, installation- or workmanship-related. Payment is due within 30 days after services are rendered.


A. General:

1. All required equipment and systems tests shall be made during and post-Construction as required.

2. All required testing instruments, meters, etc., shall be provided. 3. Technicians operating testing equipment shall be trained in testing procedures. 4. Testing shall confirm that equipment and systems provided by the Contractor have been

installed properly.5. Unsatisfactory test results shall result in revisions or replacement of equipment or

settings as required to provide a system capable of meeting test requirements. Tests shall be repeated or additional tests made as necessary to confirm system capability as required by the Owner, Engineer or Authority Having Jurisdiction.



3.18 EXCAVATION, FILL, BACKFILL, COMPACTION, AND RESTORATION

A. General:

1. Prior to any excavation or digging, verify all underground utility locations. Contact all location services with sufficient time allowance for completion of utility location documentation.

2. Unless noted otherwise provide all excavation, fill, backfill, compaction and restoration required for the scope of work.

B. Excavation:

1. Excavations shall be made to proper dimensions and to accurate, solidate and undisturbed earth.

2. Provide all excavations that exceed the depth requirements with concrete of the same characteristics for foundations or compacted sand gravel fill. The type of fill shall be determined by the Engineer.

3. Do not damage surrounding structures, equipment or buried pipe. Do not undermine footing or foundation.

4. Protect all excavations to prevent cave-ins and risk to workmen.5. Saw-cut pavement or concrete surfaces where required for excavation with clean edges.6. Notify Engineer if bearing soil is not found to be adequate and halt excavation operation

until given direction from the Architect or Engineer.7. Confirm the soil conditions at their own cost. Excavations shall be conducted as required

in the documents.8. A compacted bed of sand and gravel (minimum of 3 inches deep) shall be provided

where trench is excavated in rock.

C. Dewatering:

1. All trenches and pits shall be kept free of accumulation of water. Provide all required equipment.

D. Underground Obstructions:

1. The electrical drawings do not necessarily show all underground piping, conduit, feeders, foundations, and other obstructions in the vicinity of the construction. Review the documents of all Divisions to determine other obstructions. Take applicable precautions in making installations near underground obstructions.

2. If objects not indicated on the drawings are encountered, remove, relocate or perform extra work as indicated by the Engineer.

E. Fill and Backfilling:

1. Furnish all necessary sand and material for backfilling. Waste material and garbage are not acceptable materials.

2. Remove excess excavated earth as directed.3. Backfill materials shall be suitable for required compaction, clean and free of perishable

materials, frozen earth, debris, earth with a high void content, and stones greater than 4 inches in diameter. Water is not permitted to remain in un-backfilled trenches.

4. All trenches and excavations shall be backfilled immediately after completion of conduit installation or forms removal unless otherwise noted.

5. Areas around piers, independent foundations or structures shall have backfilled on all sides to prevent displacement. Fill and backfill shall be spread uniformly.



6. All conduits that are not concrete encased shall be provided with a bed of a minimum of 3 inches depth of compacted sand. Backfill shall be provided with compacted layers above the conduits.

7. Provide sand backfill to grade for all conduits under slabs or paved areas. All other conduits shall have sand backfill to 6 inches above the top of the conduit.

8. Backfill shall be made in layers of sand not exceeding 6 inches in depth. 9. Protect surface to prevent loads from the top of the surface for a minimum of 48 hours

after backfilling operation.

F. Surface Restoration:

1. Areas shall be restored to the original condition, including areas that are landscaped. Replace all planting and landscaping features removed or damaged to its original condition. At least 6 inches of topsoil shall be applied where disturbed areas are to be seeded or sodded. All lawn areas shall be sodded unless seeding is called out in the drawings or specifications.

2. Concrete or asphalt type pavement and other surfaces removed or damaged shall be replaced to original condition. Broken edges shall be saw cut and repaired as directed by Architect or Engineer.



26 0519 - 1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

SECTION 26 0519 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Conductors and Cables.2. Remote Control and Signal Cable.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for approval by the Engineer are not required for this section. Unrequested submittals will not be processed or reviewed. Non-requirement of submittals is not to be construed as an allowance for substitutions and does not allow relief from full compliance with the contract documents.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code.”

1. Conform to applicable codes and regulations regarding toxicity of combustion products of insulating materials.

C. UL Compliance: Provide components which are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories under the following standards.

1. UL Std. 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables.2. UL Std. 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors.

D. NEMA and ICEA Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standards:

1. WC-70: Power Cables Rated 2,000V or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy.

E. IEEE Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standard.

1. Std. 82: Test procedures for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.2. General Cable Corporation.3. Senator Wire & Cable Company.4. Southwire Company.5. Cerro Wire.6. Superior Essex.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW, THHN-THWN, and XHHW.

2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. General: Provide wire and cable suitable for the temperature, conditions and location where installed.

B. Feeders: Copper, 600 volt insulation. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

C. Branch Circuits: Copper, 600 volt insulation. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

D. Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation.

E. Wire for the following specialized systems shall be as shown on drawings or as dictated within these specifications. Where not designated, the systems manufacturer’s recommendations shall be adhered to for the following systems:

1. Fire Alarm.

F. Single Conductors for Feeders and Branch Circuits:

1. Stranding: Provide solid conductors for branch circuits and non-vibrating power utilization equipment utilizing Number 10 AWG and smaller. Provide stranded conductors for Number 8 AWG and larger. Provide stranded conductors, regardless of size, for connections to vibrating equipment such as motors and transformers.

2.3 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE

A. Control Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 600 volt insulation, rated 60 degrees C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a PVC jacket.



B. Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 300 volt insulation, rated 60 degrees C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a PVC jacket; UL listed.

C. Plenum Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 300 volt insulation, rated 60 degrees C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded and covered with a nonmetallic jacket; UL listed for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums.

2.4 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type and class for application and service required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR INSULATION, APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, Raised Flooring and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade and Underground: Type THWN, single conductors in raceway.

D. Exposed, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

E. Class 1 Control Circuits: Install per NEC Article 725.

F. Class 2 Control Circuits: Install per NEC Article 725.

3.2 DEVIATION FROM CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. Basis of Design is copper conductors installed in raceway, based on 30 degrees C ambient temperature (NEC Table 310.15(B)(16)). If materials or methods selected for installation differ from the basis of design, this contractor shall be responsible for sizing conductors and conduits to meet or exceed the ampacity of circuits selected for the basis of design.

B. Routing multiple conductors within a single conduit requires the conductor ampacity to be derated per National Electrical Code Article 310. Do not provide more than 4 conductors within



a single conduit to serve loads such as panelboards, motor control centers, motors over 1/4 horsepower, etc.

C. Underground duct conductor ampacity is based on table B.310.15(B)(2)(7) of the National Electrical code, or has been calculated in accordance with Informative Annex B: Application Information for Ampacity Calculation. Deviation from the contract documents in regards to conductor and conduit quantities or orientation as suggested by the Contractor shall require supporting calculations and a sketch for Engineer approval.

D. Where ungrounded conductors are increased in size for any reason, equipment grounding conductors shall be increased in size proportionally according to the circular mil area of the ungrounded conductors.

3.3 INSTALLTION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings and floors unless otherwise indicated.

C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.

D. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

E. Use pulling means including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire and cable grips which will not damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to wire or cable. Do not exceed maximum tensile strength of conductor or grip. Do not exceed maximum sidewall pressure limitations of cables.

F. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in the same raceway.

G. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members and follow surface contours where possible.

H. Feeder conductors shall be continuous and shall not contain splices.

I. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with conductors larger than Number 10 AWG cabled in individual circuits. Make terminations so there is no more than 1/8 inch of exposed bare conductor at the terminal. Observe NEC 310.15 (B)(2)(a) adjustment factors.

J. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather and mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed prior to installing wire and cable.

K. Use conductor not smaller than Number 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.

L. Single conductors used for control circuits shall not be smaller than Number 14 AWG.

M. Use Number 10 AWG conductors (phase, neutral and ground) for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet, unless drawings requirements are more stringent.

N. Use Number 10 AWG conductors (phase, neutral and ground) for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet, unless drawings requirements are more stringent.



O. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase, neutral and ground of a circuit within the same raceway or cable when routing parallel conductors. Conductor lengths must be equal.

P. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports."

Q. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A.

B. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.

C. Utilize solderless compression terminals applied with circumferential compression for conductor sizes 8 AWG and larger and crimp in accordance with manufacturer instructions. Indenter compression method may be used for conductor sizes 10 AWG and smaller.

D. Phase Sequence: Connections to phase conductors at electrical equipment shall be made such that the A-B-C conductors, when facing the equipment, are oriented top to bottom, or left to right.

E. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.

3.5 SPLICES AND TAPS

A. Conductor splices shall be kept to a minimum.

B. Only splice within accessible junction boxes or enclosures.

C. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. Splices and taps shall be capable of carrying the full ampacity of the conductors without perceptible temperature rise.

D. Above Grade:

1. Use copper compression connectors applied with circumferential compression for conductor sizes 6 AWG and larger.

2. Use pre-molded insulated tap connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, Number 8 AWG and smaller. Insulate with UL listed insulating cover supplied by same manufacturer as connector.

3. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, Number 10 AWG and smaller.

4. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor, or three layers of tape, whichever is greater.

E. Below Grade:



1. Use specified insulated connectors suitable and approved for below grade wiring connectors. Ensure that conductors do not apply tension to splice.


A. Inspect wire for physical damage and proper connection.

B. Measure tightness of bolted connections with properly scaled and calibrated torque tool and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's recommended values.

C. Before energizing, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short circuits.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning conductors and retest as specified above.



26 0526 - 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING

SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes solid grounding of electrical systems and equipment. It includes basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits and systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other sections of these Specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for approval by the Engineer of products to be used are not required for this section. Unrequested submittals will not be processed or reviewed. Non-requirement of submittals is not to be construed as an allowance for substitutions and does not allow relief from full compliance with the contract documents.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled for the specific purposes by Underwriters Laboratories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS

A. Products: Of types indicated and of sizes and ratings to comply with NEC. Where types, sizes, ratings and quantities indicated are in excess of NEC requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity indications govern.

2.2 CONDUCTORS

A. General: Comply with Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables" for insulated grounding conductors. Conform to NEC Table 8, except as otherwise indicated, for conductor properties, including stranding.



B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Green insulated; conductor metal shall match branch circuit conductor metal.

C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Stranded cable.

D. Underground Conductors: Bare, stranded copper except as otherwise indicated.

E. Copper Conductors: Conform to the following:

1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.3. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.4. Bonding Strap Conductor/Connectors: Soft copper, 0.05 inch thick and 2 inches wide,

except as indicated.

2.3 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure (clamp) type with at least two bolts.

C. Bus-bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

D. Pressure Connectors: High-conductivity-plated units.

E. Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty units listed for the application.

F. Exothermic Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected for the specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items to be connected.

G. Compression Connectors: Irreversible compression connectors must be factory filled with oxide inhibitor and fully crimped with a 14-ton or larger hydraulic tool so that index number is embossed on the connector. May be used above or below grade.

2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel.

1. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet length.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Route grounding electrode conductors within rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit.

C. Seal all exterior wall penetrations air-tight.

3.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Provide a minimum of two ground rods separated no less than 20 feet from each other.

1. Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.

2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. Utilize exothermic welds where ground rods are not provided within test wells.

B. Utility Metering Equipment: Provide bonding conductor at utility metering equipment and pad mounted transformer per University of Missouri-Columbia Energy Management requirements.

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDINGEquipment Grounding Conductor Application: Comply with NEC Article 250 for sizes and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, except where larger sizes or more conductors are indicated.

B. Install separate insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuit conductors. Terminate each end on a grounding lug or bus.

3.4 BONDING

A. Separately Derived Systems: Where the NEC requires separately derived systems to be grounded, provide grounding in accordance with the NEC.

B. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS J-STD-607-A.

1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet and central equipment location.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.



2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. General: Select connectors, hardware and conductors and make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis.

1. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact.2. Aluminum to steel connections shall be with stainless steel separators and mechanical

clamps.3. Aluminum to galvanized steel connections shall be with tin-plated copper jumpers and

mechanical clamps.4. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future

penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.5. Exothermic Welded Connections or Compression-type Connections: Use for connections

to structural steel and for underground connections except those at test wells. Install at connections to ground rods and plate electrodes. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. Compression connections should be inspected for visible die index number matching the die and connector used. Connections that do not show this are not acceptable.

B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.2. Underground Connections: Exothermic-welded or compression-type connectors except at

test wells and as otherwise indicated.3. Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermic-welded or compression-type ground stud

connector.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Terminate insulated equipment grounding conductors for feeders and branch circuits with pressure-type grounding lugs.

D. Metallic Raceway Continuity: Where metallic raceways terminate at metallic housings without mechanical and electrical connection to the housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to the ground bus in the housing. Bond electrically non-continuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors.

E. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in UL 486A.

F. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools of at least 14-ton size to provide the correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground conductor.



3.6 EQUIPOTENTIAL GROUNDING SYSTEM

A. Provide equipotential bonding between all grounding electrode systems.

B. Bond all non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment, raceways and other enclosures to the grounding system.

3.7 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 3/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when

indicated as part of duct-bank installation.

C. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from the foundation.


A. Tests and Inspections: After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements:

1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each ground rod and ground-rod assembly and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

4. Maximum Ground Resistance Values:

a. Service neutral to reference ground: 5 Ohmsb. Equipment rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 Ohms.c. Equipment rated 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 Ohms.d. Equipment rated greater than 1000 kVA: 3 Ohms.e. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 Ohms.



f. Manhole Grounds: 10 Ohms.

5. Where resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

3.9 SURFACE RESTORATION

A. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades except as otherwise indicated. Where sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other Work to their original condition. Include necessary topsoil, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging or mulching. Perform such Work in accordance with Division 32. Maintain disturbed surfaces. Restore vegetation in accordance with the requirements of that Division. Restore disturbed paving as indicated.




SECTION 26 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Secure support from the building structure for electrical items by means of hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, inserts, seals and associated fastenings.

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

D. RNC: Rigid non-metallic conduit.

E. Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of four times the applied force.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. Electrical components shall be listed and labeled for the specific intended purpose by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Slotted Metal Angle and U-Channel Systems:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.b. American Electric.c. B-Line Systems, Inc.d. GS Metals Corp.e. Unistrut Diversified Products.

2. Conduit Sealing Bushings:

a. Bridgeport Fittings, Inc.b. Killark Electric Mfg. Co.c. O-Z/Gedney.d. Raco, Inc.e. Red Seal Electric Corp.

2.2 COATINGS

A. Coating: Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish or inherent material characteristic.

2.3 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets and spring steel clamps.

B. Fasteners: Types, materials and construction features as follows:

1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type.2. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type.3. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

C. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Factory-fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies suitable for sealing around conduit or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeve, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps and cap screws.

D. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs with number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Construct body of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.

E. U-Channel Systems: 16-gauge steel channels, with 9/16-inch-diameter holes, between one and one half and two and one half inches on center, in top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of the same manufacture.



2.4 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. General: Shop- or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from U-channel components.

B. Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports.

C. Pipe Sleeves:

1. Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:

a. Interior Dry Locations: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe or Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe.

b. Exterior or Interior Wet or Damp Locations: Fabricate from Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe.

2. Sleeves shall not penetrate structural members without approval from the Structural Engineer.

3. Openings through unexcavated floors and/or foundation walls below the floor shall have a smooth finish with sufficient annular space around material passing through opening so slight settling will not place stress on the material or building structure.

4. Install all sleeves concentric with conduits. Secure sleeves in concrete to wood forms. This Contractor is responsible for sleeves dislodged or moved when pouring concrete.

5. Where conduits rise through concrete floors that are on earthen grade, provide 3/4-inch resilient expansion joint material (asphalt and cork) wrapped around the pipe, the full depth of concrete at the point of penetration. Secure to prevent shifting during concrete placement and finishing.

6. Size sleeves large enough to allow expansion and contraction movement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in accordance with NEC requirements.

B. Coordinate with the building structural system and with other disciplines’ installations.

C. Raceway Supports: Comply with the NEC and the following requirements:

1. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports.2. Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by

a safety factor of at least four. Where this determination results in a safety allowance of less than 200 lbs, provide additional strength until there is a minimum of 200 pounds safety allowance in the strength of each support.

3. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

4. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-type hangers.5. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners

may be used in lieu of hangers only for 1-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits, telephone and data above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring



steel fasteners, use 1/4-inch-diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing.

6. Space supports for raceways in accordance with Table I of this section. Space supports for raceway types not covered by the above in accordance with NEC.

7. Support exposed and concealed raceway within 3 feet of boxes, access fittings, device boxes or cabinets.

8. In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway or conductor terminals.

9. Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with installation of conductors.10. Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to

produce the same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers and other devices.

D. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware securely to the building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays, busways, cabinets, panelboards, transformers, boxes, motor control centers, disconnect switches and control components in accordance with the following:

1. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry, and machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws.

2. Holes cut to depth of more than 1-1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4-inch in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used.

3. Do not fasten supports to ceiling systems, piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment or conduit unless otherwise noted.

4. Do not use powder-actuated anchors without specific permission.5. Do not drill structural steel members.6. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. 7. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush-mounted cabinets and

panelboards in stud walls.

E. In wet locations and on all building floors below exterior earth grade install freestanding electrical equipment on concrete pads.

F. Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof test load. Use vibration- and shock-resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 PAINTING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



TABLE I: SPACING FOR RACEWAY SUPPORTS

Maximum Spacing of Supports (Feet)

Raceway Size (Inches)

No. of Conduits in

Run LocationRMC & IMC* EMT RNC

HORIZONTAL RUNS

1/2, 3/4 1 or 2 Flat ceiling or wall. 5 5 3

1/2, 3/4 1 or 2 Where it is difficult to provide supports except at intervals fixed by the building construction.

7 7 --

1/2, 3/4, 1 3 or more Any location. 7 7 --

1 & larger 1 or 2 Flat ceiling or wall. 6 6 --

1 & larger 1 or 2 Where it is difficult to provide supports except at intervals fixed by the building construction.

10 10 --

1 & larger 3 or more Any location. 10 10 --

Any -- Concealed. 10 10 --

VERTICAL RUNS

1/2, 3/4 -- Exposed. 7 7 --

1, 1-1/4 -- Exposed. 8 8 --

1-1/2 and larger

-- Exposed. 10 10 --

Up to 2 -- Shaftway. 14 10 --

2-1/2 -- Shaftway. 16 10 --

3 & larger -- Shaftway. 20 10 --

Any -- Concealed. 10 10 --

*Maximum spacings for IMC above apply to straight runs only. Otherwise the maximums for EMT apply.



26 0533 - 1 RACEWAYS

SECTION 26 0533 - RACEWAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following raceways electrical wiring:

1. Metallic Conduit and Tubing.2. Non-Metallic Conduit and Tubing.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

G. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

H. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

I. RMC: Rigid metallic conduit

J. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

K. RTRC: Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (fiberglass).

1.4 SUBMITTALS





A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for components and installation.

C. Comply with NECA "Standard of Installation."

D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories for the specific purpose and comply with the following standards:

1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.2. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.3. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and

Cable Assemblies.4. ANSI C80.5 – Aluminum Rigid Conduit.5. ANSI C80.6 – Intermediate Metal Conduit, Zinc Coated.6. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.7. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 – Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit,

Electrical Metallic Tubing and Cable.8. NECA "Standard of Installation."9. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit

and Intermediate Metal Conduit.10. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).11. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.12. NEMA TC 6 - PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation.13. NEMA TC 9 – Fittings for PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by installer to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable portions of NFPA 70 for raceways.

B. Bushings: Bushings for terminating conduits smaller than 1-1/4 inches are to have flared bottom and ribbed sides, with smooth upper edges to prevent injury to cable insulation. Install insulated type bushings for terminating conduits 1-1/4 inches and larger. Upper edge to have phenolic insulating ring molded into bushing. Bushings to have screw type grounding terminal.

C. Raintight Sealing Hubs: Two piece type with outer internally-threaded hub to receive conduit, inner locking ring with bonding screw, insulated throat, and V-shaped ring or O-ring.

2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Rigid Steel (Metallic) Conduit:




a. Allied Tube & Conduit.b. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company.c. O-Z Gedney.d. Wheatland Tube Company.

2. Description: Conduit to be seamless, hot dipped galvanized rigid steel. Threads to be cut and ends chamfered prior to galvanizing. Galvanizing to provide zinc coating fused to inside and outside walls of conduit. Provide an enamel lubricating coating on the inside of the conduit. Conduit to conform to ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled under UL 6.

3. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1, single piece threaded, cadmium plated malleable iron.

4. Joint Compound: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

B. Intermediate Metal Conduit:



2. Description: Conduit to be seamless, hot dipped galvanized rigid steel. Threads to be cut and ends chamfered prior to galvanizing. Galvanizing to provide zinc coating fused to outside walls of conduit. Provide an enamel lubricating coating on the inside of the conduit. Conduit to be listed and labeled under UL 1242.

3. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1, single piece threaded, cadmium plated malleable iron.

4. Joint Compound: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

C. Electrical Metallic Tubing:



2. Description: Conduit to be seamless, hot dipped or electro-galvanized steel tubing. Galvanizing to provide zinc coating fused to outside walls of conduit. Provide an enamel lubricating coating on the inside of the conduit. Conduit to conform to ANSI C80.3 - 1983 and listed and labeled under UL 797.

3. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: Compression.



4. Expansion fittings for use with EMT shall allow for a minimum of four inches of movement and shall be similar to O-Z Gedney TX series, complete with bonding jumpers and hardware.

D. Flexible Metal Conduit: Zinc-coated steel.


a. AFC Cable Systems.b. Alflex Inc.c. Electri-Flex Co.

2. Description: Interlocked steel or aluminum construction, consisting of spirally wrapped, convoluted hot dip galvanized steel strip. Zinc coating to cover both sides and all edges of steel strip. Convolutions to be interlocked to prevent separation when conduit is bent at radius equal to 4-1/2 times conduit O.D. Conduit to be listed and labeled under UL 1.

3. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1 -1988. Threadless hinged clamp type, galvanized zinc coated cadmium plated malleable cast iron.

E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit:


a. AFC Cable Systems.b. Alflex Inc.c. Electri-Flex Co.

2. Description: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket, listed and labeled under UL 3603. Fittings: and Conduit Bodies: Watertight, compression type, galvanized zinc coated

cadmium plated malleable cast iron. Conduit to be listed and labeled under UL 360.

2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit:


a. Cantex.b. J.M. Manufacturing.c. Allied Tube & Conduit.d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

2. Description: Conduit to be PVC, Schedule 40, rated for use with 90 degrees C conductors and suited for direct burial and above ground use in direct sunlight, whether encased in concrete or not. Conduit to conform to latest edition of ASTM F512, NEMA TC-2, and be listed and labeled under UL 651.

3. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: Manufactured per NEMA TC-3 and UL 651 listed to match conduit, type and material. Expansion fittings shall allow for six inch movement, and shall be similar to Carlon E945 series. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 METALLIC AND NON-METALLIC CONDUIT APPLICATION

A. Outdoor Locations Above Grade (Including Roofs): RMC

B. Indoor Locations:

1. Exposed, not subject to physical damage, or above 7 feet-0 inches of finished floor: RMC, IMC or EMT.

2. Exposed, subject to physical damage, or within 7 feet-0 inches of finished floor: RMC, IMC.

3. Concealed in ceilings and interior walls and partitions: EMT.4. Wet or Damp Locations: RMC or IMC.5. Connections to vibrating equipment: FMC, except use LFMC in wet or damp locations.

C. Underground:

1. Within 5 feet-0 inches of the building perimeter: Concrete Encased RNC.2. Greater than 5 feet-0 inches of the building perimeter: Concrete Encased RNC.

D. Conduit Size: Conduits shall be sized as shown on drawings. Where conduit sizes are not indicated, conduits shall be sized in accordance with the latest version of the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) and shall be limited to a 40 percent conductor fill percentage. Conductor ampacities must be maintained; therefore adjustment factors for temperature and quantity derating values must be observed.

1. Minimum Conduit Size: Unless otherwise noted, 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.

3.2 METALLIC AND NON-METALLIC CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. General Installation Requirements

1. Conduits shall be mechanically and electrically continuous from source of current to all outlets unless a properly sizes grounding conductor is routed within the conduit. All metallic conduits shall be bonded per NFPA 70.

2. Do not reduce the indicated sizes of raceways. Conduit sizes may only change junction and pull boxes.

3. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.4. Use temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceway.5. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in raceway

system.6. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with

not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Empty raceways shall be labeled at each end indicating origin of the raceway. Labels shall be self-adhesive vinyl labels.

7. This contractor shall be responsible for all openings required in masonry or exterior walls for conduit routing. A qualified contractor capable of repairing all openings in a manner that matches existing conditions shall be hired by the electrical contractor.

B. Conduit Routing:



1. In general, conduit shall be concealed in walls within finished spaces and may be exposed within unfinished spaces (such as mechanical and utility areas) where conditions dictate and as practical.

2. Raceway routing proposed on Drawings is diagrammatic in nature and shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Coordinate conduit routing with beams, joists, columns, windows, etc., as required to complete wiring system. Verify field measurements, routing and termination locations of raceway with obstructions and other trades prior to rough-in. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for any expense due to the failure of coordination between other trades to ensure fit and avoid conflict.

3. Run concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance considering the type of building construction and obstructions, except as otherwise indicated.

4. Route exposed conduit and conduits above ceilings parallel and perpendicular to building structural lines, and as close to building structure as possible.

5. Raceways are not to cross pipe shafts or ventilating duct openings, nor are they to pass through HVAC ducts. Support riser raceway at each floor level with clamp hangers. Maintain adequate clearance between raceway and piping.

6. Coordinate layout and installation of conduit with other construction elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance and access.

7. Route conduit through roof openings provided for piping and ductwork or rooftop unit curbs where possible. Where unavoidable, route conduit through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate roof penetrations with other trades.

8. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Conduit Supports:

1. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide adequate headroom. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel. All conduit supports shall be secured to walls, structural members, slabs and bar joists. Do not support conduits from non-structural members, such as ductwork, water or fire suppression piping.

2. Run parallel or banked raceways together, on common support racks where practical and make bends from same center line to make bends parallel. Use factory elbows only where they can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways. Provide space within each rack for 20 percent additional conduits.

3. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports."

D. Conduit Fittings and Terminations:

1. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

3. Install raceway sealing fittings according to the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank coverplate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings where conduits enter or leave hazardous locations, where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of refrigerated spaces, such as kitchen cold boxes, air-conditioned spaces and other places indicated on the drawings or required by NFPA 70.

4. Expansion/Deflection Joints: Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and contraction where raceway crosses seismic and expansion joints. Install expansion fittings in the full open position if installed during a period of lowest expected temperature,



and in the fully closed position if installed during a period of highest expected temperature. Install at proportionate intermediate position for intermediate temperatures.

a. In addition to the foregoing, provide expansion fittings according to the following table, for exposed linear runs or runs in hung ceilings where such runs do not contain junction boxes, pull boxes, nor bends totaling more than 30 degrees.

b. EMT and RMC expansion couplers shall be UL listed with an internal copper braided bonding jumper that meets the requirements of NEC 250.98. Fitting shall be listed as suitable for wet locations and rain water tight when installed in wet or outdoor locations.

Raceway

Material

Indoor, conditioned areasOutdoors and

non-conditioned areas

Steel One expansion fitting in runs longer than 80 feet, additional expansion fittings every 400 feet

One expansion fitting in runs longer than 40 feet, additional expansion fittings every 200 feet

PVC One expansion fitting in runs longer than 20 feet, additional expansion fittings every 100 feet

One expansion fitting in runs longer than 10 feet, additional expansion fittings every 50 feet

5. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 6 feet of flexible metal conduit for recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement and for all motors. Use Liquidtight flexible metal conduit in wet or damp locations. Install ground conductor across flexible connections.

6. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling.

E. Conduit Bends:

1. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

2. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not reduced. Unless otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel.

3. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot bender when field-fabricated elbows are required for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.

4. Stub-Up Connections: Use type of conduit described for stub-ups from slab. Extend conduit through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment to a distance 6-inches above the floor. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."



3.4 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of installation of system, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches and abrasions.

3.6 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Mark and identify conduits in accordance with Section 26 0553 “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

3.7 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Accurately record actual routing of all feeder and sub-feeder conduits regardless of size and branch circuits conduits larger than 2-inches.



26 0534 - 1 BOXES CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES

SECTION 26 0534 – BOXES, CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes boxes, cabinets and enclosures for electrical wiring.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with the following standards:

1. NECA "Standard of Installation."2. NEMA OS 1: Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports.3. NEMA FB 1: Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical

Metallic Tubing and Cable.4. NEMA 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTLET BOXES

A. General: Outlet boxes shall be constructed in accordance with National Electrical Code Article 314. Outlet boxes shall be sized for the volume required by the National Electrical Code, but in no case shall they be less than 1-1/2 inches deep.

B. Sheet Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.

C. Cast Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy or aluminum, type FD with gasketed cover and threaded hubs.



D. Boxes for receptacle, telephone and data outlets shall be 4-11/16 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep and shall be provided with extension rings. Furnish outlet boxes with fixture studs where required.

E. Boxes for switches or local light control shall be 4 inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep and shall be provided with raised cover to fit flush with finished wall line. Provide single box for multiple-ganged devices with single coverplate, sized for the quantity of devices to be installed.

F. Provide 4-inch octagonal and square outlet boxes for all exposed conduit work with fixture extension pan or deep fixture canopy to enclose the outlet box.

G. Boxes for recessed light fixtures shall be 4-inch octagonal or square according to fixture hardware requirements, minimum 1-1/2 inches deep complete with blank cover.

H. Provide corrosion-resistant steel knockout closures for unused openings.

2.2 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

A. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. Flush-mounted boxes shall have an overlapping cover.

B. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, galvanized, with gasketed cover.

C. Covers: Covers shall be the same material as the box. Covers shall be on the largest access side of the box, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Less than 12 inches in any dimension: Screw-on cover.2. Greater than 12 inches in any dimension: Hinged cover.

D. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2.3 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES

A. Comply with NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

B. Provide metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

C. Hinged Cover: Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

D. Where lockable cabinets are provided, key latch to match panelboards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 BOX AND CABINET INSTALLATION

A. General Installation Requirements:



1. Electrical boxes are shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. The Engineer or Architect shall be allowed to adjust the location of boxes up to 10 feet in any direction without additional cost to the project. This is intended for boxes for receptacles and switches and other wiring devices.

2. Provide boxes as shown and for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment and fixture connections and where required by applicable codes and installation practices.

3. Locate boxes to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance. Locate to allow proper access. Provide access doors for boxes located above inaccessible ceilings.

4. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed.

5. Support all boxes, cabinets and enclosures rigidly and independently of conduit except where specifically allowed by the National Electrical Code. Use supports suitable for the purpose.

6. Boxes located outdoors above ground shall be raintight and gasketed cast aluminum. 7. Provide covers for all boxes.8. Do not install boxes back-to-back in same wall. Provide at least 6 inch separation or

greater where required by the building code. In hollow fire walls, maintain minimum 24 inch horizontal separation between outlets on opposite sides. As an alternate to the 24 inch separation, the use of listed putty pads or other listed materials and methods approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction are acceptable.

B. Outlet Box Installation:

1. All devices (receptacles, switches, occupancy sensors, fire alarm devices, low voltage devices, telephone jacks, TV jacks, data jacks, microphones jacks, etc., and any other device) furnished under this project shall be mounted on or in an outlet box regardless of whether or not the associated system wiring is in conduit, unless otherwise noted.

2. Flush-mount outlet boxes in finished areas. Outlets in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and the above removable ceilings may be surface-mounted.

3. Use multiple gang boxes where more than one device is mounted together. Provide barriers to separate different voltage systems.

4. For outlets mounted above counters, benches, or backsplashes, coordinate location and mounting heights with architectural details. Install with bottom of box minimum 6 inch above backsplash.

5. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats and similar devices.6. Adjust outlet mounting height and horizontal location to agree with required location for

equipment served as may be shown on installation instructions or shop drawing for the equipment.

7. Position outlets to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling drawings. For recessed boxes in finished areas, secure to interior wall and partition studs; allow for surface finish thickness.

8. Ensure that thermal insulation will be in place behind outlet boxes before installing them in insulated walls. Do not damage insulation.

9. Special care shall be taken to set all flush boxes square and true with the building finish. The edge of the cover shall meet the building finish or be no greater than 1/8 inch back from the finish surface. All wall outlets shall be rigidly secured to the stud system, using adjustable supports where necessary, to prevent all box movement.

10. Do not set boxes back further than required by Code. Coordinate with building finishes. Do not install any box so that the device pushes back into the wall when pushed. All boxes are to be set so that the device yoke will securely bear upon the box or wall finish. Where the sheetrock contractor cuts an opening too big for this to be achieved, install a fitting such as Caddy # RLC.

11. Installation within Masonry walls:



a. Adjust position of outlets in finished masonry walls to suit masonry course lines where possible. Do not, however, violate maximum heights defined by accessibility codes such as ADA.

1) Coordinate cutting in of walls to achieve neat openings for boxes. Locate boxes in walls so that only the corner need be cut from masonry units where possible.

2) Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

12. Outlet Box Application: Unless otherwise noted, outlet boxes shall be installed as follows:

a. Galvanized Steel Box Installation Locations:

1) Concealed interior locations.2) Exposed interior locations above 7 feet-0 inches of finished floor.

b. Cast Box Installation Locations:

1) Exterior locations.2) Hazardous locations.3) Exposed interior locations within 7 feet-0 inches of finished floor.4) Wet or damp locations.5) Direct contact with earth or concrete slabs on grade.

C. Pull and Junction Boxes:

1. Locate above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas.2. Locate pull or junction boxes to limit conduit runs to no more than 150 linear feet of four

(4) 90 degree bends between pulling points. For telephone/ data limit bends to no more than three (3) 90 degree bends to pulling points.

D. Cabinets and Enclosures:

1. Install hinged cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. At a minimum, support at each corner.

2. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed.

3.2 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



3.4 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of installation of system, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

3.5 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Mark and identify boxes, cabinets and enclosures in accordance with Section 26 0553 “Identification for Electrical Systems.”



26 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for medium voltage systems.2. Identification for underground systems.3. Identification for wires, cables and conductors.4. Warning labels and signs.5. Equipment identification labels.6. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. Comply with the following standards:

1. ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.2. NFPA 70.3. 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.4. ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

B. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.



C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Electromark - Wolcott, New York.2. Ideal Industries, Inc.3. 3M.4. Panduit Corp.5. Seton Name Plate Co.6. Thomas & Betts.7. W. H. Brady, Co. - Signmark Division - Milwaukee, Wisconsin.

2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels (Raceways and Boxes): Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape for Banding (Raceway, Wire and Cable): Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches wide.

C. Self-Adhesive Tape Markers (Wire and Cable): Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound, cable and conductor markers with preprinted numbers and letters.

D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands (Raceways and Cables): Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape (Raceways, Wires, and Cables): Self-adhesive plastic coated cloth tape similar to Brady 441XX or 442XX series.

F. Conductor Identification Products:

1. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

2. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

G. Underground Line Warning Tape:

1. Underground Line Marking Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, corrosion-resistant, continuous-printed, plastic tape compounded for direct-burial service not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. Printed legend shall be indicative of general type of underground line below. Tape shall have integral metallic facing or metallic core to allow locating buried tape with electronic detection equipment. Provide marking tape similar to Thomas & Betts NAF series.



2.3 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting, nominal 7 by 10 inches in size unless noted otherwise.

D. Engraved, Plastic-Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches, or 8 inches in length; 1/8-inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white face and punched for mechanical fasteners.

2.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label. Labels shall be at least 2-1/4 inches high. Where space does not permit this label size, smaller stock and lettering is permitted.

B. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with lettering and background colors as indicated. Labels shall be at least 2-1/4 inches high. Where space does not permit this label size, smaller stock and lettering is permitted.

C. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Labels shall be at least 2-1/4 inches high. Where space does not permit this label size, smaller stock and lettering is permitted.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). Comply with maximum volatile organic compound levels imposed within Division 09.

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless steel screws or stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Increase size of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor for elevated components.



C. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors and other designations used in electrical identification work with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering and colors as required by code.

D. Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NEC.

E. Clean and degrease surfaces prior to applying identification products. Apply identification to surfaces that require finish after finish work is completed. Utilize primer for metal surfaces, heavy-duty acrylic resin block filler for concrete masonry, and clear alkali-resistant alkyd binder-type sealer for concrete surfaces.

F. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

G. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

H. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.

3.2 LABEL COLOR CODE LEGEND

A. Provide the following color coding scheme for each label based on the power system it is identifying:

1. Normal Power: Black letters on white background.2. Emergency Branch: White letters on red background.

3.3 MEDIUM VOLTAGE IDENTIFICATION

A. Medium Voltage Power Circuit Identification: Securely fasten identifying metal tags or aluminum wraparound marker bands to cables, feeders and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes, junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms with 1/4 inch steel letter and number stamps with legend to correspond with designations on Drawings. If metal tags are provided, attach them with approximately 55-pound test monofilament line or one-piece self-locking nylon cable ties.

B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesive-backed phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation.

3.4 UNDERGROUND SERVICE IDENTIFICATION

A. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication and control wiring and optical fiber cable.



B. Underground Electrical Line Identification: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, signal and communications lines, install continuous underground line marking tape located directly above each respective line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade.

3.5 BOX IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage:

1. Normal Power.2. Emergency Power.

B. At each junction, pull and connection box, identify the following: with self-adhesive vinyl labels or permanent marker (color coded) neatly hand-printed. Identification of these boxes shall be located on the inside of cover if located in finished spaces:

1. Power and lighting circuits: Indicate system voltage and identify contained circuits and panelboard serving load (e.g., “120V, PP1-1, 3, 5”).

2. Other wiring: Indicate system type and wiring description (e.g., “FIRE ALARM NAC #2”).

C. Paint box covers to correspond with system types as follows:

1. Fire Alarm: Red.

3.6 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION

A. Label conductors as follows:

1. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Where multiple branch circuits are terminated or spliced in a box or enclosure, label each conductor with source and circuit number.

2. Multiple Control Wiring and Communication/Signal Circuits in Same Enclosure: For control and communications signal/wiring, use wire/cable marking tape at terminations in wiring boxes, troughs and control cabinets. Use consistent letter/number conductor designations throughout on wire/cable marking tape.

3.7 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING

A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, panelboards, manholes, handholes, switches, etc., use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below all conductors.

a. Color shall be factory-applied, or field-applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if Authorities Having Jurisdiction permit

1) Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension



to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

b. Colors for 208/120V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.4) Neutral: White.5) Ground Bond: Green.

c. Colors for 480/277V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown.2) Phase B: Orange.3) Phase C: Yellow.4) Neutral: Gray.5) Ground Bond: Green.

B. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

3.8 RECEPTACLE IDENTIFICATION

A. Coverplates: Provide engraved identification on all receptacle coverplates indicating the source panelboard and circuit number serving the device (e.g., PP1#1). Font shall be ¼” high.

3.9 SIGNAGE

A. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs and stencils as follows:

1. Install warning, caution or operating instruction signs where required by NEC, where indicated, or where reasonably required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install fiberglass signs or outdoor items.

2. Emergency Operating Signs: Install engraved laminate signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8-inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding or other emergency operations where required by NEC or where required to assure safe operation and maintenance.

3. Arc Flash Hazard Warning: Provide signage on all electrical equipment such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter socket enclosures and motor control centers indicating arc flash hazard warning and advising appropriate PPE.



3.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, one-line diagram, schedules and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Each section of a multiple-section equipment lineup shall be provided with its own identification label. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

B. Labeling Instructions:

1. Indoor Equipment: Provide self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. 2. Outdoor Equipment: Provide engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.3. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate

mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.4. Nameplate Data: Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power

operated equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location.

5. Service Disconnects: Provide permanent engraved sign with 2-1/4 inch high black lettering on white background clearly describing the location of all other service disconnecting means (including engine generator sources and central battery systems) when the building is served by more than one source of electrical power. Locate signs at each power source's disconnect means.

6. Outdoor Electrical Equipment: Provide outdoor Pictogram type sign per above specifications, with the words "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE Hazardous Voltage. Will shock burn, or cause death. KEEP OUT." NEMA Mr. Ouch symbol shall be included. Install at all entrances to outdoor areas and every 20 feet along area fences, with at least one sign per side of fencing. Install on doors to equipment.

7. Fusible Switches: Install fuse manufacturer-supplied labels inside the door of the fusible switch indicating the proper type and fuse required for replacement.

8. Automatically Started Equipment: Provide adhesive label reading "DANGER - WARNING THIS MACHINE IS AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED. IT MAY START AT ANY TIME" on all motors, generators and other moving or hazardous equipment which is remotely or automatically operated. Sign to be similar to Brady Number 88191.

C. Specific Equipment Requirements:

1. Power Distribution Equipment: Including, but not limited to switchgear, switchboards, distribution panelboards, branch panelboards and motor control centers.

a. Identification label shall include the following:

1) Equipment type and tag designation shown on the contract documents using 1/2 inch high bold lettering.

2) Voltage and phase rating of the equipment using 1/4 inch high bold lettering.3) The name of the upstream equipment and location/room number it is

located in using 1/4 inch high bold lettering.4) Rating and type of overcurrent protection device serving the equipment

(e.g., “FED FROM 200A/3P CIRCUIT BREAKER”) using 1/4 inch high bold lettering.



b. Example Identification Label:

DISTRIBUTION PANEL ‘DP1’208Y/120V 3-Phase 4-Wire

Fed from Panel MP1; Room 200Fed from 200A/3P Circuit Breaker

c. A separate nameplate shall be provided at the service entrance equipment for all sources of power indicating the maximum available fault current and the date the fault current calculation was performed.

d. Distribution panelboards and switchboards shall be provided with permanent labeling adjacent to each overcurrent protection device indicating the load being served and the location of the equipment.

e. A typewritten directory of circuits shall be provided at all branch panelboards. Provide explicit description and identification of items served by each individual switch and circuit breaker.

2. Transformers:


1) Equipment type and tag designation shown on the contract documents in 1/2 inch high bold lettering.

2) Voltage and phase rating of equipment using 1/4 inch high bold lettering.3) The name of the upstream equipment and location/room number it is

located in using 1/4 inch high bold lettering.4) Rating and type of overcurrent protection device serving the equipment

(e.g., “FED FROM 70A/3P CIRCUIT BREAKER”) using 1/4 inch high bold lettering.


TRANSFORMER ‘T1’480∆:208Y/120V 75kVA

Fed from Panel DP1; Room 200Fed from 125A/3P Circuit Breaker

3. Control Equipment: Including but not limited to disconnect switches, starters, variable-speed controllers, contactors, motor control centers, pushbutton stations, etc.


1) Equipment type and tag designation shown on the contract documents of the actual equipment served in 1/2 inch high bold lettering.

2) Location of equipment being served in 1/4 inch high bold lettering. If the equipment being served by the control equipment is located in the same room, identify location as “THIS ROOM.”

3) Voltage and phase rating of equipment in 1/4 inch high bold lettering.4) The name of the upstream equipment and location/room number it is

located in using 1/4 inch high bold lettering.




AHU-6 Supply Fan ‘AHU-6S’Located in Mechanical Room 001

480V 3-Phase, 3 WireFed from Distribution Panel MHEQ; Room 200



26 0573 - 1 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

SECTION 26 0573 - POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current analysis and report, overcurrent protective device coordination study and arc flash hazard analysis and report.

1. Electrical service fault current calculation labeling shall be provided based upon the results as required in NFPA 70 Article 110.24.

2. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the study. 3. Arc flash labeling shall be provided based upon results of the final approved arc flash

analysis Study per the requirements set forth in the current issue (2015) of NFPA 70E-Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE Standard 1584-2002, the IEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Calculations.

B. The scope of the studies shall include the entire electrical system proposed within the contract documents.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist:

1. The power system studies shall be performed based upon the contract documents and shall include the specific equipment, settings and performance installed and as-built conductor lengths.

B. Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process for system protective devices has been completed. A preliminary Arc Flash Hazard analysis shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative no later than six (6) weeks after the overcurrent protective device shop drawings have been approved.

1. Documentation shall be provided in a report format, contained within a bound booklet or three-ring binder. Individual studies shall be separated with identification labels. Shop drawings shall be provided for all overcurrent protective devices in a separate section of the same document.

a. The report shall include the following sections:

1) Executive Summary including Introduction, Scope of Work and Results/Recommendations.

2) Short-Circuit Methodology Analysis Results and Recommendations.



a) Fault current calculations shall be provided for both utility fault current contributions and on-site standby-power generation fault current contributions. Calculation input data shall be provided including fault current contributions. Fault current calculations shall be submitted in both report form and plotted one-line diagrams.

3) Short Circuit Device Evaluation Table. 4) Protective Device Coordination Methodology Analysis Results and

Recommendations.

a) This section shall include Coordination Study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.

5) Protective Device Settings Table.6) Time-Current Coordination Graphs and Recommendations.7) Arc Flash Hazard Methodology Analysis Results and Recommendations.

a) This section shall include the details of the incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations, along with Arc Flash boundary distances, working distances, Incident Energy levels and Personal Protection Equipment Levels.

8) Arc Flash Labeling.

a) This section shall include descriptive information as well as typical label images for the types of labels to be provided.

9) Computer Generated One-Line Diagram of the Electrical System.

a) The One-Line diagram must clearly identify individual equipment buses, bus numbers used in the short-circuit analysis, cable and bus connections between the equipment, calculated maximum short-circuit current at each bus location, device numbers used in the time-current coordination analysis and other information pertinent to the computer analysis.

2. Power system study project model and results shall be submitted on electronic media for use by the Owner. Electrical model information shall include complete coordination files including all device curves. (Project - Backup in SKM Power Tools for Windows shall be used to provide all project electrical model information.)

3. Calculations and analysis shall include the stamp or seal and signature of the preparing Registered Professional Electrical Engineer and shall be reviewed and approved by the Engineer of Record.


A. Studies shall use computer programs defined in this specification. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.

B. Coordination Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of computer software used for studies having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.



1. Engineering Firm: The approved Engineering firm shall have a minimum of fifteen (15) years experience in performing power system studies.

2. Professional Engineer: The Registered Professional Engineer shall be licensed in the state where Project is located, and will be responsible for the studies. All elements of the studies shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of the Registered Professional Engineer.

C. Provide products and installation methods specified in this section that comply with the following Standards:

1. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.2. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.3. Comply with IEEE 1584 and NFPA70E-2015 for arc flash hazard analysis.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc. Power Tools for Windows (PTW).

2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with IEEE 399.

B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include "mandatory," "very desirable" and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.

D. Analysis shall include software capable of calculating arc flash hazard and preparing arc flash hazard labels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings, in the Specifications, by the Owner, and as required by the applicable edition of the National Electrical Code NFPA 70.

1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.



2. The short circuit, overcurrent protective device coordination analysis and fault hazard calculations shall be based upon a complete electrical model of the electrical system from the utility service through the entire building's electrical distribution system, including branch circuit and lighting panelboards, motor control centers, individual motor control devices, motor disconnect switches and distribution panelboards.

3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 26 Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data and recommended device settings.

2. Impedance of utility service entrance.3. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats,

showing the following:

a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types.b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios.c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance and X/R ratios.d. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,

insulation and length.e. Busway ampacity and impedance.f. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.

4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram showing the following:

a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping.

b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush current and overload capability.

c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start and thermal-damage curve.

d. Ratings, types and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.e. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility

company.f. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.g. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere

or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

h. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

i. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity and interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical.



3.3 SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT STUDY

A. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in Amperes (RMS, Symmetrical) from the utility service to and including circuit-breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system shown on the drawings.

B. Transformer design impedances shall be used when test impedances are not available.

C. The calculation shall be for a current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at the main bus of all switchgear, switchboards, distribution panelboards, branch panelboards, motor control centers, motor controllers (including variable frequency drives) and disconnect switches

D. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

E. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.

F. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with the latest edition of the following:

1. IEEE 241 – IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings

2. IEEE 242 – IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

G. Study Report:

1. Input Data: The study shall include input circuit data including electric utility system characteristics, source impedance data, conductor lengths, number of conductors per phase, conductor impedance values, insulation types, transformer impedances and X/R ratios, motor contributions and other circuit information as related to the short-circuit calculations.

2. One-Line Diagram: Documentation shall be made in one-line diagram form showing the magnitude and location of each calculated fault. A summary of the fault currents available shall also be submitted.

3. Calculations: Provide tabulated form of calculated quantities including short-circuit currents, X/R ratios, equipment short-circuit interrupting or withstand current ratings and notes regarding adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment ratings.

4. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents on electrical distribution system diagram.

5. Provide a comprehensive discussion section evaluating the adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment and include recommendations as appropriate for improvements to the system.

6. Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing of any circuit protective devices improperly rated for the calculated available fault current.

3.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

A. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. The analysis shall include comparing time/current curves of primary protective devices, service and distribution transformers, main service overcurrent protective devices, switchgear, switchboard, motor control center, distribution panelboard, panelboards and branch feeder devices.



1. Terminate device characteristics curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed.

2. The protective device settings shall address the need to minimize arc flash hazards while maintaining proper coordination.

B. Comply with recommendations for fault currents and time intervals dictated within the latest edition of the following:

1. IEEE 241 – IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings

2. IEEE 242 – IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

C. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:

a. Inrush current when first energized.b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is

specified for that transformer.c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by

unusual loading or emergency conditions.

2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.

D. Motors served by voltages more than 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620.

E. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482 and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.

F. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of coordination study:

1. One-Line Diagram: Provide a one-line diagram which clearly identifies individual equipment buses, bus numbers, protective device identification numbers and the maximum available short-circuit current at each bus when known.

2. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices: Provide a separate tabular printout containing the type and recommended settings of all adjustable overcurrent protective device parameters, the equipment designation where the device is located, and the device number corresponding to the device on the system one-line diagram.

3. Coordination Curves: Prepare log-log scale graphs using time-current curves to determine settings of series connected overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility upstream devices. Identify the device associated with each curve by device identification tag, manufacturer type, function and, if applicable, tap, time delay and instantaneous settings recommended. In addition, include the following information on the time-current curve graphs, where applicable:

a. Electric utility overcurrent protective device.b. Medium voltage equipment overcurrent relays.



c. Medium and low voltage fuses including manufacturer’s minimum melt, total clearing, tolerance and damage bands.

d. Low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip devices, including manufacturer’s tolerance bands.

e. Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI through-fault protection curves.

f. Medium voltage conductor damage curves.g. Ground fault protective devices.h. Pertinent motor starting characteristics and motor damage points.i. The largest feeder circuit breaker or fuse in each motor control center and

applicable panelboard.

4. Include time current curves for both the phase and ground fault settings for each overcurrent protective device including device set points.

5. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.

G. The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing of any significant deficiencies in protection and/or coordination, along with recommendations for improvements.

3.5 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. Arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations that are presented in NFPA70E-2015, Annex D after completion of settings for all overcurrent protective devices in the electrical model and calculation of the maximum available fault currents at each bus.

B. Arc flash hazard analysis shall calculate the flash boundary and incident energy at all significant locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards, switchgear, motor-control centers, panelboards, busway and splitters) where work could be performed on energized parts.

C. Safe working distances shall be based on IEEE 1584. The calculated arc flash protection boundary shall be determined using those working distances.

D. Arc flash incident energy level shall not exceed 8 cal/cm^2 at any electrical bus or main protective device.

E. The fault calculations and resulting arc flash hazard calculation results shall be compared for multiple scenarios to determine the greatest incident energy for each equipment location. Calculations shall be performed at both maximum and minimum fault currents, and for scenarios where system is operating based upon utility or standby power sources.

1. A minimum calculation shall assume the utility contribution is at a minimum and will assume a minimum motor contribution (all motors off).

2. A maximum calculation will assume a maximum contribution from the utility and will assume the maximum about of motors to be operating.

3. Where applicable, calculations must take into consideration the parallel operation of synchronous generators with the electric utility source.

F. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase overcurrent devices shall be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination study model. Ground overcurrent relays should not be taken into consideration when determining the clearing time when performing incident energy calculations.



G. The incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators should be decremented as follows:

1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond 3 to 5 cycles. 2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed to match

the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g., contributions from permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to 3 per unit after 10 cycles).

H. For each equipment location with a separately enclosed main device (where there is adequate separation between the line side terminals of the main protective device and the work location), calculations for incident energy and flash protection boundary shall include both the line and load side of the main breaker.

I. When performing incident energy calculations on the line side of a main breaker (as required per the above), the line side and load side contributions must be included in the fault calculation.

J. Coordination should be checked among all devices within the branch containing the immediate protective device upstream of the calculation location, and the calculation should utilize the fastest device to compute the incident energy for the corresponding location.

K. Arc flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds based on IEEE 1584-2002.

L. Where it is not physically possible to move outside the flash protection boundary in less than 2 seconds during an arc flash event, a maximum clearing time based on the specific location shall be utilized.

M. Create and install NFPA 70E compliant labels describing the arc flash hazard level at all switchboards, panelboards, disconnect switches and other locations in the electrical distribution system where work could be performed on energized parts.

1. The labels shall be based on the final approved study results.2. The label shall include the incident energy calculated in the analysis and the hazard

category or appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) required to perform maintenance on the system when energized, the study report number and the date the calculations were performed. Labels shall be waterproof vinyl or laminated, with a self-adhesive backing.

3. Install labels on the front of each individual section of floor standing and wall mounted equipment

N. A list of all incident energy levels and the corresponding PPE requirements shall be posted in the main electric room, engineering office or other location. The list shall be plastic laminate or typewritten and housed in a plastic frame.

O. Contractor shall submit the following:

1. Results of the Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis in tabular form, Include device or bus name, bolted fault and arcing fault current levels, flash protection boundary distances, working distances, personal-protective equipment classes and Arc Flash Incident Energy Levels.

2. Report incident energy values based on recommended device settings for equipment within the scope of the study.



3. Recommendations to reduce Arc Flash Incident Energy Levels and enhance worker safety, where applicable. These should be submitted with the preliminary submittal for review by the Owner.

3.6 ADJUSTMENTS

A. Manufacturer’s authorized representative or Contractor shall set all adjustable protective devices to values indicated in the approved coordination study.

B. The Contractor shall make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish conformance with short circuit and protective device coordination studies.

C. The Short Circuit Study, Coordination Study and Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall be reviewed and updated to reflect any changes and corrections to conductor length within one week of the final electrical walk through for punch list and before any labels are printed.



26 0600 - 1 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

SECTION 26 0600 - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electrical coordination, materials and methods for electrical demolition associated with remodeling of an existing area or facility for re-use.


A. This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods for application with electrical installations as follows:

B. Selective demolition including:

1. Nondestructive removal of materials and equipment for reuse or salvage as indicated.2. Dismantling electrical materials and equipment made obsolete by these installations.3. Miscellaneous metals for support of electrical materials and equipment required to

remain.4. Firestopping as required to maintain existing partition ratings.


A. Conditions Affecting Selective Demolition: The following project conditions apply:

1. Protect adjacent materials indicated to remain. Install and maintain dust and noise barriers to keep dirt, dust and noise from being transmitted to adjacent areas. Remove protection and barriers after demolition operations are complete.

2. Locate, identify and protect electrical services passing through demolition area and serving other areas outside the demolition limits. Maintain services to areas outside demolition limits. When services must be interrupted, install temporary services for affected areas.

3. Maintain and protect existing building services that transit the area affected by selective demolition.

1.5 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the shut-off and disconnection of electrical, fire alarm and communication services with the Owner and the utility companies. Coordinate any electrical outages required for service



switchovers or connections with the Owner a minimum of five working days prior to the interruption. Comply with Owner's specific requirements for partial or complete outage requests.

B. All work that produces excessive noise and/or interference with normal building operations, as indicated on the drawings, shall be coordinated and scheduled with the Owner.

C. Assume that all required re-connection of existing systems or equipment not indicated for demolition must remain operational unless otherwise noted. Provide temporary connections to maintain electrical services and systems serving adjacent areas during required outages.

D. Maintain existing electrical service, electrical distribution, fire alarm and communication equipment in operation until the new electrical service or distribution equipment is energized, tested and accepted.

1.6 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The architectural, mechanical and electrical drawings and specifications shall be considered as mutually explanatory and complementary. Any electrical demolition work called for by one and not by the other shall be performed as though required by all. All sections and subsections of the Electrical work shall be governed by and subject to the general and supplementary conditions. Any discrepancies in or between the drawings and specifications, or between the drawings and actual field conditions shall be reported to the Engineer/Architect in sufficient time to issue an addendum for clarification.

B. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic and the drawings indicate the general layout of the electrical systems. Field verification of scale dimensions on plans is directed since actual locations, distance and levels will be governed by actual field conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND METHODS

A. Materials and methods required for removing, patching, connections, etc., shall be as specified in the associated specification sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 EXAMINATION AND COORDINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions with Installer present for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting demolition.

B. Coordinate the demolition scope of work with the Owner and other Contractors to confirm that all required electrical demolition is addressed and scheduled to avoid disputes.




A. The Electrical Contractor shall remove, cap and/or relocate equipment, outlets, conduit, wire, etc., as shown and specified on drawings and as may become necessary because of existing field conditions. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to visibly examine all existing walls designated for removal to determine the conduit and the wiring that will require capping and/or removal, whether or not such conditions are indicated on the drawings. The contractor shall be held to having visited the site and taken all existing conditions into consideration.

B. Where the architectural drawings indicate that partitions, walls, ceilings, etc., are to be removed the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for removal of all electrical components within those structures including equipment, lighting fixtures, lighting controls, wiring devices, raceways, wiring, electrical systems, etc.

C. In addition to the foregoing, comply with the following:

1. Maintain circuit continuity to all existing fixtures, equipment, outlets, etc., to remain in use whether noted on the plans or not. Field-verify existing items to remain in use. Wiring for existing circuits which must be re-routed or which are partially abandoned, shall be reconnected to service the remaining outlets on the circuit.

2. In the demolition work, remove all unused wiring and cables and unused conduit that is exposed or within accessible ceilings which is affected by and is in the area of the work of this contract.

D. The intention of the electrical demolition drawings is to disconnect and remove all electrical work made void by the scope of the construction and alteration. Field-verify exact material quantities required to be removed.

E. Abandoned electrical power distribution equipment, including switchboards, motor controllers, panelboards, lighting fixtures and controls and wiring devices shall be disconnected and removed unless otherwise noted. All supporting equipment for this equipment to be removed, including hangers, supporting rods, ballasts, etc., shall be removed.

F. All existing electrical work and associated raceway and wiring, which has been made obsolete by the work and/or is shown dashed on the electrical demolition drawings shall be disconnected and removed back to the source of power unless otherwise noted. Although an attempt has been made to indicate all of this work, total accuracy is not guaranteed. Contractor shall visibly examine all areas and walls and ceilings scheduled for removal to determine existing electrical items to remain.

G. Where electrical equipment, conduit, boxes and supporting hardware are removed, patch and finish the surface as required to match the existing unless otherwise noted.

H. Where buried conduits extending out of a concrete slab become abandoned, cut and grind the conduits off flush with top of slab and plug with non-shrink waterproof grout fill.

I. All removed materials, other than removed materials to be relocated, or stored or turned over to the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the project site.

J. Acceptance of contract means installer accepts existing conditions.

K. Contractor shall coordinate all demolition work with all other trades.



L. In walls or floors where a flush device is being removed, but the wall or floor remains or for any outlet which must remain, but has a device removed, provide a blank cover over the outlet. Match the color and material of existing remaining covers in the room or space.

M. In areas where the partitions, ceilings, etc., are indicated to be temporarily removed, the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the disconnection, storage, re-installation and re-connection of equipment or devices within that partition, ceiling, etc., unless otherwise noted.

N. Legally dispose of hazardous materials and ballasts or other equipment containing PCBs and lamps containing mercury or equipment containing oil. Comply with all Federal, state, and local laws. This includes HID and fluorescent lamps determined to be hazardous waste. These shall be disposed of at a permitted hazardous waste disposal facility or other appropriately permitted entity.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean existing electrical distribution equipment affected by the project, including switchboards, motor controllers, panelboards, etc. Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide coverplates for openings. Modify existing panelboard directories (or replace) for panelboards which have had alterations to the circuits originating therein. Describe the load and location.

B. Where luminaires are indicated to be retained and re-used, the Electrical Contractor shall clean all exterior and interior surfaces. Lamps and ballasts shall be replaced with new. Broken electrical parts, including guards and lens shall be replaced to match existing construction unless otherwise noted.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical demolition to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."



26 2413 - 1 SWITCHBOARDS

SECTION 26 2413 – SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.2. Instrumentation.3. Control power.4. Accessory components and features.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Product data for each product and component specified.2. Shop drawings for each switchboard including dimensioned plans and elevations,

component and device lists, and a one-line diagram showing main and branch bus current ratings and short-time and short circuit ratings of switchboard.

3. Manufacturer's Schematic Wiring Diagram.4. Point-to-Point Control Wiring Diagram: Differentiating between manufacturer-installed

and field-installed wiring (may be submitted upon delivery of switchboard).5. Report of field tests and observations certified by the testing organization.6. Maintenance data for materials and products, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance

Manual specified in Division 01 and in Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical."

B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections and details including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.3. Detail bus configuration, current and voltage ratings.4. Detail short circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices.5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.6. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal and control wiring.



C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency, operation and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components.2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NEMA PB 2 “Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.”

E. Comply with NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code.”

F. Comply with UL 891 “Deadfront Switchboards.”

G. Listing and Labeling: Provide switchboard assemblies that are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories for the specific purpose.


A. Deliver products to the site under provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. Deliver in 48 inch maximum width shipping splits unless approved otherwise by both the Contractor and Engineer, individually wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping skids.

C. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 26 0500.

D. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris and traffic.

E. Handle in accordance with NEMA PB2.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure and finish.

F. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NECA 400 General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards." Use factory-installed lifting provisions.


A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels and structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.



B. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight; work in spaces is complete and dry; work above switchboards is complete; and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS


1. General Electric.2. Eaton.3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.4. Square D Co.

B. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:

1. Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted.2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted.3. Sections front and rear aligned.

C. Provide nominal system voltage, continuous main bus amperage, and short circuit current ratings as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.

E. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

F. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.

G. Insulation and isolation for main bus of main section.

H. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory and blank compartments.



I. Buses and Connections: Three-phase, four-wire unless otherwise indicated.

1. Phase-Bus Material: Copper.2. Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, runback bus extensions of same material as

through buses, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit conductors. Provide load terminals for future circuit-breaker positions at full-ampere rating of circuit-breaker position.

3. Ground Bus: 1 inch x 1-1/4 inch, hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity equipped with mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run.

4. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.

2.2 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Circuit Breaker Frames Rated 1200 Amperes or Larger

1. Breakers that have a continuous overcurrent trip rating or setting of 1200A or higher shall include:

a. Energy-reducing maintenance switching with local status indicator

B. Solid State Molded Case Circuit Breakers: (All breakers identified on plans as solid-state with 2,500 ampere frame sizes and below.) Provide molded case switch with electronic sensing, timing and tripping circuits for fully adjustable time current characteristic settings including instantaneous trip, long time trip, long time delay, short time trip and short time delay. Trip setting shall be field programmable with a sealable clear cover. Provide stationary mounting.

2.3 CONTROL POWER

A. Control Circuits: 120-V A.C., supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from control-power transformer.

B. Control-Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits.

C. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller for conductors across hinges and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1 and in accordance with manufacturers’ written installation instructions and the following specifications.



A. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete housekeeping pads specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports.”

B. Anchor each switchboard assembly to slab or housekeeping pad (as indicated) using bolt sizes and types and quantities as recommended by manufacturer and to meet seismic force requirements. When secured to a pad that is separately poured, the bolts are to be installed through the pad and into the slab. Use appropriate length bolts.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.

D. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for switchboards including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of switchboards.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.

F. Install overcurrent protective devices and instrumentation.

1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

G. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 GROUNDING

A. Connections: As indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A.

A. Ground equipment according to the contract documents and the National Electrical Code.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for terminating feeder bus specified in Division 26 Section "Enclosed Bus Assemblies." Drawings indicate general arrangement of bus, fittings, and specialties.

A. Comply with requirements for terminating cable trays specified in Division 26 Section "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of cable trays, fittings, and specialties.

C. Tighten switchboard bus joint bolts and electrical connector and terminal bolts in accordance with manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not stated, use those specified in UL 486A.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



A. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section “Identification for Electrical Systems.”


A. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage and grounding.

B. Measure insulation resistance of each bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for one minute each. Test voltage shall be 1000 volts and minimum acceptable value for insulation resistance is 2 megohms.

C. Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints using a calibrated torque wrench. Tightness shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommended values.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

A. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated in the power systems study.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt and debris. Touch-up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.



26 2816 - 1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES

SECTION 26 2816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible and non-fusible switches.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, enclosure type, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings and accessories.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components and accessories within same product category from single source and from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Component Standards: Provide components complying with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" and which are listed and labeled by UL. Comply with UL Standard 98 and NEMA Standard KS 1.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS - GENERAL


1. General Electric.2. Square D Company.



3. Siemens.

2.2 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. General: Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches in types, sizes, duties, features, ratings, enclosures and accessories as indicated within Disconnect Schedule, located on the drawings.

B. Fusible and Non Fusible Switches: Type HD heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break load interrupter enclosed knife switch, externally operable, lockable handle, interlocked with cover in closed position. Unless indicated otherwise, provide 3-blade with solid neutral when a neutral is provided. Compliant with NEMA KS 1.

C. Provide positive pressure, reinforced Type Class R fuse clips for fusible switches 600 amps or less to prevent other than UL Class RK current limiting fuses. Provide for Class L fuses for switches over 600A.

D. Service Switches: Shall be as above but shall also be UL listed for use as service equipment under UL Standard 98 or 869.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install enclosed switches in locations as indicated level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide interconnection wiring for control and indication devices where applicable.

B. Install individual wall-mounted switches with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches such that label and rating information is readable without removing the fuse. Provide permanent label affixed to the inside of the disconnect switch cover indicating the fuse class and size installed.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



3.4 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, and abrasions.



28 3111 - 1 DIGITAL ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

SECTION 28 3111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire Alarm and Detection Systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.


A. The fire alarm design documents and this specification section describe the minimum required features, material quality and operational requirements of the fire alarm system. These documents do not depict every connection to be made and wire to be installed. The Vendor and Contractor are solely responsible for determining all wiring, programming, interconnections and additional equipment required to create a complete and fully functional fire alarm system, based on the equipment and performance characteristics described within these documents.

B. Provide all components, devices, hardware, software, programming, peripheral devices, extension components, conduit, wiring, etc., required to extend the existing fire alarm system with the new fire alarm system. Required components include, but are not limited to, initiating devices and circuits, signaling devices and circuits, notification devices and circuits, monitoring devices and circuits, power supplies, batteries, auxiliary devices and control circuits for other building systems such as dampers, magnetic door hold open devices, fan shut down, elevator recall, etc. Extend the existing fire alarm in a manner that the existing fire alarm system’s functionality and annunciation is equivalent to the existing conditions unless otherwise noted. Upon completion of construction, the complete fire alarm system shall function as a single system, able to be reset from any single reset location point, and annunciated at any annunciator location.

C. Device layouts and limited equipment have been shown on the construction documents. Additional equipment, wiring, components, etc required to create a complete and fully functional system has not been shown, and is the responsibility of the Contractor. Shop drawing submittals shall indicate all requirements to create said fire alarm system.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Failure to comply with all of the requirements within specification 26 0500 and within this specification section will result in the submitted shop drawing being rejected without review. All listed requirements must be submitted within a single submittal package.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level II minimum.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated on drawings and required to complete installation if not indicated on drawings. Indicate part numbers being ordered for each equipment or component variation required. If device or equipment is shown on construction documents, indicate corresponding fire alarm symbol at the top of each product data sheet.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include CAD floor plans indicating the complete layout of the entire system, including auxiliary equipment, wiring and device addresses.

a. A legend shall be provided to indicate which fire alarm symbols correspond with construction document fire alarm symbols, if different.

2. Include a complete fire alarm riser diagram indicating the wiring sequence of devices and their connections to the control equipment. Include a color code schedule for the wiring.

3. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.

4. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.5. Include battery-size calculations including total available capacity, used capacity and

future capacity available.6. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that

each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

7. Manufacturer wiring requirements, such as size, type and manufacturer.

D. Installation and maintenance manuals per Section 26 0500.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.

3. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of the same name and include the following:

a. Frequency of testing of installed components.b. Frequency of inspection of installed components.c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.



d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

4. Provide shop drawings as reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. 5. Provide hardcopy and electronically reproducible CAD floor plans indicating location of

fire alarm devices, wiring and associated addresses.

G. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Device address list.

H. Project Record Documents:

1. Submit record documents per Section 26 0500.2. Provide a CAD drawing of each building area depicting each device location and

address. Labeling of devices on drawings shall be consistent with labeling in the field. Scale CAD drawings no smaller than 1/16 inch = 1 foot-0 inch.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: A factory authorized, licensed electrical or security contractor with minimum 5 years experience in the design, installation and maintenance of fire alarm systems by fire alarm system manufacturer specified and selected. Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level II technician.

C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as an extension of existing system.


E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.

1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. UL-certified automatic and manual addressable fire alarm system consisting of multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only. Compliant with NFPA 72.

B. Alarm Indication: By synchronized sounding of horns and synchronized flashing of strobes. Horn and visual signals shall be synchronized throughout the facility.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner's written permission.



B. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service and label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.

C. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing disconnected equipment and wiring.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide one (1) year warranty for all labor and materials from date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide products compatible with existing devices installed within facility. Devices installed in finished areas should match existing devices.

1.11 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT DEVICES

A. Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268.2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.3. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base in locations shown on drawings with all mounting hardware provided. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

4. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

5. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

6. Photoelectric Smoke Detector: Detector shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density.

7. Detector shall be directly connected to a SLC loop. Each detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

8. Dual status LEDs shall be provided on each smoke detector to indicate the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel, or in an alarm condition.

9. Each detector shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel.

10. Low Frequency Sounder Base: Where shown within sleeping rooms, each detector shall be provided with a local, addressable sounder base, capable of being controlled by the fire alarm control panel. Sounder base shall be capable of providing a temporal 4 evacuation tone and a 520Hz tone.

B. Heat Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 521.



2. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 degrees F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 degrees F per minute unless otherwise indicated.

3. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. Provide two-piece head/base design.

4. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

5. Device shall connect directly to a SLC loop.6. Dual status LEDs shall be provided on each smoke detector to indicate the detector is

operational and in regular communication with the control panel, or in an alarm condition.7. Each detector shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition

and report that condition to the control panel.

1.12 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

B. Audio Horn Devices:

1. Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille.

2. Device shall be capable of providing a ‘high’ and ‘low’ dBA setting via an integral selector switch.

3. Comply with UL 464. 4. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 85 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn,

using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol. Sound pressure levels shall not exceed 120dBA in an occupied area.

C. Visual Notification Appliances:

1. Xenon strobe lights or equivalent in compliance with UL 1971 and ADAAG with clear or nominal clear lens for fire alarm systems.

2. The maximum pulse duration shall be two-tenths of one second (0.2 second) with a maximum duty cycle of 40 percent. The flash rate shall be 1 Hertz.

3. Visual alarm notification appliances shall be flash in a temporal pattern and fully synchronized with all other units.

4. Rated Light Output:

a. 15/30/75/110 Candela, selectable in the field, as indicated on drawings.

5. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.6. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.

D. Combination Audible/Visual Notification Appliances:

1. Single device with integral audible and visual notification, meeting the requirements for each component (audible and visual) per this specification.

1.13 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES

A. Addressable Relays:



1. Addressable relay module available for control of auxiliary devices, rated for the electrical load being controlled. Contractor shall provide additional slave relay(s) as required to achieve desired function.

2. Addressable relays shall connect directly to a SLC loop and receive power from a separate 24VDC circuit. Addressable relay shall supply 24VDC power to the device(s) being controlled, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

B. Addressable Monitor Modules:

1. Addressable monitor module available for monitoring of auxiliary devices. It shall interface initiating devices with the fire alarm control panel.

2. Addressable monitor modules shall connect directly to a SLC loop and receive power from a separate 24VDC circuit.

3. The addressable monitor module shall provide the required power to operate the monitored device(s).

4. At the Contractor’s option, an integral relay capable of providing a direct signal auxiliary device may be provided within the monitor module.

1.14 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT EXTENDER PANELS

A. This Contractor and Vendor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing notification appliance circuit extender panels as necessary to provide remote power supply for notification appliance circuits, based on calculations performed by the Vendor.

B. Notification appliance circuit extender panels may be installed only in back-of-house areas such as janitor, electrical, mechanical and telecommunications closets. Coordinate final locations with Architect/Engineer prior to rough-in where not indicated on drawings. Indicate locations of extender panels on shop drawing submittals.

C. Notification appliance circuit extender panels shall be self-contained remote power supplies with batteries and charger mounted in a surface or recessed lockable cabinet. Manufacturer shall match fire alarm control panel.

D. Battery capacity shall be sufficient for operation for 24 hours of non-alarm state, followed by alarm for 15 minutes.

E. Notification appliance circuit extender panels shall be provided with 25 percent spare capacity for future devices.

F. Power for notification appliance extender panels shall be from a 120VAC circuit supplied by the nearest panelboard. Extend two #12 conductors and 1#12 ground in 3/4 inch conduit to each notification appliance circuit extender panel from a dedicated 20A, single pole circuit breaker. Provide red handle-lock device for each circuit breaker serving notification appliance extender panels.

1.15 WIRING

A. All fire alarm wiring and cables shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.

B. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer.



C. All analog voice speaker and analog telephone circuits shall utilize twisted/shielded pair to eliminate cross talk.

D. All wiring and cables shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70 Article 760.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 72, local and state codes and manufacturer recommendations for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

B. Connection to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections.

1. Connecting new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building.2. Connecting new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station.3. Provide all items, wiring, devices, components, programming, etc., to modify, supplement

and expand the existing fire alarm system as necessary to extend existing fire alarm system. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.

4. After acceptance of the new fire alarm system, remove existing, disconnected fire alarm equipment and restore damaged surfaces.

C. Devices specified to be surface mounted shall be mounted on a manufacturer provided backbox, painted to match the color of the device. The backbox shall be the same size and shape of the device, and must not have visible knockouts.

D. Signaling Line Circuit Devices:

1. General:

a. Do not install pull stations, fire alarm annunciators and signaling appliances before all dust producing construction in the area has ceased.

b. Ceiling mounted devices shall be located where shown on the floor plans or reflected ceiling plans. Where a conflict arises with architectural elements or other items that will not allow installation in shown location, the Contractor shall adjust location of device such that the new location meets all NFPA 72 requirements and applicable building codes.

c. Coordinate the location of all ceiling devices with luminaires, sprinkler heads, piping, diffusers, grilles and other obstructions to maintain a neat and operable operation. Mounting locations and spacing must in accordance with NFPA 72.

d. Center ceiling mounted devices within each ceiling tile where installed in a grid type ceiling. Devices installed within hard ceilings shall be arranged in a neat and uniform pattern.

2. Smoke Detectors:

a. Detector heads shall not be installed until after the final construction cleaning, unless required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. If detector heads must be installed prior to final cleaning, they may not be installed until they can be connected to a fully functional fire alarm control panel.



b. All smoke detectors must be installed in an accessible location. Provide access panels as required. Coordinate with General Contractor.

c. Provide a smoke detector at each Fire Alarm Panel and Notification Appliance Circuit Extender Panel location whether shown on drawings or not.

d. Smoke detectors must be located at least 3 feet-0 inches from each supply air diffuser and return grille.

e. Smoke detectors shall be installed at least 12 inches from any part of a lighting fixture.

3. Heat Detectors:

a. Detector heads shall not be installed until after the final construction cleaning, unless required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. If detector heads must be installed prior to final cleaning, they may not be installed until they can be connected to a fully functional fire alarm control panel.

b. All heat detectors must be installed in an accessible location.c. Provide heat detectors within 2 feet-0 inches of each sprinkler head within elevator

pit, elevator shaft and elevator equipment room. Final quantity of sprinkler heads and respective locations must be coordinated with Fire Protection Contractor.

d. Heat detectors shall be installed at least 12 inches from any part of a lighting fixture.

E. Notification Appliance Devices:

1. Devices shall be located where shown on drawings. 2. Wall mounted devices shall be installed on flush-mounted backboxes.3. Ceiling mounted devices shall be installed flush with ceiling, centered within ceiling tile if

installed in a grid-type system. Devices installed within hard ceilings shall be arranged in a neat and uniform pattern.

4. Where devices are to be installed in a location having a ceiling exceeding a 30 foot-0 inch height, provide stem-mounting device and support hardware, installed such that the entire device is below 30 feet-0 inches.

F. Addressable Interface Devices:

1. Addressable Relays:

a. Mount each addressable relay within an enclosure located in an accessible serviceable area as near as possible to the device(s) being controlled unless otherwise specifically noted. Provide all required mounting hardware, and label each enclosure to indicate relay function. Provide remote indicator to allow inspection of the device status from a floor standing location if device is not visible from a floor standing position.

2. Addressable Monitor Modules:

a. Mount each addressable monitor module within an enclosure located in an accessible serviceable area as near as possible to the device(s) being controlled unless otherwise specifically noted. Provide all required mounting hardware, and label each enclosure to indicate device being monitored. Provide remote indicator to allow inspection of the device status from a floor standing location if device is not visible from a floor standing position.



G. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

H. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

2.2 WIRING

A. Fire alarm wiring shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and in compliance with the National Fire Codes.

B. Connect all components together for a completely functional ready to operate system as shown on the drawings, as specified herein and as directed by the manufacturer.

C. Install all fire alarm wiring in conduit.

1. Wiring not associated with fire alarm detection, alarm or auxiliary fire protection functions shall not be routed in fire alarm conduits.

D. Fire alarm wiring splices shall be avoided to the extent possible. If needed, splices may only be made in accessible junction boxes, compliant with NFPA 70.

2.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Paint all junction boxes associated with the fire alarm system red. Identify SLC and NAC circuit on junction box cover.

C. Color Coding: Color code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Differentiate the following circuit types by using different conductor colors with an overall red jacket.

1. Alarm Circuits.2. Supervisory Circuits.3. Initiating Circuits.4. Notification Circuits.5. Door Release.6. Central Station.7. DC Power Supply.8. Power Branch Circuits.

2.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100 and manufacturer written requirements. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire alarm control unit.

2.5 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION

A. General:



1. Refer to the Fire Alarm Operation Matrix within the drawings for basic requirements and system input/output relationships.

2. Maintain existing sequence of operation for all existing fire alarm devices.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by Owner’s representative and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Test fire alarm system in accordance with NFPA 72 Chapter 14, local Fire Marshal requirements and local building codes.

2. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

D. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

E. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



APPENDIX A - 1 INTERIOR FINISH KEY

APPENDIX A – INTERIOR FINISH KEY WALLS: Paint IPS -1A Semi-gloss Latex on Gyp. Bd. Sherwin Williams, TBD, to match adjacent surfaces HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES: Paint IPS -5A Satin Enamel on Metal, color to match adjacent metal door frames. CEILINGS: Acoustical AC-1 Acoustical Ceiling, USG Sandrift 808 Clima-Plus Shadow line edge, white, 2’X2’, 15/16”

grid Paint IPS-2A Flat Latex on Gyp./Concrete, Ceiling White to match surrounding ceiling area